HDD MULTIMEDIA AV NAVIGATION SERVER AVIC-Z3 · HDD MULTIMEDIA AV NAVIGATION SERVER AVIC-Z3 Notice to all users: This software requires that the navigation system is ... Voice To Ensure

Operation Manual

HDD MULTIMEDIA AV NAVIGATION SERVER

AVIC-Z3Notice to all users:This software requires that the navigation system isproperly connected to your vehicle’s parking brake anddepending on your vehicle, additional installation maybe required. For more information, please contact yourAuthorized Pioneer Electronics retailer or call us at(800) 421-1404.

English

! The screens shown in the examples maydiffer from the actual screens.

! The actual screens may be changed with-out notice for performance and functionimprovements.

IntroductionManual Overview 8

– How to use this manual 8– Overview for each chapter 8– Terminology 10– About the definition of terminology 10– Color difference of the map display

between day and night 10License Agreement 11

– PIONEER AVIC-Z3 - for U.S.A. 11– PIONEER AVIC-Z3 - for Canada 13– Terms and Conditions for the Tele Atlas

Data 15– About the Data for the Map

Database 18– Copyright 18– About Gracenote® 19

Before Using the SystemImportant Safety Information 21Additional Safety Information 22

– To ensure safe driving 22Features (Characteristics of this

software) 22– About XM NavTraffic Service and

Pioneer Navigation 24Notes for Hard Disk Drive 24

– Recording equipment andcopyright 24

– Notes when writing data to the harddisk drive at low temperature 24

– Points about recording 24– Data saved or recorded by the

customer 25– Failure to operate 25

Visit Our Web site 25

Basic OperationFlow from Startup to Termination 26How to Use Navigation Menu Screens 26

– Displaying the Navigation menu 26– Navigation menu overview 27

Basic Navigation 28– Basic flow of operation 28– Calculating your destination by using

Address Search 28– Checking and modifying the route 32– When the route guidance starts 33

Canceling the Route Guidance 33Modifying the Route Calculation

Conditions 34– Items that users can operate 34

Checking the Current Route 35– Checking the passing streets with a

list 35– Checking the entire route overview on

the map 36Editing Waypoints 36

– Adding a waypoint 36– Deleting a waypoint 37– Sorting waypoints 37– Skipping a waypoint 37

How to Read the Map DisplayHow to Use the Map 38

– Switching the view mode 38– How to view the map of the current

location 38– Roads without turn-by-turn

instructions 43– Changing the scale of the map 43

Contents

En2

– Scroll the map to the location you wantto see 43

– Shortcut menu 45

Modifying Map ConfigurationsEntering the Map Menu 46Setting the Item on the Map Screen 46Selecting the Shortcut 48Displaying POI on the Map 49Viewing the Map Color Legend 49Changing the View Mode for the Navigation

Map 49Setting the Map Color Change between Day

and Night 50Changing the Setting of Navigation

Interruption Screen 50Changing the Map Color 50

Setting a Route to Your DestinationSearching for Points of Interest (POI)

Statewide 51– Searching for a POI directly from the

name of the facilities 51– Searching for POIs by specifying a

category first 52– Searching for POIs by specifying a city

name first 53Finding a POI in the Vicinity 53

– Searching for the facilities around thecurrent position 53

– Searching for the facilities around thescroll cursor 54

Searching for Your Destination by Specifyingthe Telephone Number 55

Route Calculation to Your Home Location orto Your Favorite Location 55

Selecting Destination from “DestinationHistory” and “Address Book” 56

Registering/deleting POI Shortcuts 56– Registering a POI shortcut 56

– Deleting a POI shortcut 57

Registering and Editing LocationsRegistering Locations Overview 58Registering your home and your favorite

location 58Registering a Location into “Address

Book” 59– Registering a location by scroll

mode 59– Registering a location by “Address

Book” 59– Viewing “Address Book” 60– Editing the entry in “Address Book” 60– Deleting the entry in “Address

Book” 63Operating “Destination History” 64

– Deleting the entry in “DestinationHistory” 64

Using Traffic InformationUsing XM NavTraffic Information 65

– Viewing traffic list 65– Confirming traffic information on the

map 66– Setting an alternative route to avoid

traffic congestion 67– Selecting traffic information to

display 69

Using XM Tuner and Other InformationUsing the XM Tuner to View Stock, Sports,

and Other Information 70– Displaying stock prices 70– Storing browsable information 70– Displaying favorite browsable

Information 71Checking the Reception Status of the XM

Tuner 72Emergency Info 72

En 3

Contents

– Checking the information registered asEmergency Info 73

– Searching for car service in anemergency 74

– Registering user information 75Setting the Vehicle Dynamics Display 76

Using Hands-free PhoningHands-free Phoning Overview 77

– Preparing communication devices 77– Setting up for hands-free phoning 78– Receiving a phone call 80– Making a phone call 81– Transferring the phone book 83– Registering a phone number in “Dial

Favorites” 84– Editing the entry in “Phone Book” 84– Editing the received call or dialed

number history 86

Modifying the General Settings forNavigation FunctionsEntering Settings Menu 88Setting the Volume for Guidance and

Phone 88Customizing the Regional Settings 88

– Changing the language for navigationguidance and menu 88

– Setting the time difference 89– Customizing the keyboard layout 89– Changing the unit between km and

miles 89– Changing the virtual speed of the

vehicle 90Checking the Setting Related with

Hardware 90– Checking the connections of leads and

installation positions 90– Checking sensor learning status and

driving status 91

– Correcting the installation angle 92– Checking the device and version

information 92– Checking the hard disk

information 92Registering the Home Location and Favorite

Location 93Changing the Background Picture 93

– Limitations for importing pictures 94– Precautions when changing the Splash

Screen 95Using the Demonstration Guidance 95Correcting the Current Location 95Restoring the Default Setting 96

Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Driveand Radio)Basic Operation 97

– Switching the Audio operationscreen 97

– Selecting a source 97– About Steering Remote Control 98– Viewing the audio operation screen and

displaying the Audio Settingsmenu 99

Operating a Music CD 99– Selecting [CD] as the source 99– About auto hard disk recording 100– Screen configuration 100– Touch panel key operation 101

Operating the CD-ROM (MP3 disc) 101– Selecting [ROM] as the source 102– Screen configuration 102– Touch panel key operation 102– Notes on playing MP3 disc 104

Operating the DVD 104– Selecting [DVD] as the source 104– Screen configuration 104– Touch panel key operation 105

Contents

En4

– Searching for a desired scene, startingplayback from a specified time 106

– Entering the numericalcommands 106

Operating the Radio (FM) 107– Selecting [FM] as the source 107– Screen configuration 107

Touch panel key operation 107Storing the strongest broadcast

frequencies 108Tuning in strong signals 108Operating the Radio (AM) 108

– Selecting [AM] as the source 108– Screen configuration 108– Touch panel key operation 108– Storing the strongest broadcast

frequencies 109– Tuning in strong signals 109

Using the AV Source (Music Library)Music Library Recording 110

– Recording all tracks in a CD 111– Recording a CD manually 111– Recording only the first track of a

CD 111– Stopping CD recording 111– Notes on CD recording 112

Music Library Play 112– Selecting [LIBRARY] as the

source 112– Screen configuration 112– Touch panel key operation 113– Creating a playlist with a customized

order 116– Editing a playlist or tracks 117– Assigning another candidate for title

information 122

Using the AV Source (XM, SIRIUS)Operating the XM Satellite Radio 123

Selecting [XM] as the source 123– Screen configuration 123– Touch panel key operation 124– Display the Radio ID 125– Selecting a channel from the XM

channel list display 125– Using “My Mix” function 126– Using the direct traffic announcement

function 127Operating the SIRIUS Satellite Radio 127

– Selecting [SIRIUS] as the source 128– Touch panel key operation 128– Selecting teams for Game Alert 129– Displaying game information (Game

Info) 130– Using “My Mix” function 130– Using the Traffic & Weather preset

function 132

Using the AV Source (M-CD, iPod®, TV)Operating the Multi-CD Player 133

– Selecting [M-CD] as the source 133– Screen configuration 133– Touch panel key operation 133

Operating the iPod® 134– Selecting [iPod] as the source 134– Screen configuration 135– Touch panel key operation 135– Browsing for a song 136

Operating the TV tuner 136– Selecting [TV] as the source 136– Screen configuration 137– Touch panel key operation 137– Storing and recalling broadcast

frequencies 137– Storing the strongest broadcast

stations sequentially 138

Using the AV Source (AV, EXT, AUX)Operating the AV Input source 139

En 5

Contents

– Selecting [AV INPUT] as thesource 139

Operating the External Unit 139– Selecting [EXT 1] or [EXT 2] as the

source 139– Screen configuration 139– Touch panel key operation 139– Operate the external unit by using 1 key

— 6 key 140– Operate the external unit by using

Function 1— Function 4 140– Switching the automatic and manual

function 140Operating the AUX input source (AUX) 141

– Selecting [AUX] as the source 141

Customizing the Audio Setting relatedwith Audio VisualAV Setting Overview 142

– How to Operate the Audio Settingsscreen 142

Customizing the Audio Settings Items 142– Using the equalizer 142– Setting the simulated sound

stage 144– Using balance adjustment 144– Using subwoofer output 145– Using non fading output 145– Adjusting loudness 145– Using the high pass filter 146– Adjusting source levels 146

Customizing the System Settings Items 146– How to view and operate the System

Settings 146– Setting up the built-in DVD drive 147– Setting the parental lock 148– Changing the wide screen mode 149– Setting for rear view camera 149– Setting the video input 150– Switching the auxiliary setting 150

– Switching the muting/attenuationtiming 150

– Switching the muting/attenuationlevel 151

– Changing the voice output of thenavigation guidance 151

– Switching the auto antennasetting 151

– Setting the clock display on the videoimage 151

– Setting the CD recording mode 152– Setting the rear output and subwoofer

controller 152– Switching the 5.1ch setting 152

Other Functions 153– Selecting the video for “Rear

display” 153– Operating the picture adjustment 153– Switching the backlight on or off 154

Language Code Chart for DVD 155

Operating Your Navigation System withVoiceTo Ensure Safe Driving 156Basics of Voice Operation 156

– Flow of voice operation 156– To start voice operation 156

Tips for Voice Operation 157An Example of Voice Operation 158

– Search for POI in vicinity 158– Search for the playlist 159

Available Voice Commands 159– Basic commands for voice

operation 161– Voice commands related to

navigation 161– Voice commands related to hands-free

phoning 164– Voice commands related to AV

operation 165

Contents

En6

– After checking traffic informationmanually 167

– Location screen (A) and (B) 167Other Voice Commands 168

– Other voice commands for navigationoperation 168

– Other voice commands for AVoperation 170

– Category list for vicinity search 172

AppendixTroubleshooting 174Messages and How to React to Them 179Messages for Audio Functions 184Returning the Navigation System to the

Default or Factory Settings 187– Setting items to be deleted 188– If system errors frequently occur 190– Completely returning the navigation

system to the initial state 190Adjusting the Response Positions of the

Touch Panels (Touch PanelCalibration) 190

Positioning Technology 191– Positioning by GPS 191– Positioning by dead reckoning 192– How do GPS and dead reckoning work

together? 192Handling Large Errors 193

– When the positioning by GPS isimpossible 193

Vehicles that Cannot Obtain Speed PulseData 194

Conditions Likely to Cause NoticeablePositioning Errors 194

When the Hard Disk Drive isDisconnected 197

Route Setting Information 197– Route search specifications 197

Detail Information for Playable Media 199

– DVD discs and other DVD mediatypes 199

– About playing DualDisc 199– About AVCHD recorded discs 199– CD-R/CD-RW discs 199– MP3 files 200

Display Information 202– Navigation menu 202– Shortcut menu 203

Menu in the Audio Screen 204Glossary 205

Index 209

En 7

Contents

Manual OverviewThis manual provides important informationyou need to make full use of your new naviga-tion system. The beginning sections outlinethe navigation system and describe its basicoperation. The later sections describe the de-tails of the navigation functions.Chapter 12 to Chapter 17 describe how to op-erate the AV functions. Please read thesechapters when you use a disc in the built-inDVD drive or operate the Pioneer audio equip-ment connected to the navigation system.

How to use this manualBe sure to read the followingdescriptions! License Agreement (= Refer to License

Agreement on page 11)This provides a license agreement of thissoftware. Be sure to read this before usingthe software.

! About the Data for the Map Database(= Refer to About the Data for the MapDatabase on page 18)This provides the date when the Map Data-base was recorded.

! Copyright (= Refer to Copyright onpage 18)This provides the copyright of the Map Da-tabase.

! About Gracenote® (= Refer to AboutGracenote® on page 19)This provides a license agreement andcopyright of the Gracenote® music recogni-tion service. Be sure to read this beforeusing this navigation system.

Finding the operation procedure fromwhat you want to doWhen you have decided what you want to do,you can find the page you need from the“Contents”.

Finding the operation procedure froma menu nameIf you want to check the meaning of each itemdisplayed on the screen, you will find the ne-cessary page from the “Display Information” atthe end of the manual.

GlossarySee the glossary to find the meaning of aterm.

IndexThe section at the end of this manual providesan index. See each term to find the mainpages where it is stated.

Overview for each chapter2 Before Using the System

For safety reasons, it is particularly im-portant that you fully understand yournavigation system before using it. Besure to read this chapter.

3 Basic OperationPlease read this section if you want tooperate the navigation system immedi-ately. It will explain the basics of thissystem.This section describes the basic opera-tions for navigation.

4 How to Read the Map DisplayThis section describes how to read the mapscreen, and the method of changing mapview or map scale.

5 Modifying Map ConfigurationsThe behavior of your navigation system de-pends on the map display and guidance set-tings. If you need to change any of thecurrent settings, read the relevant section ofthis chapter.

Introduction

En8

Chapter

01

6 Setting a Route to Your DestinationThis section describes various ways tosearch for a destination, edit the currentroute conditions and operate the route dur-ing route guidance.

7 Registering and Editing LocationsYou can register and edit the points on themap. This chapter describes how to registera home location, favorite location or otherlocation, and how to edit the entry in “Ad-dress Book”.

8 Using Traffic InformationWhen Pioneer XM satellite radio tuner (GEX-P10XMT) is connected to the navigation sys-tem, the system can acquire traffic informa-tion and perform navigation using the trafficinformation. This chapter describes ways ofviewing traffic icons that are displayed onthe map and operation related traffic infor-mation.

9 Using XM Tuner and Other InformationWhen Pioneer XM satellite radio tuner (GEX-P10XMT) is connected to the navigation sys-tem, variety of information other than trafficcan be acquired. The navigation system canalso register emergency information. Thischapter describes ways of the informationacquired with XM satellite radio, registrationof emergency information.

a Using Hands-free PhoningWhen you are using a cellular phone featur-ing Bluetooth® technology by connectingthe Bluetooth unit (sold separately) to thenavigation system, you can operate your cel-lular phone hands-free. This chapter de-scribes the operations related to hands-freephoning.

b Modifying the General Settings for Na-vigation Functions

The behavior of your navigation system de-pends a number of general settings for navi-gation functions. If you need to change any

of the initial settings (default settings), readthe relevant section of this chapter.

c Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Driveand Radio)

This section describes how to use DVD-Vi-deos, CDs, MP3, discs and the radio.

d Using the AV Source (Music Library)You can record a music CD to the hard diskdrive in the navigation system. This chapterdescribes recording music and playing backthe recorded music.

e Using the AV Source (XM, SIRIUS)This chapter describes the audio source op-erations that can be used when an XM satel-lite radio tuner or SiriusConnect universaltuner is connected.

f Using the AV Source (M-CD, iPod®, TV)This chapter describes the audio source op-erations that can be used when Pioneeraudio equipment featuring IP-BUS (Multi-CD player, Interface adapter for iPod, TVtuner) is connected.

g Using the AV Source (AV, EXT, AUX)This chapter describes the audio source op-erations that can be used when connectingAV equipment with an RCA connector (AVinput), future Pioneer devices (externalunit), or auxiliary equipment (AUX).

h Customizing the Audio Setting relatedwith Audio Visual

Using the audio source, various audio-visualsettings are available to suit your tastes.This chapter describes how to change thesettings.

i Operating Your Navigation Systemwith Voice

This section describes navigation opera-tions, such as searching the destinationand performing audio operations by voice.

Introduction

En 9

Chapter

01Intro

ductio

n

j AppendixPlease read the appendix to learn moreabout your navigation system and informa-tion such as the availability of after-care.Please see “Display Information” at the endof this manual to check the details for eachitem on the menu.

TerminologyBefore moving on, take a few minutes to readthe following information about the conven-tions used in this manual. They will help yougreatly as you learn how to use your newequipment.! Hardware buttons on your navigation sys-

tem are described in ALL CAPITAL,BOLD lettering:e.g.)MENU button, MAP button.

! Items in the different menus or touch panelkeys available on the screen are describedin brackets [ ] and bold:e.g.)[Destination], [Settings].

! Extra information, alternative usages andother notes are presented like this:e.g.)p Touch panel keys which are not avail-

able at this time are grayed out.! References to sections that describe infor-

mation related to the current topics are in-dicated like this:e.g.)= For details, refer to Modifying the RouteCalculation Conditions on page 34

About the definition ofterminology“Front Display” and “Rear Display”In this manual, the screen that is attached tothe body of this navigation unit will be referredto as the “Front Display”. Any additional op-tional screen that is purchased for use in con-

junction with this navigation unit will bereferred to as the “Rear Display”.

“Video image”“Video image” in this manual indicates themoving image from DVD-Video in the built-inDVD drive or from the equipment that is con-nected to this system with an AV-BUS or RCAcable, such as a TV tuner or general-purposeAV equipment.

Color difference of the mapdisplay between day and night

Night display

The examples in this manual are illustratedusing the daytime display. When driving atnight, the colors you see may differ from thoseshown.

Introduction

En10

Chapter

01

License AgreementPIONEER AVIC-Z3 - for U.S.A.THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEENYOU, AS THE END USER, AND PIONEERELECTRONICS (USA) INC. (“PIONEER”).PLEASE READ THE TERMS AND CONDI-TIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT CAREFULLY BE-FORE USING THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ONTHE PIONEER PRODUCTS. BY USING THESOFTWARE INSTALLED ON THE PIONEERPRODUCTS, YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BYTHE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THE SOFT-WARE INCLUDES A DATABASE LICENSED BYTHIRD PARTY SUPPLIER( S) (“SUPPLIERS”),AND YOUR USE OF THE DATABASE IS COV-ERED BY THE SUPPLIERS’ SEPARATETERMS, WHICH ARE ATTACHED TO THISAGREEMENT (Refer to page 15). IF YOU DONOT AGREE WITH ALL OF THESE TERMS,PLEASE RETURN THE PIONEER PRODUCTS(INCLUDING THE SOFTWARE, AND ANYWRITTEN MATERIALS) WITHIN FIVE (5) DAYSOF RECEIPT OF THE PRODUCTS, TO THEAUTHORIZED PIONEER DEALER FROMWHICH YOU PURCHASED THEM. USE OFTHE SOFTWARE SHALL BE DEEMED TO BEYOUR CONSENT TO THE LICENSE AGREE-MENT.

1 GRANT OF LICENSEPioneer grants to you a non-transferable,non exclusive license to use the software in-stalled on the Pioneer products (the “Soft-ware”) and the related documentation solelyfor your own personal use or for internaluse by your business, only on such Pioneerproducts.You shall not copy, reverse engineer, trans-late, port, modify or make derivative worksof the Software. You shall not loan, rent, dis-close, publish, sell, assign, lease, subli-cense, market or otherwise transfer theSoftware or use it in any manner not ex-pressly authorized by this agreement. Youshall not derive or attempt to derive thesource code or structure of all or any portion

of the Software by reverse engineering, dis-assembly, decompilation, or any othermeans. You shall not use the Software to op-erate a service bureau or for any other useinvolving the processing of data for otherpersons or entities.Pioneer and its licensor(s) shall retain allcopyright, trade secret, patent and otherproprietary ownership rights in the Soft-ware. The Software is copyrighted and maynot be copied, even if modified or mergedwith other products. You shall not alter or re-move any copyright notice or proprietary le-gend contained in or on the Software.You may transfer all of your license rights inthe Software, the related documentationand a copy of this License Agreement to an-other party, provided that the party readsand agrees to accept the terms and condi-tions of this License Agreement.

2 DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTYThe Software and related documentationare provided to you “AS IS”. PIONEER ANDITS LICENSOR(S) (for the purpose of provi-sions 2 and 3, Pioneer and its licensor(s)shall be collectively referred to as “Pioneer”)MAKES AND YOU RECEIVE NO WARRANTYFOR THE SOFTWARE, WHETHER EXPRESSOR IMPLIED, AND ALLWARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR ANYPARTICULAR PURPOSE FOR THE SOFT-WARE ARE EXPRESSLY EXCLUDED. SOMESTATES DO NOT ALLOW EXCLUSION OF IM-PLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE EX-CLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. TheSoftware is complex and may contain somenonconformities, defects or errors. Pioneerdoes not warrant that the Software will meetyour needs or expectations, that operationof the Software will be error free or uninter-rupted, or that all non-conformities can orwill be corrected. Furthermore, Pioneer doesnot make any representations or warrantiesregarding the use or results of the use ofthe Software in terms of its accuracy, relia-bility or otherwise.

Introduction

En 11

Chapter

01Intro

ductio

n

3 LIMITATION OF LIABILITYIN NO EVENT SHALL PIONEER BE LIABLEFOR ANY DAMAGES, CLAIM OR LOSS IN-CURRED BY YOU (INCLUDING, WITHOUTLIMITATION, COMPENSATORY, INCIDEN-TAL, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUEN-TIAL, OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES, LOSTPROFITS, LOST INCOME, LOST SALES ORBUSINESS, EXPENDITURES, INVEST-MENTS, OR COMMITMENTS IN CONNEC-TION WITH ANY BUSINESS, LOSS OF ANYGOODWILL, OR DAMAGES) RESULTINGFROM THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USETHE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF PIONEER HASBEEN INFORMED OF, KNEW OF, ORSHOULD HAVE KNOWN OF THE LIKELI-HOOD OF SUCH DAMAGES. THIS LIMITA-TION APPLIES TO ANY AND ALL CAUSESOF ACTION INDIVIDUALLY OR IN THE AG-GREGATE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITA-TION BREACH OF CONTRACT, BREACH OFWARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILI-TY, MISREPRESENTATION, AND OTHERTORTS. IF PIONEER’S WARRANTY DISCLAI-MER OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SETFORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT SHALL ORFOR ANY REASON WHATSOEVER BE HELDUNENFORCEABLE OR INAPPLICABLE,YOU AGREE THAT PIONEER’S LIABILITYSHALL NOT EXCEED FIFTY PERCENT (50%)OF THE PRICE PAID BY YOU FOR THE EN-CLOSED PIONEER PRODUCT.Some states do not allow the exclusion orlimitation of incidental or consequential da-mages, so the above limitation or exclusionmay not apply to you. This warranty disclai-mer and limitation of liability shall not beapplicable to the extent that they are prohib-ited by any applicable federal, state or locallaw which provides that such a disclaimeror limitation cannot be waived or pre-empted.

4 EXPORT LAWASSURANCESYou agree and certify that neither the Soft-ware nor any other technical data receivedfrom Pioneer, nor the direct product thereof,

will be exported outside the United Statesexcept as authorized and as permitted bythe laws and regulations of the UnitedStates. If the Software has been rightfullyobtained by you outside of the UnitedStates, you agree that you will not re-exportthe Software nor any other technical data re-ceived from Pioneer, nor the direct productthereof, except as permitted by the laws andregulations of the United States and thelaws and regulations of the jurisdiction inwhich you obtained the Software.

5 TERMINATIONThis Agreement is effective until terminated.You may terminate it at any time by destroy-ing the Software. The Agreement also willterminate if you do not comply with anyterms or conditions of this Agreement.Upon such termination, you agree to de-stroy the Software.

6 U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERSIf the Software is being acquired by or onbehalf of the United States government orany other entity seeking or applying rightssimilar to those customarily claimed by theUnited States government, the Data is li-censed with “Limited Rights”. Utilization ofthe Software is subject to the restrictionsspecified in the “Rights in Technical Data”clause at DFARS 252.227-7013, or theequivalent clause for non-defense agencies.Pioneer Electronics (USA) Inc., 2265 East220th Street, Long Beach, CA 90810.

Introduction

En12

Chapter

01

7 MISCELLANEOUSThis is the entire Agreement betweenPioneer and you regarding its subject mat-ter. No change in this Agreement shall be ef-fective unless agreed to in writing byPioneer. Pioneer retailers do not have theauthority to change this Agreement. ThisAgreement shall be governed by and con-strued in accordance with the internal lawsof the State of California. If any provision ofthis Agreement is declared invalid or unen-forceable, the remaining provisions of thisAgreement shall remain in full force and ef-fect.

PIONEER AVIC-Z3 - for CanadaTHIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEENYOU, AS THE END USER, AND PIONEERELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.(“PIONEER”). PLEASE READ THE TERMS ANDCONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT CARE-FULLY BEFORE USING THE SOFTWARE IN-STALLED ON THE PIONEER PRODUCTS. BYUSING THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON THEPIONEER PRODUCTS, YOU AGREE TO BEBOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS AGREE-MENT. THE SOFTWARE INCLUDES A DATA-BASE LICENSED BY THIRD PARTY SUPPLIER(S) (“SUPPLIERS”), AND YOUR USE OF THEDATABASE IS COVERED BY THE SUPPLIERS’SEPARATE TERMS, WHICH ARE ATTACHEDTO THIS AGREEMENT (Refer to page 15). IFYOU DO NOT AGREE WITH ALL OF THESETERMS, PLEASE RETURN THE PIONEER PRO-DUCTS (INCLUDING THE SOFTWARE, ANDANY WRITTEN MATERIALS) WITHIN FIVE (5)DAYS OF RECEIPT OF THE PRODUCTS, TOTHE AUTHORIZED PIONEER DEALER FROMWHICH YOU PURCHASED THEM. USE OFTHE SOFTWARE SHALL BE DEEMED TO BEYOUR CONSENT TO THE LICENSE AGREE-MENT.

1 GRANT OF LICENSEPioneer grants to you a non-transferable,nonexclusive license to use the software in-

stalled on the Pioneer products (the “Soft-ware”) and the related documentation solelyfor your own personal use or for internaluse by your business, only on such Pioneerproducts.You shall not copy, reverse engineer, trans-late, port, modify or make derivative worksof the Software. You shall not loan, rent, dis-close, publish, sell, assign, lease, subli-cense, market or otherwise transfer theSoftware or use it in any manner not ex-pressly authorized by this agreement. Youshall not derive or attempt to derive thesource code or structure of all or any portionof the Software by reverse engineering, dis-assembly, decompilation, or any othermeans. You shall not use the Software to op-erate a service bureau or for any other useinvolving the processing of data for otherpersons or entities.Pioneer and its licensor(s) shall retain allcopyright, trade secret, patent and otherproprietary ownership rights in the Soft-ware. The Software is copyrighted and maynot be copied, even if modified or mergedwith other products. You shall not alter or re-move any copyright notice or proprietary le-gend contained in or on the Software.You may transfer all of your license rights inthe Software, the related documentationand a copy of this License Agreement to an-other party, provided that the party readsand agrees to accept the terms and condi-tions of this License Agreement.

Introduction

En 13

Chapter

01Intro

ductio

n

2 DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTYThe Software and related documentationare provided to you “AS IS”. PIONEER ANDITS LICENSOR(S) (for the purpose of provi-sions 2 and 3, Pioneer and its licensor(s)shall be collectively referred to as “Pioneer”)MAKES AND YOU RECEIVE NO WARRANTYFOR THE SOFTWARE, WHETHER EXPRESSOR IMPLIED, AND ALLWARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR ANYPARTICULAR PURPOSE FOR THE SOFT-WARE ARE EXPRESSLY EXCLUDED. SOMESTATES DO NOT ALLOW EXCLUSION OF IM-PLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE EX-CLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. TheSoftware is complex and may contain somenonconformities, defects or errors. Pioneerdoes not warrant that the Software will meetyour needs or expectations, that operationof the Software will be error free or uninter-rupted, or that all non-conformities can orwill be corrected. Furthermore, Pioneer doesnot make any representations or warrantiesregarding the use or results of the use ofthe Software in terms of its accuracy, relia-bility or otherwise.

3 LIMITATION OF LIABILITYIN NO EVENT SHALL PIONEER BE LIABLEFOR ANY DAMAGES, CLAIM OR LOSS IN-CURRED BY YOU (INCLUDING, WITHOUTLIMITATION, COMPENSATORY, INCIDEN-TAL, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUEN-TIAL, OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES, LOSTPROFITS, LOST INCOME, LOST SALES ORBUSINESS, EXPENDITURES, INVEST-MENTS, OR COMMITMENTS IN CONNEC-TION WITH ANY BUSINESS, LOSS OF ANYGOODWILL, OR DAMAGES) RESULTINGFROM THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USETHE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF PIONEER HASBEEN INFORMED OF, KNEW OF, ORSHOULD HAVE KNOWN OF THE LIKELI-HOOD OF SUCH DAMAGES. THIS LIMITA-TION APPLIES TO ANY AND ALL CAUSESOF ACTION INDIVIDUALLY OR IN THE AG-GREGATE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITA-

TION BREACH OF CONTRACT, BREACH OFWARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILI-TY, MISREPRESENTATION, AND OTHERTORTS. IF PIONEER’S WARRANTY DISCLAI-MER OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SETFORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT SHALL ORFOR ANY REASON WHATSOEVER BE HELDUNENFORCEABLE OR INAPPLICABLE,YOU AGREE THAT PIONEER’S LIABILITYSHALL NOT EXCEED FIFTY PERCENT (50%)OF THE PRICE PAID BY YOU FOR THE EN-CLOSED PIONEER PRODUCT.Some states do not allow the exclusion orlimitation of incidental or consequential da-mages, so the above limitation or exclusionmay not apply to you. This warranty disclai-mer and limitation of liability shall not beapplicable to the extent that they are prohib-ited by any applicable federal, state or locallaw which provides that such a disclaimeror limitation cannot be waived or pre-empted.

4 EXPORT LAWASSURANCESYou agree and certify that neither the Soft-ware nor any other technical data receivedfrom Pioneer, nor the direct product thereof,will be exported outside Canada except asauthorized and as permitted by the laws andregulations of Canada. If the Software hasbeen rightfully obtained by you outside ofCanada, you agree that you will not re-exportthe Software nor any other technical data re-ceived from Pioneer, nor the direct productthereof, except as permitted by the laws andregulations of Canada and the laws and reg-ulations of the jurisdiction in which you ob-tained the Software.

5 TERMINATIONThis Agreement is effective until terminated.You may terminate it at any time by destroy-ing the Software. The Agreement also willterminate if you do not comply with anyterms or conditions of this Agreement.Upon such termination, you agree to de-stroy the Software.

Introduction

En14

Chapter

01

6 MISCELLANEOUSThis is the entire Agreement betweenPioneer and you regarding its subject mat-ter. No change in this Agreement shall be ef-fective unless agreed to in writing byPioneer. Pioneer retailers do not have theauthority to change this Agreement. ThisAgreement shall be governed by and con-strued in accordance with the internal lawsof the Province of Ontario and the federallaws of Canada applicable therein. If anyprovision of this Agreement is declared inva-lid or unenforceable, the remaining provi-sions of this Agreement shall remain in fullforce and effect.

Terms and Conditions for theTele Atlas DataTHIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT (THE “AGREE-MENT”) BETWEEN YOU, THE END USER, ANDTELE ATLAS NORTH AMERICA, INC. (“TeleAtlas”). BY USING YOUR COPY OF THE TELEATLAS DATA, YOU AGREE TO THE TERMSAND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT.

1 Grant of License.Tele Atlas grants you a non-transferable,non-exclusive license to use the map dataand business points of interest information(the “POIs”), (together, the “Data”) containedon these discs, solely for personal, non-com-mercial use and not to operate a service bu-reau or for any other use involving theprocessing of data of other persons or enti-ties. You may make one (1) copy of the Datafor archival or backup purposes only butyou may not otherwise copy, reproduce,modify, make derivative works, derive thestructure of or reverse engineer the Data.The Data contains confidential and proprie-tary information and materials, and maycontain trade secrets, so you agree to holdthe Data in confidence and in trust and notto disclose the Data or any portions in anyform, including by renting, leasing, publish-ing, leasing, sublicensing or transferring theData to any third party. You are prohibitedfrom removing or obscuring any copyright,trademark notice or restrictive legend.

2 Ownership.The Data is copyrighted by Tele Atlas and itslicensors and they retain all ownershiprights in the Data. You agree not to alter, re-move, obliterate, or obscure any copyrightnotice or proprietary legend contained in oron the Data.

Introduction

En 15

Chapter

01Intro

ductio

n

3 Warranty Disclaimer.THE DATA IS PROVIDED ON AN “AS IS”AND “WITH ALL FAULTS BASIS” AND TELEATLAS AND ITS SUPPLIERS EXPRESSLYDISCLAIM ALLWARRANTIES, EXPRESS ORIMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITEDTO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, SATIS-FACTORY QUALITY, ACCURACY, TITLE ANDFITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.NO ORAL OR WRITTEN ADVICE OR INFOR-MATION PROVIDED BY TELE ATLAS ORANY OF ITS AGENTS, EMPLOYEES ORTHIRD PARTY PROVIDERS SHALL CREATEAWARRANTY, AND YOU ARE NOT EN-TITLED TO RELY ON ANY SUCH ADVICE ORINFORMATION. THIS DISCLAIMER OFWARRANTIES IS AN ESSENTIAL CONDI-TION OF THE AGREEMENT.

4 Limitation of Liability.TELE ATLAS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOUFOR ANY INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR EXEMPLARY DA-MAGES ARISING OUT OF THIS AGREE-MENT, INCLUDING LOST PROFITS ORCOSTS OF COVER, LOSS OF USE OR BUSI-NESS INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE, RE-GARDLESS OF WHETHER YOU WEREADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCHDAMAGES. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY-THING TO THE CONTRARY CONTAINEDHEREIN, TELE ATLAS SHALL HAVE NOMONETARY LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ANYCAUSE (REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OFACTION) UNDER OR RELATING TO THISAGREEMENT.

5 Termination.This Agreement will terminate immediatelyand automatically, without notice, if youbreach any term of this Agreement. Youagree that in the event of termination of theAgreement, you shall return the Data (in-cluding all documentation and all copies) toTele Atlas and its suppliers.

6 Indemnity.You agree to indemnify, defend and holdTele Atlas, its Licensors, and its Suppliers(including their respective licensors, suppli-ers, assignees, subsidiaries, affiliated com-panies, and the respective officers,directors, employees, shareholders, agentsand representatives) free and harmless fromand against any liability, loss, injury (includ-ing injuries resulting in death), demand, ac-tion, cost, expense, or claim of any kind orcharacter, including but not limited to attor-ney’s fees, arising out of or in connectionwith any use or possession by you of theData.

Introduction

En16

Chapter

01

7 U.S. Government Rights.If you are an agency, department, or otherentity of the United States Government, orfunded in whole or in part by the UnitedStates Government, then use, duplication,reproduction, release, modification, disclo-sure or transfer of this commercial productand accompanying documentation, is re-stricted in accordance with the LIMITED orRESTRICTED rights as described in DFARS252.227-7014(a)(1) (JUN 1995) (DOD com-mercial computer software definition),DFARS 227.7202-1 (DOD policy on commer-cial computer software), FAR 52.227-19(JUN 1987) (commercial computer softwareclause for civilian agencies), DFARS252.227-7015 (NOV 1995) (DOD technicaldata – commercial items clause); FAR52.227-14 Alternates I, II, and III (JUN 1987)(civilian agency technical data and noncom-mercial computer software clause); and/orFAR 12.211 and FAR 12.212 (commercialitem acquisitions), as applicable. In case ofconflict between any of the FAR and DFARSprovisions listed herein and this License,the construction that provides greater lim-itations on the Government’s rights shallcontrol. Contractor/manufacturer is TeleAtlas North America, Inc., 11 LafayetteStreet, Lebanon, NH 03766-1445. Phone:603.643. 0330. The Data is ©1984-2007 byTele Atlas. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. For pur-pose of any public disclosure provisionunder any federal, state or local law, it isagreed that the Data is a trade secret and aproprietary commercial product and notsubject to disclosure.

If you are an agency, department, or otherentity of any State government, the UnitedStates Government or any other public en-tity or funded in whole or in part by the Uni-ted States Government, then you herebyagree to protect the Data from public disclo-sure and to consider the Data exempt fromany statute, law, regulation, or code, includ-ing any Sunshine Act, Public Records Act,

Freedom of Information Act, or equivalent,which permits public access and/or repro-duction or use of the Data. In the event thatsuch exemption is challenged under anysuch laws, this Agreement shall be consid-ered breached and any and all right to retainany copies or to use of the Data shall be ter-minated and considered immediately nulland void. Any copies of the Data held by youshall immediately be destroyed. If any courtof competent jurisdiction considers thisclause void and unenforceable, in whole orin part, for any reason, this Agreement shallbe considered terminated and null and void,in its entirety, and any and all copies of theData shall immediately be destroyed.

8 Additional Provisions with respect toPOI Data only.

a No Creation of Mailing Lists.You are prohibited from using the POIs (i) tocreate mailing lists or (ii) for other such si-milar uses.

b Compliance.You will use the POIs in compliance with allapplicable federal, state and local laws,rules and regulations.

c Indemnification.You shall indemnify and hold infoUSA, Inc.harmless against all third party claims orliability which are based in whole or in partof the users failure to comply with suchlaws, rules and regulations or which resultfrom the use of the POIs through you.

d Warranty.In addition to the Warranties contained inthe Agreement, YOU UNDERSTAND THATTHE POIS ARE LICENSED ON AN “AS IS”BASIS WITHOUT GUARANTEE, ANDTHERE ARE NO OTHER WARRANTIESMADE WHETHER, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANYEXPRESS OR IMPLIEDWARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR APARTICULAR PURPOSE.

e POIs Segregation.

Introduction

En 17

Chapter

01Intro

ductio

n

You are prohibited from combining or mer-ging the POIs with any other POI data. ThePOIs shall be maintained in such a waythat they are separately identifiable from allother POI data at all times.

9 Miscellaneous.This is the exclusive and complete Agree-ment between Tele Atlas and you regardingits subject matter. Nothing in this Agree-ment shall create a joint venture, partner-ship or principal-agent relationship betweenTele Atlas and you. The internal laws of Cali-fornia shall govern this Agreement and youconsent to the jurisdiction of the NorthernDistrict of California or the State of Califor-nia for the County of Santa Clara. Sections 2– 4 and 7 – 11 shall survive the expiration ortermination of this Agreement. This Agree-ment may be amended, altered, or modifiedonly by Tele Atlas. You may not assign anypart of this Agreement without Tele Atlas’prior written consent. You acknowledge andunderstand that the Data may be subject torestrictions on exportation and agree tocomply with any applicable export laws. Inthe event that any provision or part of a pro-vision of this Agreement is determined to beinvalid, illegal, or unenforceable, such provi-sion or part thereof shall be stricken fromthis Agreement and the remainder of thisAgreement shall be valid, legal, and enforce-able to the maximum extent possible. Anynotice under this Agreement shall be deliv-ered by courier to Tele Atlas North America,Inc., Attention Contracts Department, 11 La-fayette Street, Lebanon, NH 03766 USA. Thecovenants and obligations undertaken byyou herein are intended for the direct bene-fit of Tele Atlas and may be enforced by TeleAtlas directly against you.

About the Data for the MapDatabase! This database was developed and recorded

up to May 2007. Changes to streets/high-

ways made after that time may not be re-flected in this database.

! It is strictly prohibited to reproduce and useany part or the whole of this map in anyform without permission from the copyrightowner.

! If the local traffic regulations or conditionsdeviate from this data, follow the local traf-fic regulations (such as signs, indications,etc.) and conditions (such as construction,weather, etc.).

! The traffic regulation data used in the mapdatabase applies only to standard sizedpassenger vehicles. Note that regulationsfor larger vehicles, motorbikes, and othernon-standard vehicles are not included inthe database.

Copyright©1984-2007 Tele Atlas, Rel. 03/2006“NOTICE© 2001 – 2007 Tele Atlas. All rights reserved.This material is proprietary and the subject ofcopyright protection and other intellectualproperty rights owned or licensed to Tele Atlas.Tele Atlas is an authorized distributor of se-lected Statistics Canada computer files underAgreement number 6776 and is an authorizeddistributor of selected Geomatics Canadacomputer files. The product includes informa-tion copied with permission from Canadianauthorities, including © Canada PostCorporation. The use of this material is subjectto the terms of a License Agreement. You willbe held liable for any unauthorized copying ordisclosure of this material.”

Introduction

En18

Chapter

01

Data by Info USA ©2007 All Rights Reserved.

© 2008 INCREMENT P CORP. ALL RIGHTS RE-SERVED.

About Gracenote®

Music recognition technology and relateddata are provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote isthe industry standard in music recognitiontechnology and related content delivery. Formore information visit www.gracenote.com.

CD and music-related data from Gracenote,Inc., copyright © 2000-2007 Gracenote. Grace-note Software, copyright © 2000-2007 Grace-note. This product and service may practiceone or more of the following U.S. Patents:#5,987,525; #6,061,680; #6,154,773,#6,161,132, #6,230,192, #6,230,207,#6,240,459, #6,330,593, and other patents is-sued or pending. Some services suppliedunder license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.Patent: #6,304,523. Gracenote and CDDB areregistered trademarks of Gracenote. TheGracenote logo and logotype, and the “Pow-ered by Gracenote” logo are trademarks ofGracenote.

Gracenote® End User License AgreementVersion 20061005

This application or device contains softwarefrom Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California

(“Gracenote”). The software from Gracenote(the “Gracenote Software”) enables this appli-cation to perform disc and/or file identificationand obtain music-related information, includ-ing name, artist, track, and title information(“Gracenote Data”) from online servers or em-bedded databases (collectively, “GracenoteServers”) and to perform other functions. Youmay use Gracenote Data only by means of theintended End-User functions of this applica-tion or device.You agree that you will use Gracenote Data,the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Ser-vers for your own personal non-commercialuse only. You agree not to assign, copy, trans-fer or transmit the Gracenote Software or anyGracenote Data to any third party. YOU AGREENOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA,THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACE-NOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PER-MITTED HEREIN.You agree that your non-exclusive license touse the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Soft-ware, and Gracenote Servers will terminate ifyou violate these restrictions. If your licenseterminates, you agree to cease any and all useof the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Soft-ware, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote re-serves all rights in Gracenote Data, theGracenote Software, and the Gracenote Ser-vers, including all ownership rights. Under nocircumstances will Gracenote become liablefor any payment to you for any informationthat you provide. You agree that Gracenote,Inc. may enforce its rights under this Agree-ment against you directly in its own name.The Gracenote service uses a unique identifierto track queries for statistical purposes. Thepurpose of a randomly assigned numeric iden-tifier is to allow the Gracenote service to countqueries without knowing anything about whoyou are. For more information, see the webpage for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for theGracenote service.

Introduction

En 19

Chapter

01Intro

ductio

n

The Gracenote Software and each item ofGracenote Data are licensed to you “AS IS.”Gracenote makes no representations or war-ranties, express or implied, regarding the ac-curacy of any Gracenote Data from in theGracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves theright to delete data from the Gracenote Ser-vers or to change data categories for anycause that Gracenote deems sufficient. Nowarranty is made that the Gracenote Softwareor Gracenote Servers are error-free or thatfunctioning of Gracenote Software or Grace-note Servers will be uninterrupted. Gracenoteis not obligated to provide you with new en-hanced or additional data types or categoriesthat Gracenote may provide in the future andis free to discontinue its services at any time.GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALLWARRANTIESEXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOTLIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MER-CHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULARPURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT.GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RE-SULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOURUSE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE ORANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILLGRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSE-QUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ORFOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVEN-UES.© Gracenote 2006

Other Precautions! Part of the data cannot be acquired. The

contents of the data in the Gracenote® Da-tabase included in the hard disk drive arenot 100 % guaranteed.

! The Gracenote® Database included in thehard disk drive contains the titles for the300 000 most frequently accessed albumsworldwide as of August 2007.

Introduction

En20

Chapter

01

Important Safety InformationBefore using your navigation system, be sureto read and fully understand the followingsafety information:

WARNING! Do not attempt to install or service your navi-

gation system by yourself. Installation or servi-cing of the navigation system by personswithout training and experience in electronicequipment and automotive accessories maybe dangerous and could expose you to therisk of electric shock or other hazards.

! When a route is calculated, the route andvoice guidance for the route is automaticallyset. Also, for day or time traffic regulations,only information about traffic regulations atthe time when the route was calculated isshown. One-way streets and street closuresmay not be taken into consideration. For ex-ample, if a street is open during the morningonly, but you arrive later, it would be againstthe traffic regulations so you cannot drivealong the set route. When driving, please fol-low the actual traffic signs. Also, the systemmay not know some traffic regulations.

p Read the entire manual before operatingthis navigation system.

p The navigation features of your navigationsystem (and rear view camera option if pur-chased) are intended solely as an aid toyou in the operation of your vehicle. It isnot a substitute for your attentiveness,judgment, and care when driving.

p Do not operate this navigation system (orthe rear view camera option if purchased) ifdoing so will divert your attention in anyway from the safe operation of your vehicle.Always observe safe driving rules and fol-low all existing traffic regulations. If you ex-perience difficulty in operating the systemor reading the display, park your vehicle ina safe location and apply the parking brakebefore making the necessary adjustments.

p Never allow others to use the system un-less they have read and understood the op-erating instructions.

p Never use this navigation system to routeto hospitals, police stations or similar facil-ities in an emergency. Stop using any func-tions relating to the hands-free phone andplease call 911.

p Route and guidance information displayedby this equipment is for reference purposesonly. It may not accurately reflect the latestpermissible routes, road conditions, oneway streets, road closures, or traffic restric-tions.

p Traffic restrictions and advisories currentlyin force should always take precedenceover guidance given by the navigation sys-tem. Always obey current traffic restric-tions, even if the navigation systemprovides contrary advice.

p Failure to set correct information about thelocal time may result in the navigation sys-tem providing improper routing and gui-dance instructions.

p Never set the volume of your navigationsystem so high that you cannot hear out-side traffic and emergency vehicles.

p To promote safety, certain functions are dis-abled unless the vehicle is stopped and/orthe parking brake is applied.

p The data encoded in the hard disk drive forthe navigation system is the intellectualproperty of the provider, and the provider isresponsible for such content.

p Keep this manual handy as a reference foroperating procedures and safety informa-tion.

p Pay close attention to all warnings in thismanual and follow the instructions care-fully.

p Do not install this navigation system whereit may (i) obstruct the driver’s vision, (ii) im-pair the performance of any of the vehicle’soperating systems or safety features, in-cluding air bags or hazard lamp buttons or(iii) impair the driver’s ability to safely oper-ate the vehicle.

Before Using the System

En 21

Chapter

02Befo

reUsin

gth

eSyste

m

p Please remember to wear your seat belt atall times while operating your vehicle. Ifyou are ever in an accident, your injuriescan be considerably more severe if yourseat belt is not properly buckled.

p Never use headphones while driving.

Additional Safety InformationTo ensure safe drivingParking brake interlockCertain functions (such as viewing of DVDvideo and certain touch panel key operations)offered by this navigation system could bedangerous and/or unlawful if used while driv-ing. To prevent such functions from beingused while the vehicle is in motion, there is aninterlock system that senses when the parkingbrake is set and when the vehicle is moving. Ifyou attempt to use the functions describedabove while driving, they will become disableduntil you stop the vehicle in a safe place, andapply the parking brake. Please keep the brakepedal pushed down before releasing the park-ing brake.

WARNING! To avoid the risk of damage and injury and the

potential violation of applicable laws, the navi-gation system is not for use with a “Videoimage” that is visible to the driver.

! In some countries or states the viewing of“Video image” on a display inside a vehicleeven by persons other than the driver may beillegal. Where such regulations apply, theymust be obeyed.

! When applying the parking brake in order toview “Video image” or to enable other func-tions offered by the navigation system, parkyour vehicle in a safe place, and keep thebrake pedal pushed down before releasing theparking brake if the vehicle is parked on a hillor otherwise might move when releasing theparking brake.

CAUTION! Accuracy/performance of interlock may be im-

pacted by such factors as GPS signal detec-tion, speed pulse wire connectivity, anddriving habits or conditions of the place wherethe vehicle is parked.

! It is strongly suggested that the speed pulsewire be connected for accuracy of navigationand better performance of interlock.

! If the speed pulse wire is unavailable for somereason, it is recommended that the pulse gen-erator ND-PG1 (sold separately) be used.

When you attempt to watch “Video image”while driving, the warning “Viewing of frontseat video source while driving is strictlyprohibited.” will appear on the screen. Towatch “Video image” on this display, stop thevehicle in a safe place and apply the parkingbrake. Please keep the brake pedal pusheddown before releasing the parking brake.

Rear view camera and [Rear View]modeWith an optional rear view camera, you areable to use the navigation system as an aid tokeep an eye on trailers or to back into a tightparking spot.

WARNING! SCREEN IMAGE MAY APPEAR REVERSED.! USE INPUT ONLY FOR REVERSE OR MIRROR

IMAGE REAR VIEW CAMERA. OTHER USEMAY RESULT IN INJURY OR DAMAGE.

Features (Characteristics ofthis software)Touch panel key operationIt is possible to operate the navigation func-tions and the Audio functions by using touchpanel keys.


En22

Chapter

02

Variety of viewmodesVarious types of screen display can be se-lected for navigation guidance.

Wide variety of facility information forPoints of Interest (POI) SearchYou can search for your destination from allareas.! Approximately 12 million POIs are included

in the database.! Some POI information may not be accurate

or may become inaccurate through thepassage of time. Please contact the POI di-rectly to verify the accuracy of the informa-tion about the POI that appears in thisdatabase. POI information is subject tochange without notice.

Auto reroute functionIf you deviate from the set route, the systemwill re-calculate the route from that point sothat you remain on track to the destination.p This function may not work in certain

areas.

Auto CD title and MP3 file listingTitle lists are automatically displayed when aCD or MP3 disc is played. This system pro-vides easy-to-operate audio functions thatallow playback simply by selecting an itemfrom the list.

Compatible voice recognition systemConnecting the supplied microphone will en-able voice operation for both the navigationand AV functions.

Original image assignmentYou can store your own pictures on a CD-R inJPEG format and import original images inthis navigation system. These imported

images can be set as a background or splashscreen, or as a picture in an address book orphone book entry.

Data communication function with XMtunerIf you connect the optional XM tuner (GEX-P10XMT) to the navigation system, you canuse traffic information as a part of the naviga-tion function. A separate subscription for XMNavTraffic is required.In addition, if you subscribe to XM Audio ser-vices, you can utilize the XM display which fea-tures station logos and category icons,improving your XM Audio experience.= For details, refer to Using XM NavTraffic Infor-mation on page 65= For more details about “Listening to XM Sa-tellite Radio”, refer to Using the AV Source (XM,SIRIUS) on page 123p The icon of each broadcast station is con-

tained in the hard disk drive based on thedata provided by XM Satellite Radio as ofOctober 2007.Any changes made by XM Satellite Radioin the lineup or icon of the broadcast sta-tion in the future may not be supported bythe navigation system, and may cause theunit to display incorrect icons.

CAUTIONRear View is to use the navigation system as anaid to keep an eye on the trailers, or while back-ing up. Do not use this function for entertainmentpurposes.


En 23

Chapter

02Befo

reUsin

gth

eSyste

m

About XM NavTraffic Serviceand Pioneer Navigationp XM NavTraffic subscription is required and

is available only in select markets. Checkwww.xmnavtraffic.com for service availabil-ity, pricing information, and other details.The availability of XM NavTraffic data de-pends on the ability of the antenna to re-ceive a signal. The signal may beunavailable if obstructed (e.g., by buildings,mountains, trees, bridges, bad weather,etc.). XM NavTraffic data also may be una-vailable or not current if the original datasource is not providing data (e.g., sched-uled or unscheduled downtime) or has notbeen updated, or if there is a time lag be-tween the time when the original datasource is updated and when you receivethe updated XM NavTraffic data.

p Depending on the amount of data beingtransmitted in your area, it may take severalminutes to display all of the available data.

p The information content depends on the in-formation provided by XM NavTraffic Ser-vice, including data refreshing andavailability timing.

p Pioneer does not bear responsibility for theaccuracy of the information transmitted.

p Pioneer does not bear responsibility forchanges to information services providedby XM, such as cancellation of the servicesor subscription updates.

p Traffic information is not taken into accountwhen calculating estimated time of arrivaltime or travel time for your destination.

Notes for Hard Disk DriveRecording equipment andcopyrightRecording equipment should be used only forlawful copying and you are advised to checkcarefully what defines lawful copying in thecountry in which you are making a copy. Copy-ing of copyright material such as films or

music is unlawful unless permitted by a legalexception or consented to by the right owners.

Notes when writing data to thehard disk drive at low temperatureWriting to the hard disk drive, such as record-ing music to the music library, may be dis-abled when the navigation system detectsabnormally low temperatures inside the vehi-cle. Functionality will become available oncethe temperature inside the vehicle returns tonormal. Additionally, if the low temperaturecontinues for a long time, the system may bebooted up with the preliminary mode becausethe system can not recognize the hard diskdrive.= For details, refer to When the Hard DiskDrive is Disconnected on page 197

Points about recordingp Pioneer does not compensate for the con-

tents that could not be recorded or any lossof recorded data due to a malfunction orfailure of the navigation system.

p The data recorded on the navigation systemis not allowed to be used without permis-sion from its right holder under copyrightlaw, except for personal entertainment.

p Make sure to check the recording operationbefore recording and check the recordedcontents after recording.

p Recording is not guaranteed for all CDs.


En24

Chapter

02

Data saved or recorded by thecustomerp The data saved or recorded onto this navi-

gation system by the customer cannot beextracted from the navigation system, andthose services cannot be accepted.

p The data saved or recorded onto this navi-gation system by the customer cannot beguaranteed during repair or service. Lostdata that was saved or recorded by the cus-tomer is not guaranteed.

p Due to copyrights, the music data recordedinto the Music Library cannot be backed upduring repair or service.

Failure to operateShould the navigation system fail to operateproperly, contact your dealer or nearestauthorized Pioneer service facility.

After-sales service for Pioneer productsPlease contact the dealer or distributor fromwhich you purchased the product for after-sales service (including warranty conditions)or any other information. In case the necessaryinformation is not available, please contact thecompanies listed below.Please do not ship your product to the compa-nies at the addresses listed below for repairwithout making advance contact.! U.S.A

Pioneer Electronics (USA) Inc.CUSTOMER SUPPORT DIVISIONP.O. Box 1760 Long Beach, CA 90801-1760800-421-1404

! CANADAPioneer Electronics of Canada, Inc.CUSTOMER SATISFACTION DEPARTMENT300 Allstate Parkway Markham, OntarioL3R 0P21-877-283-5901905-479-4411

For warranty information, please see the Lim-ited Warranty sheet included with your pro-duct.

Visit Our Web siteVisit us at the following site:

http://www.pioneerelectronics.comIn Canada

http://www.pioneerelectronics.ca1 Register your product. We will keep the details

of your purchase on file to help you refer tothis information in the event of an insuranceclaim such as loss or theft.

2 Receive updates on the latest products andtechnologies.

3 Download owner’s manuals, order productcatalogues, research new products, andmuch more.

4 Receive notices of software upgrades andsoftware updates.


En 25

Chapter

02Befo

reUsin

gth

eSyste

m

Flow from Startup toTerminationAt first, please confirm the positions of the fol-lowing features using the “Hardware Manual”.! MAP button! MENU button! AV button! OPEN CLOSE button

1 Start the engine to boot up the system.After a short pause, the navigation splashscreen comes on for a few seconds.

# When you use the navigation system for thefirst time, [Regional Settings] screen appears.On [Regional Settings] screen, you can changethe language or time. (The settings can also bechanged afterward.)= For details, refer to Customizing the RegionalSettings on page 88

2 Check the details of the caution mes-sage and touch [OK].You can operate the navigation system bytouching keys displayed on the screen. Themap of your surroundings is displayed. If theroute is already set, the screen changes toroute guidance mode.= For details, refer to Switching the view modeon page 38= For details, refer to Setting the time differ-ence on page 89

p To protect the LCD screen from damage, besure to touch the touch panel keys with afinger. (The stylus is supplied for special ca-librations. Do not use the stylus for normaloperations.)

3 Press MENU button.This displays the navigation menu.

4 Assign a destination by using the touchpanel key and beginning route guidance,or operating the Audio source.

p Touch panel keys that are not available atthis time are inactive.

= For more details about “Specifying the ad-dress and searching for the destination”, referto Calculating your destination by using Ad-dress Search on page 28= For more details about “Other search meth-ods”, refer to Chapter 6= For more details about “How to use audiosource”, refer to Using the AV Source (Built-inDVD Drive and Radio) on page 97

5 Turn off the vehicle engine to termi-nate the system.The navigation system is also turned off.

p Until your vehicle reaches the vicinity of thedestination, the set route will not be deletedeven if the engine is turned off.

How to Use NavigationMenu ScreensThe basic navigation is performed by usingmenus.The navigation menu is divided into fourmenus: [Destination], [Information], [Map],and [Settings].

Displaying the Navigation menu1 Press MENU button.

2 To change to the menu you want touse, touch the name of the menu displayedat the top of the screen.

3 If you want to return to the map, pressMENU button.

Basic Operation

En26

Chapter

03

Navigation menu overview[Destination] menu

You can search your destination in this menu.You can also check or cancel your set routefrom this menu.= For more details about “Specifying the ad-dress and searching for the destination”, referto Calculating your destination by using Ad-dress Search on the next page= For more details about “Other search meth-ods”, refer to Chapter 6

[Information] menu

Use this menu to check traffic informationusing the GEX-P10XMT*1.If you are using a cellular phone featuringBluetooth technology by connecting the Blue-tooth unit (ND-BT1)*2 (sold separately) to thenavigation system, you can configure Blue-tooth settings or check the outgoing/incomingcall history. You can also register informationfor emergencies.p [Traffic On Route], [Traffic Events], [Traf-

fic Flow], [Stock Info], [Set My Favorites],and [My Favorites] can be active onlywhen the GEX-P10XMT*1 is connected tothe navigation system.

p [Phone Menu] is active only when theBluetooth unit (ND-BT1)*2 is connected tothe navigation system.

GEX-P10XMT*1:XM Digital Satellite Data & Audio Receiver(sold separately). Traffic information only avail-

able for cities where information is providedby XM NavTraffic service. Active subscriptionto XM NavTraffic is required to receive trafficinformation on the navigation system.= For details, refer to Using XM NavTraffic Infor-mation on page 65= For details, refer to Emergency Info onpage 72ND-BT1*2 :Sold separately. Use for hands-free phoningand business card transfer via Bluetooth tech-nology.

[Map] menu

You can change [View Mode], or set theitems to be displayed during the navigationfunction.p [View Mode] can be selected only when

the vehicle position is at the current posi-tion. If you want to select [View Mode]while scrolling the map, pressMAP buttonto center the current position back on thevehicle position.

[Settings] menu

Customize the navigation functions so theycan be used easily.= For details, refer to Chapter 11

Buttons you can use

Basic Operation

En 27

Chapter

03Basic

Opera

tion

The availability of a specific button or functionis indicated by its appearance. Depending onthe status of your vehicle, some buttons willbe available, while others will not be.

Active touch panel key: The button is operable.

Inactive touch panel key: The function is notavailable (e.g., operation is prohibited whiledriving).

Basic NavigationCAUTION

For safety reasons, you cannot use some of thesebasic navigation functions while your vehicle is inmotion. To enable these functions, you must stopin a safe place and apply the parking brake (referto To ensure safe driving on page 22).

Basic flow of operation1 Park your vehicle in a safe place, andapply the parking brake.

2 Press MENU button to display the navi-gation menu.

3 Select the method of searching for yourdestination.

4 Enter the information about your desti-nation to calculate route.

5 Confirm the location on the map.

6 Check and decide the route.

7 Your navigation system sets the routeto your destination, and the map of yoursurroundings appears.

8 After releasing the parking brake, drivein accordance with the navigation informa-tion, subject to the important safety in-structions noted on Important SafetyInformation on page 21 and AdditionalSafety Information on page 22.

Calculating your destination byusing Address SearchThe most frequently used function is [AddressSearch], in which the address is specified andthe destination is searched. This section de-scribes how to use [Address Search] and thebasics of using the navigation system.

1 Press MENU button to display the navi-gation menu.

2 Touch [Destination] in the navigationmenu.

3 Touch [Address Search].Select the method for searching the destina-tion.

Basic Operation

En28

Chapter

03

4 Touch [State code key] to select thestate, province, or territory.If the destination is in another state, thischanges the state setting.

p Once the state has been selected, you onlyhave to change states when your destina-tion is outside of the state that you se-lected.

State code key Selected state

:The input text is deleted one letter at a timefrom the end of the text. Continuing to touchthe button deletes all of the text.[Back]:Returns you to the previous screen.

5 Input the house number and touch[OK].Touch the characters you want to input.

p You can also input a prefix to the housenumber.

p Touching [OK] with no input allows you tospecify and search for the name of thestreet, city, or area first.

6 Input the street name.When the options are narrowed down to six orless, a list of the matching streets automati-cally appears.When you enter the same characters thatwere entered previously, the system automati-cally displays the characters that follow the en-tered characters. (Auto fill-in function)

p When entering the characters, the systemwill automatically search the database forall possible options. If there is only one let-ter that could possibly follow your entry,that letter will automatically be entered.

p A list appears if multiple options exist. Se-lect the desired one from the list and pro-ceed to the next step. In rare cases, youmay need to input the city name to deter-mine the city.

# Operation of state selection screen

1

2 3 4

1 [A-B] to [U-Z] :Use to jump to the first state, province, orterritory that starts with that letter.

2 :Use to see the next page or previous pageof the list.

3 State list:Press one of these items to set it as searcharea.

4 [Back]:Returns previous screen.

# Operation of street name or city nameinput screen (e.g. QWERTY keyboard)

a 4 78

9 1 3 6

b

5 2

1 State code key :

Basic Operation

En 29

Chapter

03Basic

Opera

tion

Jump to the state selection screen. (Se-lected state code is displayed.)

2 [OK]:Confirms the characters displayed in4,and proceeds to the next step.

3 [List]:Lists candidates based on yellow charactersin 4. Touch the desired item item in the listto proceed to the next step.

4 Text box:Displays the characters that are entered.

5 Keyboard:Use to enter the text.


7 :Deletes the input text one letter at a timefrom the end of the text. Continuing totouch the button deletes all of the text.

8 [City]:Touch if you want to specify the destinationcity or area first. (This is available only when4 is blank.)

9 [Sym.], [0-9]:Input text with marks such as [&] or [+] ornumbers.Touch to toggle the selection.

a [Street]:Touch if you want to return the street inputmode. (This is available only when4 isblank.)

b [Center]:This can be selected when you enter a cityor area name first. Touch this button to dis-play the central point of the entered city orarea. Touching [OK] searches the route tothe central point.Proceed to Step 9.p You can customize the keyboard type to

be displayed on the screen.= For details, refer to Customizing thekeyboard layout on page 89

# Auto fill-in function

The previously entered characters are stored foreach state and each search function. The nexttime a character is entered, suggested characterswill be shown. For example, if [E 220TH ST] hasbeen entered in the past, when you input just theletter [E], [E 220TH ST] will be filled in automati-cally. The manually input characters are dis-played in yellow, and the suggested charactersare displayed in white, so you can distinguishthem. To confirm the filled-in characters, touch[OK].

7 Touch the street from the list.

If the selected street has only one matching lo-cation, “Route confirmation screen” appears.Proceed to Step 9.

8 Touch the city or area where your desti-nation is located.

When a route is not set, route calculationstarts immediately.= For details, refer to Checking and modifyingthe route on page 32When a route is already set, “Location confir-mation screen” is shown.= For details, refer to Checking the locationon the map on the next page

Basic Operation

En30

Chapter

03

p If there is no matching location, the naviga-tion system displays “The address doesnot exist. Do you want to continue ?”.When you touch [Yes], a place near the spe-cified location appears. In this case, pay at-tention to the displayed location may not besuitable for your intention. If you want to tryagain, touch [No] to return to the previousscreen.

p If you did not input the house number inStep 5, the house number input screen ap-pear after this step. You should input thehouse number now (perform Step 5).

Route calculation starts.

When the route calculation is completed,“Route confirmation screen” appears.

# Operation of street list screen

3 4

5

1

2

1 Number of possible choices2 :

Touching or on the scroll bar scrollsthrough the list and allows you to view theremaining items.

3 :If all of characters cannot be displayed with-in the displayed area, touching to theright of the item allows you to see remain-ing characters.

4 :Touching displays a map of the placeyou have selected. (Possibilities for placenames may appear with the list screen.)You can also set a destination by touching

to the right of the list. Touch [OK] to setthe location indicated by the scroll cursoras your destination.


# Checking the location on the map

Location confirmation screen

21

3

1 Calculating the route to the destinationRoute calculation starts. When the routecalculation is completed, “Route confirma-tion screen” appears.p If you pressMAP button orMENU but-

ton during route calculation, the calcu-lation is canceled and the map screenappears.

2 Scrolling the mapThe map display changes to the scrollmode. You can fine-tune the location in thescroll mode, and then you can set the loca-tion as your destination or do various opera-tions by using the shortcut menu.= For details, refer to Shortcut menu onpage 45

3 Setting the location as a waypointThe location indicated by the scroll cursorwill be set as a waypoint.

Basic Operation

En 31

Chapter

03Basic

Opera

tion

= For details, refer to Editing Waypoints onpage 36

9 Touch [OK] to decide your route.

Checking andmodifying the routeYou can check the route details. You can alsorecalculate the route in different conditions.

Route confirmation screen

4

56

7

89

3 2 1

1 Route calculation conditionShows the route has been calculated underthose conditions.! shows that fastest route is prioritized.! shows that shortest route is priori-

tized.! shows that using highways and main

roads are prioritized.! shows whether the suggested

route includes freeways.! shows whether the suggested

route includes toll roads. The currentsetting appears.

! shows whether the suggestedroute includes ferries. The current set-ting appears.

! shows whether the suggestedroute includes learning routes. The cur-rent setting appears.

In addition, if the calculated route has unin-tended results, the following icons will beshown.

! shows that freeways could not beavoided.

! shows that toll roads could not beavoided when the setting [Avoid TollRoad] is [On].

! shows that ferries could not beavoided when the setting [Avoid Ferry]is [On].

! shows for routes that contain streetsor bridges that are subject to traffic reg-ulations during a certain time when thesetting [Time restrictions] is [On].

2 Distance to the destination3 Travel time to destination4 Set the displayed route

Sets the displayed route as your route, andstarts the route guidance.= For details, refer to When the route guidancestarts on the next page

5 Display multiple routesYou can select a desired route from multipleroute options. Calculated routes are shown indifferent colors.

Touching to switch to another route.Touching [OK] returns to the previous display.If you set waypoints, you cannot use the multi-ple route option.p There can be cases that the same route

is displayed even when multiple routesare searched.

p In multiple route calculations, bothroutes that use and avoid the freewaysare calculated independently of the set-ting for [Avoid Freeway].

6 Change the route calculation conditionModify each calculation condition, and recal-culate the route.= For details, refer toModifying the Route Cal-culation Conditions on page 34

7 View the route profile

Basic Operation

En32

Chapter

03

You can check the streets that you will travelto reach the destination.= For details, refer to Checking the passingstreets with a list on page 35

8 Check the shape of routeYou can check the overall shape of your routeand the location of destination on the map.= For details, refer to Checking the entire routeoverview on the map on page 36

9 Adding and edit waypointYou can add, remove, or sort waypoints.= For details, refer to Editing Waypoints onpage 36

When the route guidance startsTouching [OK] in “Route confirmation screen”starts the route guidance on the displayedroute. Your navigation system gives you the fol-lowing information with the timing adjusted tothe speed of your vehicle:— Distance to the next turning point— Direction of travel— Road number of the freeway— Arrival of waypoint (If waypoints are set)— Arrival of your destinationp Touching or allows you to turn the

voice guidance on or off.p Touching allows you to hear the in-

formation again.p If you stop at a gas station or a restaurant

during the route guidance, your navigationsystem remembers your destination androute information. When you start the en-gine and get back on the road, the routeguidance resumes.

p If you deviate from the route with guidanceset to [Route View] or [Guide Mode] andenter a street not recorded on the hard diskdrive, the screen changes to [Map Mode].When you return to the route, the screen re-turns to the original view and resumesroute guidance.

Basic items on the screenThis section describes only the basic itemsthat are displayed on the Map Mode screen.

= For more details about “Details of the mapscreen”, refer to How to Use the Map on page38

2 3 1 4

1 Current location2 Distance to the destination3 Estimated time of arrival (default)4 ON/OFF key for voice guidance

Canceling the Route GuidanceIf you no longer need to travel to your destina-tion or if you want to change your destination,follow the steps below to cancel the route gui-dance.

1 Touch [Destination] in the navigationmenu, then touch [Cancel Route].A message confirming whether to cancel thecurrent route appears.

2 Touch [Yes].

The current route is deleted, and a map ofyour surroundings reappears.On this screen, you can also select the follow-ing items:[Skip]:Skip the route to the selected waypoint, and re-calculate the route. (The skipped waypoint willnot be deleted.)[No]:Returns to the previous display without delet-ing the route.

Basic Operation

En 33

Chapter

03Basic

Opera

tion

Modifying the RouteCalculation ConditionsYou can modify the conditions for route calcu-lation and recalculate the current route.

1 Touch [Destination] in the navigationmenu, and then touch [Route Overview].

p [Route Overview] is displayed only whenthe route is set.

2 Touch [Options].

3 Touch the desired items to change theroute calculation conditions and thentouch [OK].

The route is recalculated, and “Route confir-mation screen” appears.When a single route is calculated, the systemsearches for the route that meets these condi-tions as closely as possible.

p A single route is calculated in the followingcases:

— When a waypoint is set— When a route is set through voice recogni-

tion— When auto reroute is carried out

Items that users can operateSettings marked with an asterisk (*) show thatthese are default or factory settings.

Route ConditionThis setting controls how the route should becalculated by taking into account the time orthe distance or the main road.Determine which condition takes priority forroute calculation.

[Fast]*:Calculate a route with the shortest travel timeto your destination as a priority.

[Short]:Calculate a route with the shortest distance toyour destination as a priority.

[Main Road]:Calculate a route that passes major arterialroad as a priority.

Avoid Toll RoadThis setting controls whether toll roads (in-cluding toll areas) should be taken into ac-count.

[Off]*:Calculate a route that may include toll roads(including toll areas).

[On]:Calculate a route that avoids toll roads (includ-ing toll areas).p The system may calculate a route that in-

cludes toll road even if [On] is selected.

Avoid FerryThis setting controls whether ferry crossingsshould be taken into account.

[Off]*:Calculate a route that may include ferries.

[On]:Calculate a route that avoids ferries.p The system may calculate a route that in-

cludes ferry way even if [On] is selected.

Avoid FreewayThis setting controls whether freeways may beincluded in the route calculation.

[Off]*:

Basic Operation

En34

Chapter

03

Calculate a route that may include freeways.[On]:

Calculate a route that avoids freeways.p The system may calculate a route that in-

cludes freeway even if [On] is selected.

Time restrictionsThis setting controls whether streets orbridges have traffic restrictions during a cer-tain time should be taken into account.p If you want to set your route to avoid

opened bridges, select [On].[On]*:

Calculate a route while avoiding streets orbridges with traffic restrictions during a cer-tain time.

[Off]:Calculate a route while ignoring traffic restric-tions.p The system may calculate a route that in-

cludes streets or bridges that are subject totraffic restrictions during a certain timeeven if [On] is selected.

CAUTIONIf the time difference is not set correctly, the navi-gation system cannot consider traffic regulationscorrectly. Set the time difference correctly (=Refer to Setting the time difference on page 89).

Learning RouteThe system learns the travel history of your ve-hicle for each road.This setting controls whether or not the travelhistory should be taken into account.

[On]*:Calculate the route with the travel historytaken into account.

[Off]:Calculate the route without the travel historytaken into account.[Clear]:Clear the current travel history.

Checking the Current RouteYou can check information about the route be-tween your current location and your destina-tion.You can select two methods:! Checking the passing streets with a list! Checking the entire route overview on the

map

Checking the passing streetswith a listYou can check the route details.p This function is not available if your vehicle

has deviated from the route.

1 Touch [Destination] in the navigationmenu, and then touch [Route Overview].“Route confirmation screen” appears.


2 Touch [Profile].

3 Touch or to scroll the list.Scroll the list as necessary.

Names of the streets you are driving through

Turning direction Driving distance

4 Touch [Back].You can return to the previous display.

Basic Operation

En 35

Chapter

03Basic

Opera

tion

p When a long distance route is calculated,your navigation system may not be able tolist all roads. (In this case, the remainingroads will be shown in the list as you driveon.)

Checking the entire routeoverview on the mapYou can check the entire shape of the currentroute.

1 Touch [Destination] in the navigationmenu, and then touch [Route Overview].“Route confirmation screen” appears.


2 Touch [Detail].

3 Touch the screen and place the scrollcursor on the point where you want toview the detail or the entire picture. Orzoom in or zoom out the map scale.

The map around the scroll cursor is zoomed inor out so you can view the detail or the entirepicture.

4 Touch [Back].The screen returns to the previous display.

p You can also check the overview by usingthe shortcut menu if [Whole Route Over-

view] is selected on [Short-CutSelection].

Editing WaypointsYou can select waypoints (locations you wantto visit on the way to your destination) and youcan recalculate the route to pass throughthese locations.

Adding a waypointUp to 5 waypoints can be selected, and se-lected points can be sorted automatically ormanually.


2 Touch [Waypoints].The waypoint menu screen appears.

3 Touch [Add].

The “Select Search Method” screen appears.After searching for a point, display it on amap, then touch [OK] to add to the waypoints.(You can add up to 5 waypoints in total.)

4 Touch [OK].A route is recalculated, and “Route confirma-tion screen” appears.= For details, refer to Checking and modifyingthe route on page 32

p If you set waypoints in the route to your des-tination, the route up to the next waypointwill appear in light green. The rest of theroute will appear in light blue.

Basic Operation

En36

Chapter

03

Deleting a waypointYou can delete waypoints from the route andthen recalculate the route. (You can deletewaypoints successively.)



3 Touch [Delete], then touch the way-point you want to delete.The touched waypoint will be deleted from thelist.

4 Touch [OK].The route is recalculated, and “Route confir-mation screen” appears.= For details, refer to Checking and modifyingthe route on page 32

Sorting waypointsYou can sort waypoints and recalculate theroute.



3 Touch [Sort], then touch [Automatic] or[Manual].

[Automatic]:You can sort the destination and waypointsautomatically. The system will show the near-est waypoint (distance in a straight line) fromthe current location as waypoint 1, and sort

the other points (including your destination) inorder of distance from the waypoint 1.[Manual]:You can manually sort destination and way-points. Touch the destination and waypointson the left side of the screen in the order youwant to visit. The touched destination and way-points are displayed on the right side of thescreen. Touch [OK] to complete the sortingand the previous screen appears.

4 Touch [OK].The route is calculated again, and “Route con-firmation screen” appears.= For details, refer to Checking and modifyingthe route on page 32

Skipping a waypointIf points are set, the next waypoint along theroute can be skipped.

1 Touch [Destination] in the navigationmenu, and then touch [Cancel Route].

2 Touch [Skip].A new route to your destination through all re-maining waypoints, except for the skippedwaypoint, is calculated.“Route confirmation screen” appears.= For details, refer to Checking and modifyingthe route on page 32

Basic Operation

En 37

Chapter

03Basic

Opera

tion

How to Use the MapMost of the information provided by your navi-gation system can be seen on the map. Youneed to get to know how the information ap-pears on the map.

Switching the viewmodeThere are six types of map display and two ad-ditional view modes.! Map Mode! Guide Mode (during route guidance only)! Route View (during route guidance only)! Driver’s View! 2D Twin Map View! 3D Twin Map View! Vehicle Dynamics! Rear View (Only possible when

[Camera Input] is set to [On].)

1 Press MAP button to display a map ofthe area around your current position.

2 Press MAP button again.

3 Touch the mode name to select themode you want to display.

p You can display the view mode screen bytouching [Map] in the navigation menu,and touching [ViewMode].

How to view the map of thecurrent locationp This example shows a case where [Second

Maneuver Arrow] is set to [View].

Map ModeDisplays the standard map.

1

2

3

4

5

6

78

9

b

c

g

k

l

a

Guide ModeOverlays two arrows onto the standard map([Map Mode]).

1

2

3

4

5

6

78

9

a

b

g

k

l

m

f

c

Route ViewDisplays the name of the street you will travelalong next and an arrow indicating the direc-tion of travel.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

a

b

d

k

l

m

f

How to Read the Map Display

En38

Chapter

04

Driver’s ViewShows a map from the driver’s viewpoint.

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

b

a

2

k

l

fm

d

About the 3D POIDepending on the data, the POI may appear ingraphical 3D or plate format with POI mark inthe left screen of [Driver’s View].p The displayed POI in the left screen has no

relation with the setting of [Overlay POI].

2D Twin Map ViewYou can split the screen in half. The rightscreen and the left screen can display a mapin different scales. The 2Dmap appears onthe left screen.

8 4 7 7l

6

5

ka1

2f

63

m

b

d

3D Twin Map ViewYou can split the screen in half. The rightscreen and the left screen can display a mapin different scales. The 3D map appears onthe left screen.

8 4 7 7l

6

5

ka1

2f

63

m

b

d

p Selects whether to display or hide the 3DLandmark on the map.

= For details, refer to 3D Landmark on page47

Vehicle Dynamics DisplayIndicates the status of your vehicle.

CAUTIONIn Vehicle Dynamics Display mode, the speed-ometer display may show a different speed thanyour vehicle’s actual speedometer, because yourunit measures speed in a different way.

p You can change the items indicated on theleft and right meters.= For details, refer to Setting the VehicleDynamics Display on page 76


En 39

Chapter

04How

toReadth

eMapDisp

lay

Rear ViewRear view image is displayed on the left-handside of the screen, while the map of your sur-roundings is indicated on the right.

l

6

d9

ka

f

m

8 7

5

2

p If [Camera Input] is set to [Off], the rearview image is not displayed. Please set it to[On].= For details, refer to Setting for rear viewcamera on page 149

p When using a camera set to turn On/Off inconjunction with the reverse signal, nocamera images will be displayed in rearview mode while you are moving forward.

p If the camera is set always On, it can dis-play images in rear view mode when the ve-hicle is moving forward. In that case, youshould ask the camera maker or dealerwhether the camera’s functions or lifetimewould be affected.

p Rear View can be displayed at all times(e.g. when monitoring an attached trailer)as a split screen where map information ispartially displayed. Please beware that inthis setting, camera image is not resized tofit to screen, and that a portion of cameraimage may not be viewable.

Enlarged map of the intersectionThis screen is displayed only when [Close UpView] in [Map] menu is [2D] or [3D].

Enlarged map of the intersection (2D)

d

e n

Enlarged map of the intersection (3D)

Display during freeway drivingIn certain locations of the freeway, lane infor-mation is available, indicating the recom-mended lane to be in to easily maneuver thenext guidance.

h


En40

Chapter

04

While driving on the freeway, freeway exitnumbers and freeway signs may be displayedwhen in the vicinity of interchanges and exits.

o

i j

p If the data for these items is not containedin the hard disk drive, the information isnot available even if there are the signs onthe actual road.

City MapWhen [City Map] in [Map] menu is [On], incertain metropolitan city areas, a more de-tailed [City Map] is available at the 0.05 mile(50m) map scale or lower. (The screenchanges automatically when you enter certainmetropolitan city area.)

1 a k

5

6

7l48

2

3b

p The detailed city map may not appear forthe following reasons:— The data for that city area is not con-

tained in the hard disk drive.— When you are driving on a freeway.

Display itemsp Information with the mark (*) appears only

when the route is set.p Depending on the conditions and settings,

some items may not be displayed.Current location

The current location of your vehicle. The tip ofthe triangular mark indicates your headingand the display moves automatically as youdrive.p The head of the triangular mark is the cur-

rent vehicle position.Destination*

The checkered flag indicates your destination.Guidance point*

The next guidance point (next turning point,etc.) is shown by a yellow flag.Up to the next three guidance points are dis-played.

Waypoint*The checkered flag and number (1 to 5) indi-cates your waypoint.1 Name of the street to be used (or next gui-

dance point)*2 Distance to the guidance point*

Touching allows you to hear the infor-mation again.

3 Distance to the destination (or distance towaypoint)*The distance on this button shows the dis-tance to the destination or to each waypoint. Ifwaypoints are set, the distance to the destina-tion and the next waypoint change with eachtouch.p When the vehicle position is on the

route, the distance to the destination (orwaypoint) appears. When the vehicle po-sition is not on the route, the linear dis-tance to the destination (or waypoint)appears.

4 Street name (or city name) that your vehi-cle is traveling along

5 CompassThe red arrow indicates north. If the scale isless than 25 mile (50 km), touching the mapchanges the direction that it is displayed in(north up/ heading up). When the scale of themap is greater than 25 mile (50 km), it is fixedto “North up”.! Heading up:

The map display always shows the vehi-cle’s direction as proceeding toward thetop of the screen.


En 41

Chapter

04How

toReadth

eMapDisp

lay

! North up:The map display always has north at thetop of the screen.

6 Zoom in/Zoom outTouch to change the map’s scale.= For details, refer to Changing the scale ofthe map on the next page

7 Map scaleThe scale of the map is indicated by distance.

8 VOICE iconTouch to change to the voice recognitionmode.p This is displayed only when the micro-

phone for voice recognition is con-nected.= For details, refer to Chapter 18

9 Traffic statusThis appears when an XM satellite radio tuner(GEX-P10XMT, sold separately) is connectedand traffic information is received.TRFC— No problem.ANTENNA— Improper antenna connection.UPDATING— Updating encryption code.= For details, refer to Checking the ReceptionStatus of the XM Tuner on page 72

a Current timeb Estimated time of arrival (or travel time to

your destination)*The display alternates by pressing it.p The estimated time of arrival is an ideal

value calculated based on the value setfor [Average Speed] and the actualdriving speed. The estimated time of ar-rival is only a reference value, and doesnot guarantee arrival at that time.= For details, refer to Changing the vir-tual speed of the vehicle on page 90

c Tracking dotThe tracking dot shows the route your vehiclehas traveled by white dots.= For more details about “Select the trackingsetting”, refer to Setting the Item on the MapScreen on page 46

d Map of your surroundings (Side map)Touching the screen changes the map to theScroll mode.

= For details, refer to Scroll the map to the lo-cation you want to see on the next page

e Distance to a turning point*Displayed on the enlarged intersection map.The green bar gets shorter as your vehicle ap-proaches a turning point.

f Next direction of travel*When you approach an intersection, it ap-pears green. The screen displays the distanceto the next guidance point.

g Direction line*The direction towards your destination (orscroll cursor) is indicated with a straight line.

h Lane information*Lane information is displayed the first timethere is a voice guidance on your route. Thewhite arrow on the green background indi-cates the recommended lane. If the next tra-veling direction screen is displayed when youapproach a interchange, junction, or exit, thelane information disappears.

i Freeway signs*Show the road number and give directional in-formation.

j Freeway exit information*Displays the freeway exit.

k Bluetooth Connected iconThis icon shows whether the cellular phonefeaturing Bluetooth technology is connectedor not. You can select between display andnon-display.

: Connected: Disconnected

p This is available only when the Blue-tooth unit (sold separately) is con-nected.= For more details about “Selecting dis-play or non-display for the BluetoothConnected icon”, refer to Setting theItem on the Map Screen on page 46

l Mute Voice Guidance iconTouch to turn on or off the mute setting ofVoice Guidance. You can select between dis-play and non-display.


En42

Chapter

04

= For more details about “Selecting display ornon-display for the Mute Voice Guidanceicon”, refer to Setting the Item on the MapScreen on page 46

m Second Maneuver Arrow*Indicates the turning direction after next. Youcan select between display and non-display.= For more details about “Selecting display ornon-display for Second Maneuver Arrow”,refer to Setting the Item on the Map Screen onpage 46

n POI iconThe POI icon may appear on the enlargedmap of the intersection (when available dataexists).

o Suggested lane information*The traveling direction screen is displayedwhen you approach a interchange, junction,or exit. The suggested lane is indicated with agreen arrow.

Roads without turn-by-turninstructions

Routable roads (the route displayed and high-lighted in purple) have only basic data andcan only be used to plot a navigable route.Pioneer Navigation will only display a navig-able route on the map (only the arrival gui-dance for the destination or a waypoint isavailable). Please review and obey all local traf-fic rules along the highlighted route. (For yoursafety.)No turn-by-turn directions will be displayed onthese roads.When your vehicle reaches to the entrance ofthis road, the icon will be displayed besidethe direction arrow, indicating that the gui-dance is not available with this type of road.The icon will be indicated for roads thathave available guidance.The Close-up of intersection function, Auto Re-route function, Changing the view to [GuideMode], or [Route View] are not available.

Changing the scale of the mapTouching or allows you to change themap scale. Touch and holding or allowsyou to change the scale in smaller step withina range of 25 yards to 1000 miles (25 meters to2000 kilometers). When the view mode is setto Map Mode or Guide Mode, “Direct scalekey” is displayed. Touching “Direct scale key”changes the map to the selected scale di-rectly.

Direct scale key

p The icon of the entry in “Address Book” andthe traffic information icon are displayedwhen the map scale is 10 miles (20 km) orlower.

p Traffic lines are displayed when the mapscale is 2.5 miles (5 km) or lower.

p POI icons are displayed when the mapscale is 0.75 mile (1 km) or lower.

Scroll the map to the locationyou want to seeTouching anywhere on the map changes themap to “Scroll mode” and the map beginsscrolling in the direction you touched. Thescrolling stops when you release your fingerfrom the screen. Pressing MAP button returnsyou to the map of your surroundings.p Touch the area close to the center of the

screen to scroll slowly; touch near the sidesof the screen to scroll quickly.


En 43

Chapter

04How

toReadth

eMapDisp

lay

1 23

4

5

1 Scroll cursorThe position of scroll cursor shows the loca-tion selected on the current map.p When the scale is 0.25mile (200m) or

lower, the road appears light blue in thevicinity of the scroll cursor.

2 Direction lineThis is the line connecting between the cur-rent location and the scroll cursor.The direction towards the scroll cursor is indi-cated with a straight line.

3 Distance from the current locationThis shows the distance in a straight line be-tween the location indicated by the scroll cur-sor and your current location.

4 Street name, city name, area name andother information for this location(The information displayed varies according tothe scale.)Touching on the right displays hidden text.

5 Current location keyTouching returns you to the map of yourcurrent location.

Viewing the information of aspecified locationAn icon appears at registered places (home lo-cation, specific places, Address Book entries)and places where there is a POI icon or trafficinformation icon. Place the scroll cursor overthe icon to view detailed information.

1 Scroll the map and move the scroll cur-sor to the icon you want to view.

2 Touch .

Information for a specified location appears.

The information shown varies according to thelocation. (There may be no information for thatlocation.)= For more details about “Registering places”,refer to Registering Locations Overview onpage 58= For more details about “Displaying facilities(POI) icon on the map”, refer to Displaying POIon the Map on page 49= For more details about “Icons for traffic in-formation”, refer to Traffic event icon and lineon page 66

p appears when the Bluetooth unit(sold separately) is connected to the naviga-tion system together with the cellularphone. By touching , you can make aphone call to the displayed phone number.= For details, refer to Dialing from the mapon page 83

3 Touch [Back].Returns to the previous display.

4 Touch .Returns to the map of your surroundings.

p You can also return to the map of your sur-roundings by pressingMAP button.


En44

Chapter

04

Shortcut menuShortcuts allow you to perform various tasks,such as route calculation for the location indi-cated by the scroll cursor or registering a loca-tion in [Address Book], faster than using thenavigation menu.You can customize the shortcuts displayed onscreen. The shortcuts described here are pre-pared as the default setting.= For more details about “Changing a short-cut”, refer to Selecting the Shortcut on page 48p When the Bluetooth unit (sold separately)

is connected to the navigation system, youcan use shortcuts related to phone func-tions.

p Items marked with an asterisk (*) cannotbe removed from Shortcut menu.

% When the map is displayed, touch .

Shortcut menu

: Route Options*Displayed when the map is not scrolled. Thisitem can be selected only during route gui-dance.You can modify the conditions for route calcu-lation and recalculate the current route.= For details, refer to Modifying the Route Cal-culation Conditions on page 34

: Destination*Displayed when the map is scrolled. Set theroute to the place specified with the scroll cur-sor.

: RegistrationRegister information on the location indicatedby the scroll cursor to the Address Book.= For details, refer to Registering a Locationinto “Address Book” on page 59

: Vicinity Search

Find POIs (Points Of Interest) in the vicinity ofthe scroll cursor.= For details, refer to Finding a POI in the Vici-nity on page 53

: Overlay POIDisplays icons for surrounding facilities (POI)on the map.= For details, refer to Displaying POI on theMap on page 49

: VolumeDisplays [Volume].= For more details about “Volume”, refer toSetting the Volume for Guidance and Phone onpage 88

: Phone BookDisplays [Phone Book].= For details, refer to Calling a number in thephone book on page 82= For details, refer to Editing the entry in“Phone Book” on page 84

: Menu CloseHides the Shortcut menu.


En 45

Chapter

04How

toReadth

eMapDisp

lay

CAUTIONFor safety reasons, you cannot use some of thesenavigation functions while your vehicle is in mo-tion. To enable these functions, you must stop ina safe place and apply the parking brake (refer toTo ensure safe driving on page 22).

Entering the Map Menu1 Press MENU button to display the navi-gation menu.

2 Touch [Map] to display the Map menu.

3 Change the setting.= For more details about “Adjusting eachitem”, refer to Chapter 5

p This section describes the details of the set-ting for each item. Settings marked with anasterisk (*) show that these are default orfactory settings.

Setting the Item on theMap Screen1 Touch [Map] in the navigation menu,then touch [Displayed Info].The Displayed Info screen appears.

On this screen, you can operate the followingitems.

2 To finish the setting, touch [OK].

Close Up ViewYou can select the method to display the closeup view of the intersection.

! [2D]*:

Displays the close up view with the 2D map.! [3D]:

Displays the close up view with [Driver’sView].

! [Off]:Does not display the close up view.

City MapYou can select whether to display the city mapwhen in certain metropolitan city areas.

! [On]*:Automatically switches to the city mapwhen in a city map area.

! [Off]:Does not show the city map.p Even if you switch [City Map] to [On],

city map cannot display in areas wherethere is no city map data.

Tracking DisplayYou can trace locations that you have alreadypassed with white dots on the route.

! [On (Always)]:Displays tracking for all journeys.

! [On (This journey)]:Displays tracking dots but erases themwhen the navigation system is turned off(when turning off the engine of your vehi-cle).

! [Off]*:Does not display tracking dots.

Show Mute ButtonSelects whether to display or hide the voiceguidance mute key on the map.

Modifying Map Configurations

En46

Chapter

05

! [View]*:Displays the voice guidance mute key onthe map.

! [Hide]:Hides the voice guidance mute key on themap.

Show Traffic IncidentSelects whether to display or hide the trafficnotification icons on the map when incidentsoccur on your route.= For details, refer to Checking traffic informa-tion manually on page 68

! [View]*:Displays the icons on the map.

! [Hide]:Hides the icons on the map.p The notification icons will not be avail-

able when your vehicle deviates fromthe route.

Second Maneuver ArrowSelects whether to display or hide the secondturn ahead of the vehicle on the map (exceptfor [Route View]).= For details, refer to How to view the map ofthe current location on page 38

! [View]*:Displays the second turn ahead of the vehi-cle on the map.

! [Hide]:Hides the second turn ahead of the vehicleon the map.

Bluetooth ConnectedSelects whether to display or hide the icon forcurrent status of the phone connection viaBluetooth wireless technology.

! [View]*:Displays the Bluetooth Connected icon onthe map.

! [Hide]:

Hides the Bluetooth Connected icon onthe map.= For more details about “Bluetooth Con-nected icon”, refer to How to view the mapof the current location on page 38

Address Book IconYou can select whether to display the AddressBook Icon on the map.

! [On]*:Displays the Address Book Icon on themap.

! [Off]:Hides the Address Book Icon on the map.p Even if [Address Book Icon] is set to

[Off], the alarm sounds when you ap-proach the registered location and theset image pops up. To turn off the soundoutput and image pop up, select[No Sound] and [No Picture] for theentry.

= For details, refer to Editing the entry in“Address Book” on page 60

3D LandmarkYou can select whether to display the 3D Land-mark on the map.

p 3D Landmark only appears when the viewmode is [3D Twin Map View] and the mapscale is set to 0.25 mile (200 m) or lower.

! [On]*:Displays the 3D Landmark on the map.

! [Off]:Hides the 3D Landmark on the map.


En 47

Chapter

05Modify

ingMapConfig

ura

tions

Selecting the ShortcutSelect shortcuts to display on the map screen.In the list displayed on screen, the items withred checks are displayed on the map screen.Touch the shortcut you want to display andthen touch [OK] when a red check appears.You can select up to five shortcuts.

1 Touch [Map] in the navigation menu,then touch [Short-Cut Selection].The Short-Cut Selection screen appears.

On this screen, you can operate the followingitems.

2 Touch the item that you want to set inthe shortcut menu.An item with a red check mark is displayed inthe shortcut menu.

: Registration*Register the information on the location indi-cated by the scroll cursor to the Address book.= For details, refer to Registering a Locationinto “Address Book” on page 59

: Vicinity Search*Find POIs (Points Of Interest) in the vicinity ofthe scroll cursor.= For details, refer to Finding a POI in the Vici-nity on page 53

: Overlay POI*Displays icon for surrounding facilities (POI)on the map.= For details, refer to Displaying POI on theMap on the next page

: Volume*Displays [Volume].= For more details about “Volume”, refer toSetting the Volume for Guidance and Phone onpage 88

: Phone Book*

Displays [Phone Book].= For details, refer to Calling a number in thephone book on page 82= For details, refer to Editing the entry in“Phone Book” on page 84

: Dial Favorite 1 to Dial Favorite 5Make a call to the phone number registered in[Dial Favorites].= For details, refer to Registering a phonenumber in “Dial Favorites” on page 84

:Whole Route OverviewDisplays the entire route (currently set).= For details, refer to Checking the entire routeoverview on the map on page 36

: Stock InfoDisplays stock prices.= For details, refer to Displaying stock priceson page 70

: Set My FavoritesDisplays the screen of storing browsable itemfor XM tuner.= For details, refer to Storing browsable infor-mation on page 70

:My FavoritesDisplays information on your favorite browsa-ble item for XM tuner.= For details, refer to Displaying favorite brow-sable Information on page 71

: Traffic On RouteDisplays a list of traffic information on theroute.= For details, refer to Confirming traffic infor-mation on the map on page 66

: Traffic EventsDisplays a list of traffic events information.= For details, refer to Checking all traffic infor-mation on page 65

: Day/Night DisplaySwitches Day/Night Display setting.= For details, refer to Setting the Map ColorChange between Day and Night on page 50

: Address Book Icon DisplaySwitches Address Book Icon setting.= For details, refer to Setting the Item on theMap Screen on page 46



En48

Chapter

05

Displaying POI on the MapDisplays icons for the surrounding facilities(POI) on the map.

1 Touch [Map] in the navigation menu,then touch [Overlay POI].

2 Touch [Display] to turn it [On].p If you do not want to display the POI icon

on the map, touch [Display] to turn it [Off].(Even if [Display] is turned [Off], the POIselection setting is retained.)

3 Touch the category you want to dis-play.

4 Touch [Select Detail].

[Select All]:Selects all detailed categories that are in-cluded in that category. (E.g. all categories ofrestaurants including Japanese and fast food.)[Deselect All]:Deselects the selected category.

5 Touch the desired detailed category.p You can select up to 100 items from the de-

tailed category.

Categories that are already set will have a redcheck mark.

6 Touch [OK].Returns previous screen.

7 To finish the selection, touch [OK].= For details, refer to Viewing the informationof a specified location on page 44

Viewing the Map Color LegendYou can browse the type of the roads andareas displayed on the map.

1 Touch [Map] in the navigation menu,then touch [Map Legend].

2 Touch the type which you want to see.

3 Touch or to switch to the next pageor previous page.

On this screen, you can operate the followingitems.[Day]:You can check the color of the Day screen.[Night]:You can check the color of the Night screen.

p To return the previous screen, touch[Back].

Changing the ViewModefor the Navigation MapYou can change the map display mode.p You cannot perform this operation in

“Scroll mode”.


En 49

Chapter

05Modify

ingMapConfig

ura

tions

1 Touch [Map] in the navigation menu,then touch [View Mode].

2 Touch the type that you want to set.= For details, refer to How to Use the Map onpage 38

Setting the Map Color Changebetween Day and NightTo improve the visibility of the map during theevening, you can set the timing for changingthe combination of the map color.

1 Touch [Map] in the navigation menu.

2 Touch [Day/Night Display] to changethe setting.Each time you touch the key changes that set-ting.[Automatic]*:You can change the colors of a map betweendaytime and nighttime according to whetherthe vehicle lights are On or Off.[Day]:The map is always displayed with daytime col-ors.

p To use this function with [Automatic], theOrange/white lead of the navigation systemmust be connected correctly.

p You can also change the brightness of thescreen between daytime and nighttime with[Dimmer].= For details, refer to Operating the pictureadjustment on page 153

Changing the Setting ofNavigation InterruptionScreenSet whether to automatically switch to the na-vigation screen from the AV screen when yourvehicle approaches a guidance point such asan intersection while displaying a screen otherthan navigation.


2 Touch [AV Guide Mode] to change thesetting.Each time you touch the key changes that set-ting.[On]*:Switches from the audio operation screen tothe navigation screen.[Off]:Does not switch the screen.

Changing the Map ColorYou can set the map color to bluish or reddish.


2 Touch [Road Color] to change the set-ting.Each time you touch the key changes that set-ting.[Blue]:Changes to blue based map colors.[Red]*:Changes to red based map colors.

p Check the color change with [MapLegend].


En50

Chapter

05

CAUTIONFor safety reasons, these route-setting functionsare not available while your vehicle is in motion.To enable these functions, you must stop in asafe place and put on the parking brake beforesetting your route (refer to To ensure safe drivingon page 22).

p Some information on traffic regulations de-pends on the time when the route calcula-tion is performed. Thus, the informationmay not correspond with a certain trafficregulation when your vehicle actuallypasses the location. Also, the informationon the traffic regulations provided will befor a passenger vehicle, and not for a truckor other delivery vehicles. Always follow theactual traffic regulations when driving.

Searching for Points ofInterest (POI) StatewideInformation about various facilities (Points OfInterest - POI), such as gas stations, amuse-ment parks, or restaurants, is available. By en-tering the POI Name, you can search for aPOI.p You can also narrow down the search

range by initially specifying the name of thecity where your destination is located andalso by initially specifying the category.

p Use the functions [POI Search] and [Vici-nity Search] in different situations. In [POISearch], the distance is not limited withinthe selected state or province, but in [Vici-nity Search], the distance for the search islimited to within a 16 km (10 miles) radius.

The following three methods are available forsearching facilities by POI:! Searching for POIs by specifying a category

first! Searching for POIs by specifying a city name

first! Searching for a POI directly from the name of

the facilities

Searching for a POI directlyfrom the name of the facilities1 Touch [Destination] in the navigationmenu, and then touch [POI Search].

2 Touch the state code key of the destina-tion and select the state or province (or ter-ritory).= For more details about “Selecting the stateor province where you want to search”, refer toCalculating your destination by using AddressSearch on page 28

3 Input the name of the facilities.

[City]:Touch to specify the destination city or area,and then input the city name. (This is availableonly when [Name] is blank.)[Category]:Touch to specify the POI category. (This isavailable only when [Name] and [City] areblank.)[List]:Lists candidates based on the yellow charac-ters in the text box (suggested characters inwhite are invalid). Touch the desired facility inthe list to proceed to the next step.

p When the options are narrowed down to sixor less, a list of the matching facilities auto-matically appears. When you enter thesame characters that were entered pre-viously, the system automatically displaysthe character string that follows the enteredcharacters. (Auto fill-in function)= For details, refer to Auto fill-in functionon page 30

p If less than six POIs in a detailed categoryare available, the screen for inputting thePOI name is skipped.

Setting a Route to Your Destination

En 51

Chapter

06Settin

gaRoute

toYourDestin

atio

n

Please proceed to Step 4.

4 Touch .Touching sorts the items in the list inthe order of distance.

:Sorts the items in the list in the alphabeticalorder.

p You can use this sort function only whenthere are 2 000 or less candidates.

5 Touch the desired POI for your destina-tion.

p Icons are helpful for quickly telling the cate-gory of facilities with the same name.

When the route is not set, route calculationstarts immediately.= For details, refer to Checking and modifyingthe route on page 32When the route is already set, “Location confir-mation screen” is shown.= For details, refer to Checking the locationon the map on page 31

p Touching displays a map of the sur-roundings of the selected POI.

p If the selected POI is the name of a chain ofoutlets and consequently the same storename applies to different locations (thenumber of outlets appears next to thechain’s name), touch the name of the POIto display a list of those POIs with city

name and street name, touch to set the POIas your destination.

Searching for POIs byspecifying a category first1 Touch [Destination] in the navigationmenu, and then touch [POI Search].


3 Touch [Category].

Category

4 Touch the desired category.

[Name]:Touch if you want to first specify the POIname.[City]:Touch if you want to first specify the destina-tion city or area.[Back]:Return the Destination menu.

5 Touch the detailed category.If the category is not sub-divided into more de-tailed categories, the list will not be displayed.


En52

Chapter

06

Proceed to Step 6.

6 Input the name of the facilities.You can also narrow down the candidates byspecifying the city before the name input.= For more details about “Subsequent Opera-tions”, refer to Searching for POIs by specifyinga category first on the previous page

Searching for POIs byspecifying a city name first1 Touch [Destination] in the navigationmenu, and then touch [POI Search].


3 Touch [City].

4 Input the name of the city that has thefacility you want to search for.

p Auto fill-in function is available.= For details, refer to Auto fill-in functionon page 30

A list of cities that include the entered charac-ters appear.[List]:Lists candidates based on the yellow charac-ters in the text box (suggested characters inwhite are invalid). Touch the desired city in thelist to proceed to the next step.

5 Input the name of the facilities.You can also narrow down the candidates byspecifying the category before the name input.= For more details about “Subsequent Opera-tions”, refer to Searching for POIs by specifyinga category first on the previous page

Finding a POI in the VicinitySearching for the facilitiesaround the current positionYou can search for Points Of Interest in yoursurroundings. Use this function to find a POIto visit during a journey. Searching range isapproximately 10miles (16 km) square fromthe current location.

1 Touch [Destination] in the navigationmenu, and then touch [Vicinity Search].The list of POI categories appears.

2 Touch the desired category.

Category

Previously set categories will have a red checkmark. When only a few types of the detailedcategories are selected, blue check marks willappear.[OK]:Start search with the selected category.[Back]:Returns to the previous screen.[Set]:Displays the screen for registering POI short-cuts.= For details, refer to Registering/deleting POIShortcuts on page 56


En 53

Chapter

06Settin

gaRoute

toYourDestin

atio

n

p If you touch one of the POI shortcuts (e.g.) before selecting a category on the

list, you can start searching for facilities di-rectly by the category registered on the POIshortcut.

p If you want to search for facilities by usingboth marked category and POI shortcuts,select some categories in the list and thentouch the POI shortcut to start searching.

3 Touch [Select Detail].

[Select All]:Selects all detailed categories that are in-cluded in that category. (E.g. all categories ofrestaurants including Japanese and fast food.)[Deselect All]:Deselects the selected categories.

4 Touch the desired detailed category.

Previously set categories will have a red checkmark.

5 Touch [Back].Returns to the previous screen.

6 Repeat Step 2 to 5 to select a category.You can select up to 100 items from the de-tailed categories.

7 Touch [OK].The POI in the selected category and subcate-gory are searched.

Names of POIs and their distance from yourcurrent location appear. They are listed inorder from nearest to farthest. To the left ofeach item is an icon indicating the category.

Distance to the facility

8 Touch the desired POI to set your desti-nation.When the route is not set, route calculationstarts immediately.= For details, refer to Checking and modifyingthe route on page 32When the route is already set, “Location confir-mation screen” is shown.= For details, refer to Calculating your destina-tion by using Address Search on page 28

p When you touch , the POIs around thespecified location are shown on a map.

Searching for the facilitiesaround the scroll cursorSearching range is approximately 10miles(16 km) square from the scroll cursor.p This can be used when Vicinity Search is

selected in Short-Cut Selection.= For more details about “Changing ashortcut”, refer to Selecting the Shortcut onpage 48

1 Scroll the map and move the scroll cur-sor to the place where you want to searchfor POI.

2 Touch .The shortcut menu appears.


En54

Chapter

06

3 Touch .For more details about “following operations”,refer to Step 2 of Searching for the facilitiesaround the current position on page 53

p The distance indicated in the search resultis the distance from the scroll cursor to thefacility.

p The bottom icon is for shortcuts to your fa-vorite categories. Touching the shortcutsicon displays a list of the facilities in a cate-gory.= For details, refer to Registering/deletingPOI Shortcuts on the next page

p [Vicinity Search] in the navigation menusearches your surroundings. On the otherhand, in the case of in the Shortcutmenu (= Refer to Shortcut menu on page45), the area around the scroll cursor afterthe map is scrolled will be searched.

Searching for YourDestination by Specifyingthe Telephone NumberIf you know the telephone number of your des-tination, you can quickly search for your desti-nation by specifying the telephone number.p You can also search for the phone number

[Phone #] on [Address Book].

1 Touch [Destination] in the navigationmenu, and then touch [Telephone Search].The telephone number entry screen appears.

2 Input a telephone number.

When the route is not set, route calculationstarts immediately.

= For details, refer to Checking and modifyingthe route on page 32When the route is already set, “Location confir-mation screen” is shown.= For details, refer to Calculating your destina-tion by using Address Search on page 28

p If there is more than one place for the num-ber input, a list of those places is displayed.Touch the item you want in the list.

Route Calculation to YourHome Location or to YourFavorite LocationIf your home location is registered, the routehome can be calculated by touching a singlekey from the navigation menu. Also, you canregister one location, such as your workplace,as your favorite location, and the route is cal-culated in a similar way.= For details, refer to Registering your homeand your favorite location on page 58

% Touch [Destination] in the navigationmenu, and then touch [Return Home] or[Go to].When the route is not set, route calculationstarts immediately.= For details, refer to Checking and modifyingthe route on page 32When the route is already set, “Location confir-mation screen” is shown.= For details, refer to Calculating your destina-tion by using Address Search on page 28


En 55

Chapter

06Settin

gaRoute

toYourDestin

atio

n

Selecting Destination from“Destination History” and“Address Book”Any place that has been searched before isstored in Destination History. Places that youhave registered manually, such as your home,are stored in Address Book. Simply select theplace you want to go to from the list and aroute to that place will be calculated.= For more details about “Operation of theAddress Book”, refer to Viewing “AddressBook” on page 60= For more details about “Information on Des-tination History”, refer to Operating “Destina-tion History” on page 64

1 Touch [Destination] in the navigationmenu, and then touch [Address Book] or[Destination History].

2 Touch your destination name.

When a route is not set, route calculationstarts immediately.= For details, refer to Checking and modifyingthe route on page 32When a route is already set, “Location confir-mation screen” is shown.= For details, refer to Checking the locationon the map on page 31

p You can also see the destination by touch-ing on the right of the list.

Registering/deleting POIShortcutsYou can register up to six shortcuts as your fa-vorite POI. You can also change or delete theregistered shortcuts.p You can register a POI shortcut by touching

on the Shortcut menu. The steps for re-

gistration and deletion are almost the sameas described below.

Registering a POI shortcut1 Touch [Destination] in the navigationmenu, and then touch [Vicinity Search].

2 Touch [Set].

Displays a list of already registered POI short-cuts.

3 Touch [Add].

Displays a POI category list.

4 Touch a category.

5 Touch the POI selection method.

[Select All]:


En56

Chapter

06

Selects all detailed categories that are in-cluded in that category. (E.g. all categories ofrestaurants including Japanese and fast food.)[Select Detail]:Selects one of the detailed categories. Touch-ing a category adds that category to the short-cuts.

Deleting a POI shortcut1 Touch [Destination] in the navigationmenu, and then touch [Vicinity Search].

2 Touch [Set].

3 Touch [Delete].Displays a list of already registered POI short-cuts.

4 Touch the category to be deleted.A red check appears on the selected shortcut.[All], [None]:A red check will appear or disappear on all re-gistered categories.

5 Touch [Delete].Deletes the selected shortcut from the list.


En 57

Chapter

06Settin

gaRoute

toYourDestin

atio

n


Registering LocationsOverviewRegistering places you visit frequently savestime and effort. Also, routes to registered loca-tions can be calculated easily by touching thecorresponding touch panel key. This registeredlocation information can also be modified. Theregistered location appears on the map as anicon.The registered locations are categorizedinto the following three types:! : Home location:

Register your home location here. Onceyour home location is registered, the routeto your home can be set by simply touching[Return Home] in Destinationmenu. Onlyone location can be registered.

! : Favorite location:Register a point that you frequently visit(for example, your office) here. Once yourfavorite location is registered, a route toyour favorite location can be set by simplytouching [Go to] in Destination menu.Only one location can be registered.

! : (default): Address Book entry:Register other points you often visit here.Once locations are registered, you can setthe route by selecting an item from Ad-dress Book.

p The items in Address Book are automati-cally updated in alphabetic order. However,“Home location” and “Favorite location”always appear at the top (if you registeredthem).

p Selects whether to display or hide all of theregistered location icons on the map.= For details, refer to Setting the Item onthe Map Screen on page 46

Registering your home andyour favorite locationYou can register one home location and onefavorite location. You can change the regis-tered information later. You might find it usefulto register your workplace or a relative’s homeas your favorite location.

1 Touch [Settings] in the navigationmenu, then touch [Defined Locations].

2 Touch [Go to].When registering your home location, touch[Home].

3 Search for a location to register.You can select a method of location search.

= For more details about “Address Search”,refer to Calculating your destination by usingAddress Search on page 28= For more details about “Information onsearching locations to register”, refer to Chap-ter 6

p If you select [Map Search], move the scrollcursor to the place you want to set andtouch [OK].

4 Point the scroll cursor to the locationyou want to register and touch [OK].The location is registered, and the Edit regis-tered information screen appears.= For details, refer to Editing the entry in “Ad-dress Book” on page 60

5 Touch [OK].Completes the registration.

Registering and Editing Locations

En58

Chapter

07

Registering a Location into“Address Book”Address Book can store up to 400 registeredlocations. These can include your home loca-tion, favorite places, and destinations youhave already registered.

Registering a location by scrollmodeYou can perform the following operation when[Registration] is selected in [Short-Cut Selec-tion].

1 Scroll to the location you want to regis-ter.

2 Display the shortcut menu, and touch.

The location is registered, and the Edit regis-tered information screen appears.= For details, refer to Editing the entry in “Ad-dress Book” on the next page


Registering a location by“Address Book”1 Touch [Destination] in the navigationmenu, then touch [Address Book].

2 Touch [Add].

3 Select the search method, search the lo-cation, and display the map.

4 When the map of the location youwant to register is displayed, touch [OK].

The location is registered, and the Edit regis-tered information screen appears.= For details, refer to Editing the entry in “Ad-dress Book” on the next page



En 59

Chapter

07Registe

ringandEditin

gLo

catio

ns

Viewing “Address Book”% Touch [Destination] in the navigationmenu, then touch [Address Book].

123

4 5

6789ab

1 Home location:The item displayed with the icon is thehome location. Touch to calculate the route.= For details, refer to Registering your homeand your favorite location on page 58

2 Favorite location:The item displayed with the icon is thefavorite location. Touch to calculate theroute.= For details, refer to Registering your homeand your favorite location on page 58

3 Address Book entry:Touch to calculate the route.

4 :A map of that location can be displayed.= For details, refer to Checking the loca-tion on the map on page 31

5 :The information related to that place can beedited.= For details, refer to Editing the entry in“Address Book” on this page

6 :Sorts the items in the list alphabetically.This is the default sorting order.p Active if there are items in the list and

current sort is not alphabetically.7 :

Sorts the items in the list in order of the dis-tance from the vehicle position.p Active if there are items in the list and

current sort is not by distance form cur-rent position.

8 :

Sorts the items in the list in order of the re-cently used items.p Active if there are items in the list and

current sort is not by last used.9 [Add]:

The screen for selecting the method for re-gistering the location in Address Book ap-pears.= For details, refer to Registering a Locationinto “Address Book” on the previous page

a [Delete]:Deletes the registered locations.= For details, refer to Deleting the entry in“Address Book” on page 63

b [Back]:Returns previous screen.

Editing the entry in “Address Book”In the Address Book menu, touching onthe right-hand side of the location displays theEdit registered information screen.

1 Touch [Destination] in the navigationmenu, then touch [Address Book].

2 Touch on the right-hand side of thelocation that you want to edit the informa-tion for.

12

43

5

8

67

1 NameYou can enter the desired name.

2 PronunciationYou can enter the desired pronunciation in-dependently from the name. The registeredpronunciation is used for voice recognition.p If nothing is entered in the text box, you

cannot use that item as a voice com-mand.


En60

Chapter

07

p Depending on which language is beingswitched to, you may not be able to usethe registered pronunciation withoutmodification.

= For details, refer to Available Voice Com-mands on page 159

3 Phone #The phone number of the registered loca-tion. You can dial this number by using8.p You can search by registered telephone

number.4 Icon

The symbol displayed on the map and Ad-dress Book.p Selects whether to display or hide all of

the registered location icons on themap.= For details, refer to Setting the Itemon the Map Screen on page 46

5 PictureAs you approach the location, the regis-tered image appears.You can register the picture stored in thenavigation system. You can also import andregister a picture shot from a digital cameraby using a CD-ROM.

6 SoundThe selected sound is played when you ap-proach the location.

7 Modify LocationYou can change the registered location byscrolling the map.

8

Only when the Bluetooth unit (sold sepa-rately) is connected to the navigation sys-tem and a cellular phone featuringBluetooth technology is also connected,you can make a phone call to the registeredphone number3 by touching .= For details, refer to Dialing the entry inthe Address Book on page 82

When you approach a registered locationwhile travelingWhen a location with a registered sound effectand image comes within an approx. 0.19 mile

(300 m) radius from the vehicle position, thesound effect plays and the image appears.

Changing a name

No sounds can be output during .

1 Touch [Name], then touch [Yes].The message confirming whether or not toregister the entered name as voice commandis displayed.When not registering a name as a voice com-mand, select [No].

2 Enter a new name, then touch [OK].

The current name appears in the text box. De-lete the current name, and enter a new namebetween 1 and 23 characters long.

p Touch [Small] to enter lowercase letters.Touch [Caps.] to enter uppercase letters.Touch to toggle the selection.

3 If the pronunciation is suitable, touch[Yes].The details you set are registered, and the Ad-dress Book menu appears.Alternative options:[No]:Completes the registration without editing thepronunciation.[Repeat]:


En 61

Chapter

07Registe

ringandEditin

gLo

catio

ns

You can reconfirm the pronunciation of thename you entered.

p If the pronunciation is not the desired one,edit the characters so that the pronuncia-tion matches your desired pronunciation.

p When you confirm the pronunciation, isshown on the left side of the location namedisplayed in “Address Book menu”. Thisicon indicates that this name can be usedas a voice command during voice opera-tion.

p You cannot change the name of your home.

Changing a pronunciation


1 Touch [Pronunciation].

2 Enter a new pronunciation, then touch[OK].The current pronunciation appears in the textbox (if already set). Delete the current pronun-ciation, and enter a new pronunciation be-tween 1 and 23 characters long.

3 If the pronunciation is suitable, touch[Yes].The details you set are registered, and the Ad-dress Book menu appears.Alternative options:[No]:Cancels the editing.[Repeat]:You can reconfirm the pronunciation of thename you entered.


p When you confirm the pronunciation, isshown on the left side of the location namedisplayed in the Address Book menu. Thismark indicates that this name can be usedas a voice command during voice opera-tion.

p You cannot change the pronunciation ofyour home.

p If nothing is entered in the text box, youcannot use that item as the voice com-mands.

Entering or changing a phone number

1 Touch [Phone #].

2 Input a phone number, then touch[OK].The Address Information menu appears.

p To change a registered phone number, de-lete the existing number and then enter anew one.

Selecting an icon to appear on the mapp Selects whether to display or hide all of the

registered location icons on the map.= For details, refer to Setting the Item on theMap Screen on page 46

1 Touch [Icon].

2 Touch the icon that you want to appearon the map.

The Address Information menu appears.p You cannot change the icon of your home

and your favorite location.p If you set (dot), the registered name of

that entry can be displayed on the map. Theregistered name does not appear if [Ad-dress Book Icon] is set to [Off].


En62

Chapter

07

Customizing the picture

Be sure to read “Limitations for importing pic-tures” before creating a CD-R (-RW).= For details, refer to Limitations for importingpictures on page 94

You can customize a picture for the AddressBook entry. Some pictures are already storedin the hard disk drive, and you can also importJPEG format pictures, such as a picture fromyour digital camera, by using a CD-R (-RW).You can use pictures by burning them onto aCD-R (-RW) with your PC and inserting it intothe navigation system.Here, a method for changing the picture is de-scribed with an example of loading a picturestored on a CD-R (-RW) onto the navigationsystem.

1 Check that no disc is inserted, and in-sert your CD-R (-RW) to the disc loadingslot.

2 Touch [Picture], and then touch [Importfrom Disc].The list of the pictures stored in the CD-R (-RW) is displayed.

p Touching an option other than [Importfrom Disc] allows you to select an imagestored on the hard disk drive.

3 Touch a picture you want to set.p To cancel displaying the picture, select

[No Picture].

4 Touch [Yes].On this screen, you can select the followingitems:[No]:Select when you want to change to anotherpicture.Return to Step 3.

Selecting sound


1 Touch [Sound].

2 Select the desired sound.p To turn off the sound, select [No Sound].

3 Touch [Sound] to hear the sound.

4 Touch [Set].

Changing the position of locations

1 Touch [Modify Location].The map of the selected area and its surround-ings appears.

2 Touch the screen to change its position,then touch [OK].

Deleting the entry in “AddressBook”Items registered in Address Book can be de-leted. All entries of the data in Address Bookcan be deleted at once.

1 Touch [Destination] in the navigationmenu, then touch [Address Book].

2 Touch [Delete].“Delete from Address Book” screen appears.

3 Select the location you want to delete.A check mark appears by the selected loca-tion.


En 63

Chapter

07Registe

ringandEditin

gLo

catio

ns

On this screen, you can select the followingitems:[All]:Selects all entries.[None]:Displayed when all locations are selected.Cancels all selected locations.

4 Touch [Delete].

5 Select [Yes].The data you selected is deleted.Alternative option:[No]:Cancels the deletion and returns to Step 4.

p Because deleted data cannot be restored,take extra care not to delete by mistake.

Operating “Destination History”The points to which a route has been calcu-lated in the past are automatically saved inDestination History.p If no location is stored in Destination His-

tory, you cannot select [Destination His-tory]. (If you perform a route calculation,you can select [Destination History].)

% Touch [Destination] in the navigationmenu, then touch [Destination History].

23

1

1 Destination history:Touch to calculate the route.

2 [Delete]:Deletes the selected history.

3 [Back]:Returns to the previous screen.

Deleting the entry in“Destination History”Items in Destination History can be deleted.All entries in Destination History can be de-leted at once.

1 Touch [Destination] in the navigationmenu, then touch [Destination History].

2 Touch [Delete].“Delete from History” screen appears.

3 Select the location you want to delete.A check mark appears by the selected loca-tion.

On this screen, you can select the followingitems:[All]:Selects all entries.[None]:Displayed when all locations are selected.Cancels all selected locations.

4 Touch [Delete].

5 Select [Yes].The data you selected is deleted.Alternative option:[No]:Cancels the deletion and returns to Step 4.

p Because deleted data cannot be restored,take extra care not to delete by mistake.


En64

Chapter

07

Using XM NavTrafficInformationIf you have a GEX-P10XMT XM Digital SatelliteData & Audio Receiver (sold separately) at-tached to the navigation system and have anactive subscription to XM NavTraffic service,you can view current traffic conditions and in-formation on your navigation display. Whenthe unit receives updated traffic information,the navigation system will overlay the traffic in-formation on your map and also display de-tailed text information when available. Whenyou are traveling along a route and there istraffic information on your current route, thesystem will detect it and ask you if you wouldlike to be rerouted, or suggest another routeautomatically.p The system acquires the traffic information

up to 100 miles in radius from the vehicleposition. (If there is a lot of traffic informa-tion around your vehicle, the radius will beshorter than 100 miles.)

p The navigation system provides the follow-ing functions by using the informationfrom XM NavTraffic:— Displaying a list of traffic information— Displaying traffic information on a map— Suggesting a route to avoid traffic con-

gestion by using traffic informationp The term “traffic congestion” in this section

indicates the following types of traffic infor-mation: stop and go, stopped traffic,closed/blocked roads. This information isalways taken into consideration whenchecking your route, and the informationrelated with these events cannot be turnedoff. If you select other traffic information in[Traffic Settings], the information can bedisplayed in a list or on a map.

= For details, refer to Selecting traffic informa-tion to display on page 69

Viewing traffic listTraffic Information is displayed on screen in alist. This allows you to check how many traffic

incidents have occurred, their location andtheir distance from your current position.

Checking all traffic informationTraffic information except traffic flow informa-tion is displayed onscreen in a list.

1 Touch [Information] in the navigationmenu, then touch [Traffic Events].The list with received traffic information isshown.

2 Touch or to view the incident list.Places (street names) where incidents haveoccurred are displayed in the list.

67

3 1 2 4 5

1 Street or place2 Direction3 Incident4 Distance to the location5 The incident numbers currently dis-

played and the total number of inci-dentsp The incidents that have already been

read will be displayed in white. Unreadincidents will be in yellow.

6 Sort key:

You can sort the traffic information in alpha-betical order.

:You can sort the traffic information by dis-tance from your current position.For the list displayed when you touch [Traf-fic Events], the list will be sorted accordingto the linear distance from the vehicle posi-tion to the traffic information.

Using Traffic Information

En 65

Chapter

08Usin

gTra

fficInfo

rmatio

n

For the list displayed when you touch [Traf-fic On Route], the list will be sorted accord-ing to the distance from the vehicle positionto the traffic information.

:You can sort the traffic information accord-ing to the incident.The list will be sorted in the order of closed/blocked roads, traffic congestion, acci-dents, road works and others.

:When new traffic information is received,current information is changed or old infor-mation has been removed, the list is up-dated to reflect the new situation.

7

Touching allows you to check the loca-tion on a map. (Traffic information withoutpositional information cannot be checkedon a map.)

3 Select an incident you want to view indetail.The details of the selected incident are dis-played.

p Touching an incident you want to see allowsyou to view the detailed information of theincident. If the information cannot be dis-played on one screen, touch or to viewthe remaining information.

4 Touch [Back] to return to the list withtraffic information.A list with traffic information appears again.

Checking traffic information on therouteAll traffic information on the current route (in-cluding traffic flow information) is displayedonscreen in a list.

% Touch [Information] in the navigationmenu, and then touch [Traffic On Route].The currently set traffic information on theroute appears on the screen.

p The method for checking the content dis-played on the screen is the same for“Checking all traffic information”.

Checking traffic flow information onthe listThe traffic flow information can also be dis-played as an onscreen list.

% Touch [Information] in the navigationmenu, then touch [Traffic Flow].The list with the traffic flow information isshown.

(mph):You can sort the traffic information by the aver-age speed.

p The other methods for checking the trafficflow information displayed on screen is thesame for “Checking all traffic information”.

Confirming traffic informationon the mapp A line displayed only when the map scale is

2.5miles (5 km) or lower.p Icon appears only when the scale on the

map is 10miles (20 km) or lower. If thescale is changed, the icons are resized ac-cording to the selected scale.

Traffic event icon and lineThe traffic event information displayed on themap is as follows.

Traffic event icon

with yellow line:Stop and go traffic

with red line:Stopped traffic


En66

Chapter

08

with black line:Closed/blocked roads

etc.:For the meaning of the icon, see [Traffic Set-tings] in the Information menu.= For details, refer to Selecting traffic informa-tion to display on page 69If you want to check the traffic information de-tails on the map, move the scroll cursor ontoan icon such as and touch . This allowsyou to view place names and other detail infor-mation.

Traffic flow information icon and lineRed, yellow, or green blinking lines may ap-pear on either side of a road. In addition tothese blinking lines, a round icon with a num-ber may appear on the map. The number inthe icon indicates the actual average speed ofthat specific area. These colors indicate theaverage speed at which traffic is flowing alongthese streets. Here is a guide to the colors andthe average speed they indicate:

Traffic flow icon

Red: average speed in this area is between5mph to 15mph (8 km/h to 24 km/h)Yellow: average speed in this area is between20mph to 40mph (32 km/h to 64 km/h)Green: average speed in this area is 45mph(72 km/h) or faster (An icon without a numberindicates the average speed of the road ismore than 45mph (72 km/h))p The traffic flow line can be used only when

[Traffic Settings] is selected.= For details, refer to Selecting traffic informa-tion to display on page 69If you want to check the traffic information de-tails at the map, move the scroll cursor onto

an icon such as and touch . This allowsyou to view place names and other detail infor-mation.

Setting an alternative route toavoid traffic congestionThe navigation system checks at certain timeintervals whether or not there is the traffic in-formation on your route. If the navigation sys-tem detects any traffic congestion on yourcurrent route, the system tries to find a betterroute in the background.p Following types of traffic incidents on the

route will be checked: stop and go, stoppedtraffic, and closed/blocked roads.

p Traffic flow information is taken into ac-count only when [Traffic Flow] in [TrafficSettings] is checked.

Checking for traffic congestionautomaticallyIf there is information about traffic congestionon your current route and if an alternativeroute can be found, the navigation system willrecommend a new alternative route automati-cally. In such a case, the following screen willappear.p There is no action if the system cannot find

any traffic congestion information on yourroute or the system cannot find an alterna-tive.

Difference in distance and travel time be-tween the existing route and new route.

Distance from the current position of your ve-hicle to the point of entry into the new route.


En 67

Chapter

08Usin

gTra

fficInfo

rmatio

n

On this screen, you can select the followingitems:New:The recommended route is displayed on thescreen.Current:The current route is displayed on the screen.OK:The displayed route is set.p When no selection is made, the screen re-

turns to previous screen.

Checking traffic information manuallyTouching notification icon on the map screenallows you to check traffic information on yourroute while icon is displayed. Only if there isany traffic information on your route, notifica-tion icon is displayed on the navigation mapscreen.p The notification icon will not be available

when your vehicle deviate from the route.p Traffic flow information is taken into ac-

count only when [Traffic Flow] in [TrafficSettings] is checked.

1 Set [Show Traffic Incident] to [View].= For details, refer to Setting the Item on theMap Screen on page 46

2 Press MAP button to display the currentlocation.The icon appears when the system acquirestraffic information on the current route.

3 Touch the icon while the icon is dis-played.

Notification icon

The displayed icon indicates the type of thetraffic information.

4 Touch [Detour] to search for an alterna-tive route.

p [Detour] will be enable only when the sys-tem can find “traffic congestion”.

After touching [Detour], the route is recalcu-lated taking all traffic congestion on your cur-rent route into account.

p “Notification icon” shows the nearest trafficinformation on the route. However, if youtouch [Detour], the route is recalculated bytaking into account not only this informa-tion, but also all traffic congestion informa-tion on the route.

On this screen, you can select the followingitems:[List]:Only three proximate traffic events on yourroute are listed in this traffic list.[Back]:The message disappears, and the map displayreappears.For the subsequent operations, see “Checkingfor traffic congestion automatically”.= For details, refer to Checking for traffic con-gestion automatically on the previous page


En68

Chapter

08

Selecting traffic information todisplayThere are different types of traffic informationthat can be received via the XM NavTraffic ser-vice, and you can select which types will be in-corporated and displayed on your navigationsystem.

1 Touch [Information] in the navigationmenu, and then touch [Traffic Settings].

2 Touch [Displayed Traffic information].The names of the displayed traffic informationitems and a list of icons appears on thescreen.

3 Touch the traffic information item todisplay.A red check appears next to the selected traf-fic information.

p [Traffic Flow] includes not only whether ornot to display the icon on the map, but alsowhether or not to take the flow informationinto account when rerouting.

p Touching [All (None)] selects or deselectsall traffic information.

4 Touch [OK].The selected traffic information icon is addedto the screen.

p The following types of traffic congestioncannot be deselected and are always dis-played and taken into consideration: stop

and go, stopped traffic, and closed/blockedroads.

5 Touch [OK].


En 69

Chapter

08Usin

gTra

fficInfo

rmatio

n

Using the XM Tuner to ViewStock, Sports, and OtherInformationWhen an XM tuner (GEX-P10XMT) is con-nected, you can receive stock prices, sports,and other information, and display it onscreen.You may also register favorite information onthe navigation system.

Displaying stock pricesCan display the prices of up to 12 stocks.

% Touch [Information] in the navigationmenu, and then touch [Stock Info].

The screen displays a list of stock prices.p Although the stock price information dis-

played onscreen is updated every 30 sec-onds (approx.), these prices are not real-time values.

Registering stocks to be displayed

1 Touch [Information] in the navigationmenu, and then touch [Stock Info].

2 Touch [Add].

3 Input the Ticker text for the stocks youwant to display, then touch [OK].

[0-9], [Punc.], [Oper.], [Sym.]:

You can switch the upper line to input thenumber and marks.Touch to toggle the selection.

p The method for inputting the text is almostsame as for inputting street names.= For more details about “Text input meth-od”, refer to Operation of state selectionscreen on page 29

p If the input ticker symbol does not match infull the actual ticker symbol for the stock,you may not be able to find it.

Deleting stocks to be displayed onscreenCan display the prices of up to 12 stocks. If 12stocks are already registered, delete as manyentries as necessary to add new stocks.

1 Touch [Information] in the navigationmenu, and then touch [Stock Info].

2 Touch [Delete].

3 Touch the ticker of the stock you wantto delete.A red check appears next to the ticker youtouched.

p To delete all registered stocks, touch [All].Red checks will appear next to all tickers.

4 Touch [Delete].A message will appear asking you to confirmthe deletion.

5 Touch [Yes].

Storing browsable informationXM special contents can be stored as [My Fa-vorites] so that it can be accessed withoutsearching every time an update is needed.p The displayed items depend on the infor-

mation that is sent from each station.p [My Favorites] can store up to 50 items.

Using XM Tuner and Other Information

En70

Chapter

09

1 Touch [Information] in the navigationmenu, then touch [Set My Favorites].The screen will display a list of categories. Theinformation appearing onscreen is automati-cally updated at regular intervals.

2 Touch a category you want to browsefrom the list.

3 Touch an item you wish to store.

If an item is divided into more detail cate-gories, select the one from the list to narrowdown the category. After narrowing down, themessage confirming whether or not to registerthe item.

4 Touch [OK].

If the storing step is successful, the confirma-tion screen will appear.Touch [OK] to complete the storing and returnto the previous screen.

Displaying favorite browsableInformationYou can check and delete the browsable infor-mation you registered.

1 Store the desired item (topic).= For details, refer to Storing browsable infor-mation on the previous page

2 Touch [Information] in the navigationmenu, and then touch [My Favorites].A list of registered items (topics) appears onthe screen.

3 Touch an item to display the contents.

Deleting favorite browsable information

1 Touch [Information] in the navigationmenu, and then touch [My Favorites].

2 Touch [Delete].

3 Touch the items you want to delete.


En 71

Chapter

09Usin

gXM

TunerandOth

erInfo

rmatio

n

A red check appears next to the items youtouched.

p To delete all favorite contents, touch [All].Red checks will appear next to all items.

4 Touch [Delete].

5 A message will appear asking you toconfirm the deletion. Touch [Yes].

Checking the ReceptionStatus of the XM TunerThe current XM tuner’s (GEX-P10XMT) recep-tion status and signal strength appear onscreen. (The information that is transmittedvia XM DATA cable is displayed in this screen.)

% Touch [Information] in the navigationmenu, and then touch [XM Status].

2

1

3

1 StatusDepending on the XM tuner’s (GEX-P10XMT) reception status, any one of thefollowing may appear.OKNo problem.UpdatingUpdating encryption code.Check AntennaImproper antenna connection.Not Connected

2 Signal StrengthDepending on the signal strength, any oneof the following may appear.Very StrongStrongMarginalWeakNo Signal

3 Radio IDThe radio ID appears.p If you have subscribed to either XM

audio only or XM NavTraffic stand alone,you will see [Updating] in [Status]. Thisis because the GEX-P10XMT is con-stantly checking to see if you havedecided to add the other service whileyour navigation system is turned on. Ifyou subscribe to both services, the ap-propriate status will be shown in[Status].

Emergency InfoThe Emergency Info screen provides impor-tant emergency information pertaining to yourvehicle, insurance, and current location. Suchemergency information could be useful in theevent of an accident or vehicle breakdown.The accuracy of the personal information isdependent on the accuracy of the informationentered into the navigation system by the user.

WARNINGThe Emergency Info screen is only intended toprovide information to a driver that may be usefulduring an emergency situation, and does not re-place the need to call for emergency assistance,when necessary.


En72

Chapter

09

Checking the informationregistered as Emergency Info% Touch [Information] in the navigationmenu, and then touch [Emergency Info].

4 5

1 2

3

The information registered as EmergencyInfo appears on the screen.

1 You are currently at:Your current position is indicated by thestreet name, latitude, and longitude.

2 Personal Information:Your VIN number, insurance policy number,and the telephone number of your insur-ance company can be displayed once en-tered by the user.

3 Emergency TOW service phone:The phone number of the subscribingEmergency TOW service can be displayedonce entered by the user. The default or fac-tory setting is the phone number of theEmergency Roadside Assistance serviceprovided by Signature’s Nationwide AutoClub, Inc.

1 year of free Emergency Roadside As-sistance service1 year of free Emergency Roadside Assis-tance service is available to all registeredowners and provided by Signature’s Nation-wide Auto Club, Inc. The first year of Emer-gency Roadside Assistance service is paidfor by Pioneer only if your navigation systemis registered with Pioneer and you sign upon-line with Signature’s Nationwide AutoClub, Inc. at the time you register your navi-gation system with Pioneer. If you have notsigned up for this service with Signature’s

Nationwide Auto Club, Inc., or if your freeone-year period has expired, you are subjectto charges by Signature’s Nationwide AutoClub, Inc. You are also subject to chargesby Signature’s Nationwide Auto Club, Inc.for roadside services not included in theEmergency Roadside Assistance service.The terms and conditions regarding theEmergency Roadside Assistance serviceprovided by Signature’s Nationwide AutoClub, Inc. are determined solely and exclu-sively by Signature’s Nationwide Auto Club,Inc. Please contact Signature’s NationwideAuto Club, Inc. for more information. Thetelephone number that appears here by de-fault is the toll free number for this service.For additional details on registering for thisservice, please check your product registra-tion card included with this product. If youare not interested in the free Roadside As-sistance service, this number can be editedand replaced by your own roadside assis-tance telephone number.

p The police number is shown as 911 andcannot be changed.

4 Locate Car Service= For details, refer to Searching for car ser-vice in an emergency on the next page

5 Dial each number= For details, refer to Dialing the corre-sponding number in emergency on the nextpage


En 73

Chapter

09Usin

gXM

TunerandOth

erInfo

rmatio

n

Dialing the corresponding number inemergency

CAUTIONThis function can be valid only when all followingconditions are satisfied:! The Bluetooth unit (sold separately) is con-

nected with navigation system.! The communication for Hands-free phoning is

activate between the cellular phone featuringBluetooth technology and the navigation sys-tem.

1 Touch [Information] in the navigationmenu, and then touch [Emergency Info].

2 Touch .A list of telephone numbers appears onsc-reen.

3 Touch the phone number you want todial.The signal is transmitted to the selectedphone number.

Touching terminates the call.p Touch [Back] to return to the previous

screen.

Searching for car service in anemergencyIn an emergency, you can search the Emer-gency Info for Auto Services in the vicinity ofyour current position and set the currentroute.

WARNINGThe Emergency Info screen is only intended toprovide information to a driver that may be usefulduring an emergency situation and if they are in

a safe location. If not, or in all major accidents,call 911.


2 Touch [Locate Car Service].

A list of auto services appears onscreen.

3 Touch the Category of the auto serviceyou want to use.

p The Auto Service categories that can be se-lected in the Emergency Info are:[Automotive] and [Car Dealer].

4 Touch the selection method.

[Select All]:Selects all detailed categories included in thatcategory. A red check appears next to the se-lected category.[Deselect All]:Cancels the selected detailed categories.[Select Detail]:Selects a detailed category from the list.


En74

Chapter

09

p If you want to search with more detailed ca-tegories, touch [Select Detail]. When thesubcategory list appears, touch the itemand touch [Back]. When only a few types ofthe detailed categories are selected, bluecheck marks will appear.

5 Repeat Step 3 and 4, select a category,and touch [OK].The POI in the selected category and detailedcategory is searched.

6 Touch the name of the facility to set theroute you want.

When the route is not set, route calculationstarts immediately.= For details, refer to Checking and modifyingthe route on page 32When the route is already set, “Location confir-mation screen” is shown.= For details, refer to Checking the locationon the map on page 31

Registering user informationEnter the information written on the vehicle in-spection certificate or insurance certificate.


2 Touch [Setup].

3 Touch the desired item to register yourinformation.

p If information is already registered, that in-formation will appear.

4 Input the number you wish to register,then touch [OK].Completes the registration.

[Edit VIN]Register your Vehicle’s Identification Number.(You can enter between 1 and 17 digits.)[Edit Policy Number]Register your insurance policy number.

[Edit Insurance Phone]Register your insurance company’s phonenumber.[Edit TOW Service Phone]Register a towing company’s phone number.

p Touch [Default] to restore the default TOWservice phone number.


En 75

Chapter

09Usin

gXM

TunerandOth

erInfo

rmatio

n

Setting the Vehicle DynamicsDisplayYou can change the contents of the meters onthe left and right of the Vehicle Dynamics Dis-play.Until the sensor’s initial learning is complete,only the voltage and clock are available.p The speed displayed is a guideline and may

not correspond to the actual speed.

1 Switch to Vehicle Dynamics Display.= For more details about “Changing the mapdisplay mode”, refer to Switching the viewmode on page 38

2 Touch the left or right meter.Touch panel keys are displayed.

3 Touch the items you want to display.

You can select the following items:[Voltage]:Displays the power supply and voltage sup-plied from the battery to this system.[Acceleration]:Acceleration in a forward direction is dis-played. The + sign indicates acceleration whilethe - sign indicates deceleration.[Side Acceleration]:Acceleration in a side direction such as whenturning, is displayed. The + sign indicates aright turn, while the - sign indicates a left turn.[Angular Velocity]:Displays the vehicle’s turning angle over onesecond (how far it has turned in a second).[Slope]:Displays the vehicle’s vertical movement. +side represents the rising angle, and - side thefalling angle.[Direction]:

Displays the direction your vehicle is travelingin.[Clock]:Current time is displayed.[Adjust Look]:Touch [Adjust Look] to display a screen for se-lecting the panel pattern. Touch one of the pat-terns from among those displayed on screento change the panel to the selected pattern.

p If you touch [Peak Hold Reset], the maxi-mum and minimum (green line) values indi-cated in [Acceleration] and [SideAcceleration] are reset.

p You cannot change the speedometer at thecenter.

p Selecting Demo Mode in the Settingsmenu enables you to perform a demonstra-tion with random values.


En76

Chapter

09

Hands-free Phoning Overview

CAUTIONFor your safety, avoid talking on the phone asmuch as possible while driving.

If your cellular phone features Bluetooth®

technology, this navigation system can be con-nected to your cellular phone wirelessly. Usingthis hands-free function, you can operate thenavigation system to make or receive phonecalls. You can also transfer the phone bookdata stored in your cellular phone to the navi-gation system. This section describes how toset up a Bluetooth connection and how to op-erate a cellular phone featuring Bluetoothtechnology on the navigation system.The following description assumes that the de-vice name of the cellular phone to be con-nected using Bluetooth wireless technology isset to [My mobile phone].

Preparing communication devicesTo use the cellular phone featuring Bluetoothwireless technology on the navigation system,the Bluetooth unit (ND-BT1) (sold separately)is required.

Precautions for using a cellular phonefeaturing Bluetooth technology

By connecting the Bluetooth unit (sold sepa-rately), you can use the functions described inthis manual, including hands-free phoning orphone book transfer. To use these functions,the cellular phone featuring Bluetooth wirelesstechnology that you want to connect musthave a supported profile that is the same asthe profile for the Bluetooth unit. For the sup-ported profile, refer to the owner’s manual ofthe Bluetooth unit.

p Please read “Notes for hands-free phoning”for your reference.

= For details, refer to Notes for hands-freephoning on page 86

p When the power of the navigation systemturns off, the Bluetooth connection is alsodisconnected. When the system restarts,the system automatically attempts to re-connect the Previously connected cellularphone. Even when the connection is cut forsome reason, the system automatically re-connects the specified cellular phone (ex-cept when the connection is cut by thecellular phone operation).

You can open [Phone Menu] directly by press-ing and holding MENU button.

p You can check the signal strength for con-nection between your cellular phone andBluetooth unit (sold separately) with [Con-nection Status] in [Hardware] Menu.= For more details about “[ConnectionStatus]”, refer to Checking the connectionsof leads and installation positions on page90

p You can set the voice volume and ring vo-lume with [Volume] in [Settings] Menu.= For more details about “Volume”, referto Setting the Volume for Guidance andPhone on page 88= For more details about “[Volume]”, referto Setting the Volume for Guidance andPhone on page 88

p You can set to mute peripheral sounds dur-ing hands-free phoning.= For more details about “[Mute Set]”,refer to Switching the muting/attenuationtiming on page 150

While your cellular phone featuring Bluetoothwireless technology is connected, is dis-played on the map.

Using Hands-free Phoning

En 77

Chapter

10Usin

gHan

ds-free

Phoning

p If you operate using “CD-SR1” Steering Re-mote Control (sold separately), the follow-ing buttons can be used for operation:

VR ACTIVATION / OFF HOOK button:Same function as on the screen.(Except for [Received Calls] and [EmergencyInfo].)VR CANCEL / ON HOOK button:Same function as or on the screen.PHONE MENU button:Open [Phone Menu] directly.

Setting up for hands-free phoningBefore you can use the hands-free phoningfunction, you will need to set up the navigationsystem for using that function. This entails re-gistering your cellular phone with the naviga-tion system and establishing a Bluetoothwireless connection between the navigationsystem and your cellular phone.

Registering your cellular phoneYou need to register your cellular phone featur-ing Bluetooth wireless technology when youconnect it for the first time. A total of fivephones can be registered. Two registrationmethods are available:! Registration from the navigation system! Registration from the cellular phonep Once you have registered a phone, you can

select that cellular phone from the list toconnect it without registration.

p If you try to register more than five cellularphones, the system will ask you to selectone of the registered cellular phones tooverwrite.= For details, refer to Connecting a regis-tered cellular phone on the next page

p The default device name displayed on thecellular phone is [PIONEER HDD NAVI].The default password is [1111].

Operating from the navigation system

1 Activate the Bluetooth wireless tech-nology on your cellular phone.For some cellular phones, no specific action isnecessary to activate Bluetooth wireless tech-nology. For details, refer to the instructionmanual of your cellular phone.

2 Touch [Information] in the navigationmenu, and then touch [Phone Menu].

3 Touch [Phone Settings].The phone settings screen appears.

4 Touch [Registration].

5 Touch [Navi].The system searches for cellular phones withBluetooth technology that are waiting for theconnection and displays them in the list.

6 Wait until your cellular phone appearsin the list.

p If you cannot find the cellular phone youwant to connect, check that the cellularphone is waiting for the Bluetooth wirelesstechnology connection.

7 Select the cellular phone you want toregister from the list.

8 Enter the password of the navigationsystem to register it using your cellularphone.After the registration is completed, the follow-ing screen appears.


En78

Chapter

10

p If registration fails, repeat the procedurefrom the beginning. If a connection stillcannot be established, try connecting usingyour cellular phone.

Operating from your cellular phone




4 Touch [Registration].

5 Touch [Mobile].The navigation system waits for a Bluetoothwireless technology connection.

6 Operate your cellular phone to registerthe navigation system.If your cellular phone asks you to enter a pass-word, enter the password of the navigationsystem.After the registration is completed, the follow-ing screen appears.

p If registration fails repeat the procedurefrom the beginning.

Connecting a registered cellular phoneThe navigation system automatically connectsthe cellular phone selected as a target of con-nection. However, connect the cellular phonemanually in the following cases:! Two or more cellular phones are registered,

and you want to manually select the cellu-lar phone to be used.

! You want to reconnect a disconnected cel-lular phone.

! Connection cannot be established automa-tically for some reason.

p Unregistered cellular phones cannot beconnected.




Phone name currently connected or selectedas a target of connection


En 79

Chapter

10Usin

gHan

ds-free

Phoning

4 Touch [Connection].

5 Touch the name of the cellular phonethat you want to connect.When a connection is successfully estab-lished, a connection complete message ap-pears, and the system returns to the phonemenu screen.

p To cancel the connection to your cellularphone, touch [Cancel].

p If connection fails, check whether your cel-lular phone is waiting for a connection.Then repeat the procedure from step 4.

Editing the device nameYou can change the device name to be dis-played on your cellular phone. (Default is[PIONEER HDD NAVI].)



3 Touch [Device Name].

4 Touch any key to enter the name youwant to set and then touch [OK].= For details, refer to Calculating your destina-tion by using Address Search on page 28

p Up to 20 characters can be entered for a de-vice name.

Editing the passwordYou can change the password to be used forauthentication on your cellular phone. (De-fault is [1111].)



3 Touch [Password].

4 Touch any key to enter the passwordyou want to set and then touch [OK].= For details, refer to Calculating your destina-tion by using Address Search on page 28

p Four to eight characters can be entered fora password.

Receiving a phone callYou can use the navigation system to receive acall hands-free.The map screen shows the icon while your cel-lular phone featuring Bluetooth wireless tech-nology is connected. You can receive a hands-free call only when the cellular phone is con-nected.

Connecting icon

Answering an incoming callThe system informs you that it is receiving acall by displaying a message and producing aring sound once.

1 When there is an incoming call, touch.

When there is an incoming call, you can rejectthe call by touching .

p During a call, the is displayed at theright-hand side of the screen.


En80

Chapter

10

2 To end the call, touch at the topright of the screen.The call ends.

p If the received voice is too quiet to hear, youcan adjust the volume of the received voice.= For more details about “Volume”, refer toSetting the Volume for Guidance and Phoneon page 88

p Depending on the caller ID service, thephone number of the received call may notbe displayed. [Unknown] appears instead.

p You may hear a noise when you hang upthe phone.

Making a phone callYou can make a phone call in many differentways.

Direct dialing


2 Touch [Dial].

3 Input the phone number, and thentouch to make a call.

To cancel the call after the system starts dial-ing, touch .

4 To end the call, touch at the topright of the screen.

Dialing from the dialed numberhistory or the received call history


2 Touch [Dialed Numbers] or [ReceivedCalls].The list of either one appears.

3 Touch a name or telephone numberfrom the list to make a call.

Date and time of the call dialed or received


When you make a call to the phone number in[Received Calls] without “+”, you can add “+”in front of that number by touching [+]. To de-lete “+”, touch [+] again in that time.

Touch to make a call.


p Up to 30 entries for each of the dialed num-ber and received call histories are recordedautomatically. When the number of entriesexceeds 30, the entries will be deleted fromthe oldest one.

p You can clear the dialed number or receivedcall history.= For details, refer to Editing the receivedcall or dialed number history on page 86


En 81

Chapter

10Usin

gHan

ds-free

Phoning

Calling a number in the phone bookAfter finding the list in the Phone Book youwant to call, you can select the number andmake the call.p Before using this function, you need to

transfer the phone book stored in your cel-lular phone to the navigation system.

= For details, refer to Transferring the phonebook on the next page


2 Touch [Phone Book].The phone book screen appears.

3 Touch a name from the list to make acall.If you touch an alphabet tab, you can jump tothe first page of the contacts whose namesstart with that letter.

Touch the entry in the list to make a call. Tocancel the call after the system starts dialing,touch .


Calling a number in “Dial Favorites”After finding the list in “Dial Favorites” youwant to call, you can select the number andmake the call.p Before using this function, you need to set

the phone number from the phone book to“Dial Favorites”.

= For details, refer to Registering a phonenumber in “Dial Favorites” on page 84


2 Touch [Dial Favorites].The “Dial Favorites” screen appears.

3 Touch one of [Favorite 1] to [Favorite 5]to make a call.Touch the entry to make a call.To cancel the call after the system starts dial-ing, touch .


Dialing the entry in the Address BookYou can make a call to the entry registered inthe address book.p You cannot make a call to locations if the

phone number is not registered.

1 Display “Address Book”.= For more details about “Operation of theAddress Book”, refer to Viewing “AddressBook” on page 60

2 Touch of the entry you want to call.The detail screen appears.

3 Touch to make a call.



Dialing a facility’s phone numberYou can make a call to facilities with phonenumber data.


En82

Chapter

10

1 Perform [POI Search] or [VicinitySearch] and display the detail information.= For more details about “Operation of [POISearch]”, refer to Searching for Points of Inter-est (POI) Statewide on page 51= For more details about “Operation of [Vici-nity Search]”, refer to Finding a POI in the Vici-nity on page 53

2 Touch of the entry you want to call.The detail screen appears.

3 Touch to make a call.



Dialing from the map

You can make a call by selecting the icon of aregistered location or a POI icon from the mapscreen.p You cannot make a call to locations or POIs

that have no phone number data.

1 Scroll the map, and place the cursor onan icon on the map.

2 Touch .

The detail screen appears.

3 Touch to make a call.To cancel the call after the system starts dial-ing, touch .


Transferring the phone bookYou can transfer the data from the phone bookstored in your cellular phone to the phonebook stored in the navigation system.By transferring the phone book to the naviga-tion system, you can browse the data in thetransferred phone book on the screen of thenavigation system. You can also select the en-tries in the phone book to make a call from thenavigation system or edit the data on the navi-gation system.p Depending on the cellular phone, “Phone

Book” may be called a name such as “Con-tacts”, “Business card” or something else.

p The Phone Book can hold a total of 400 en-tries.

p The Hands-free phoning connection is dis-connected to establish the connection forphone book transfer. When the phone bookis transferred, hands-free phoning is recon-nected automatically.

p The phone book of this navigation systemcannot assign the multiple telephone num-bers for one person’s name.

1 Connect your cellular phone featuringBluetooth wireless technology.= For details, refer to Registering your cellularphone on page 78


3 Touch [Read Bus. Card].If there is a phone book already transferred,the following screen appears.


En 83

Chapter

10Usin

gHan

ds-free

Phoning

[Yes]:Deletes all phone numbers stored in thephone book, and then transfers the data.[No]:Keeps the current entries and then adds newdata to the phone book. (Duplicate data can-not be consolidated.)

p If you want to keep the existing phone book,select [No].

4 Check that the following screen is dis-played, and operate your cellular phone totransfer the phone book entries.

The phone book entries in your cellular phoneare transferred to the navigation system. Tocancel the transfer, touch [Cancel].

p Only the names and telephone numberscan be transferred.

p The transferred data can be edited on thenavigation system.= For details, refer to Editing the entry in“Phone Book” on this page

Registering a phone number in“Dial Favorites”You can register up to five entries into “Dial Fa-vorites” from the phone book. Registering thephone numbers that you frequently use in“Dial Favorites” will ease the dialing operation.The entries registered in “Dial Favorites” canbe operated from the shortcut menu. You can

also operate them with Voice Recognition tomake a call.


2 Touch [Dial Favorites].

3 Touch [Set] on any of [Favorite 1]— [Fa-vorite 5].

4 Touch the entry you want to register.The Phone Book Record screen appears.

5 Touch [OK].The selected entry is registered in the corre-sponding “Dial Favorites”.

Editing the entry in “Phone Book”You can edit the imported phone book data oradd new data. You can edit [Name], [Pronun-ciation], [Phone #], or [Picture]. You can alsodelete unnecessary data.p The data cannot be transferred back to the

cellular phone.

Editing data or adding new data


2 Touch [Phone Book].

3 Touch or [Add].The edit screen appears.

p To add data by entering it as desired, touch[Add].


En84

Chapter

10

4 Select the entry you want to edit.

123

4

1 NameEnter the name to be displayed in thephone book.For more details about operations, pleaseread the following page.= For details, refer to Changing a name onpage 61p Up to 40 characters can be input for the

name.2 Pronunciation

You can enter the desired pronunciation in-dependently from the name. The registeredpronunciation is used for voice recognition.For more details about operations, pleaseread the following page.= For details, refer to Changing a pronuncia-tion on page 62p Up to 40 characters can be input for the

pronunciation.p If nothing is entered in a text box, you

cannot use that item as a voice com-mand.

p Depending on which language is beingswitched to, you may not be able to usethe registered pronunciation withoutmodification.= For details, refer to Available VoiceCommands on page 159

3 Phone #Enter the phone number to be displayed inthe phone book. Touch [OK] to completethe input and return to the previous screen.p Up to 32 characters can be input for the

phone number.p The edited names and phone numbers

are reflected to the dialed number his-tory and the received call history. How-

ever, they are not reflected to the dataregistered in [Dial Favorites].

4 PictureSets the image to be displayed when a callis received.= For details, refer to Customizing the in-coming call picture for a phone book entryon this page

Customizing the incoming callpicture for a phone book entry

Be sure to read “Limitations for importing pic-tures” before creating a CD-R (-RW).= For details, refer to Limitations for importingpictures on page 94

You can customize a picture for the phonebook record. Some pictures are already storedin the hard disk drive, and you can also importJPEG format pictures, such as a picture fromyour digital camera, by using a CD-R (-RW).You can use pictures by burning them onto aCD-R (-RW) with your PC and insert that intothe navigation system.Here, a method for changing the picture is de-scribed with an example of loading a picturestored on a CD-R (-RW) onto the navigationsystem.


2 Touch [Picture], and then touch [Importfrom Disc].The list of the pictures stored in the CD-R (-RW) is displayed.On this screen, you can select the followingitem:[Back to Original]:The picture originally used when the systemwas purchased is selected.

p Touching an option other than [Importfrom Disc] allows you to select a back-ground image stored on the hard disk drive.


En 85

Chapter

10Usin

gHan

ds-free

Phoning

3 Touch a picture you want to set.

4 Touch [Yes].On this screen, you can select the followingitems:[No]:Select when you want to change to anotherpicture.Return to Step 3.

Deleting data


2 Touch [Phone Book].

3 Touch [Delete].The “Delete from Phone Book” screen ap-pears.

4 Touch the entry you want to delete.A red check mark appears next to the selectedentry. To cancel the selection, touch the entryagain.

5 Touch [Delete].

6 Touch [Yes].The data is deleted, and the current locationscreen appears.

p To cancel the deletion, touch [No].

Editing the received call ordialed number historyYou can edit the data in the dialed number his-tory or the received call history. You can editthem and the edited entries are registered inthe phone book. You can also delete the his-tory data.

Editing data


2 Touch [Dialed Numbers] or [ReceivedCalls].

3 Touch .The edit screen appears. Steps after this arethe same as for editing the phone book.= For details, refer to Editing the entry in“Phone Book” on page 84

p The phone number cannot be edited if it isalready registered in the phone book.

Deleting data


2 Touch [Dialed Numbers] or [ReceivedCalls].

3 Touch [Delete].

4 Touch [Yes].All history data is deleted, and the current lo-cation screen appears.

p To cancel the deletion, touch [No].

Notes for hands-free phoning

General notes! Connection to all cellular phones featuring

Bluetooth wireless technology is not guar-anteed.

! The line-of-sight distance between this na-vigation system and your cellular phonemust be 10 meters or less when sendingand receiving voice and data via Bluetoothtechnology. However, the transmission dis-tance may become shorter than the esti-mated distance, depending on theenvironment in use.


En86

Chapter

10

! You cannot delete a registered cellularphone. If you need to delete it, refer to “Re-turning the Navigation System to the De-fault or Factory Settings on page 187” clear[Phone Settings] , and delete it togetherwith other functions.

! With some cellular phones, the speakers ofthe system may not produce a ring sound.

! If private mode is selected on the cellularphone, hands-free phoning may not be per-formed.

About registration and connection! Cellular phone operations varies depending

on the type of your cellular phone. Refer tothe instruction manual that came with yourcellular phone for detailed instructions.

About making and receiving calls! You may hear a noise in the following situa-

tions:— When you answer the phone by using

the button on the phone.— When the person on the other end of

line hangs up the phone.! If the person on the other end of the phone

call cannot hear the conversation due to anecho, decrease the volume level for hands-free phoning. This may reduce the effectsof the echo.

! With some cellular phones, even if youpress accept button on the cellular phonewhen a call arrives, hands-free phoningmay not be performed.

! The registered name appears if the phonenumber of the received call is already regis-tered in the phone book. When one phonenumber is registered under differentnames, the name that comes first alphabe-tically is displayed.

! If the phone number of the received call isnot registered in the phone book, thephone number of the received call appears.

About received call history and dialednumber history! Calls made or editing performed only on

your cellular phone will not be reflected tothe dialed number history or phone book inthe navigation system.

! You cannot make a call to the entry of anunknown user (no phone number) in the re-ceived call history.

! If calls are made by operating your cellularphone, no history data will be recorded inthe navigation system.

About phone book transfer! With some cellular phones, it may not be

possible to transfer all items in the phonebook at one time. In this case, transferitems one at a time from your cellularphone.

! Depending on the cellular phone that isconnected to this navigation system viaBluetooth technology, this navigation sys-tem cannot display the phone book cor-rectly. (Some characters may be garbled orfirst name and last name is put in reverseorder.)

! If the phone book in the cellular phone con-tains image data, the phone book may notbe transferred correctly. (Image data can-not be transferred from the cellular phone.)

! Depending on the cellular phone, phonebook transfer may not be available.


En 87

Chapter

10Usin

gHan

ds-free

Phoning


Entering Settings Menu1 Press MENU button to display the navi-gation menu.

2 Touch [Settings] to display Settingsmenu.

3 Change the setting.= For more details about “Adjusting eachitem”, refer to Chapter 11

Setting the Volume forGuidance and PhoneThe sound volume for the navigation can beset. You can separately set the volume of theroute guidance and the beep sound.

1 Touch [Settings] in the navigationmenu, then touch [Volume].

2 Touch [+] or [-] to set their volume.On this screen, you can operate the followingitems.

[Guidance]This setting controls the guidance volume ofnavigation.When set to , guidance is output. When setto , no guidance is output.[Beep]

This setting controls the beep tone volume fornavigation.[Phone Ringtone]This setting controls the incoming ring tonevolume.[Phone Voice]This setting controls the incoming voice vo-lume.

p Phone Ringtone and Phone Voice adjust-ments are related to the cellular phone fea-turing Bluetooth technology. Noadjustment is needed when the cellularphone featuring Bluetooth technology isnot connected.

p Volume of the audio source is adjusted byVOL (a/b) button of the navigation system.


Customizing the RegionalSettingsChanging the language fornavigation guidance and menuYou can select the language to be used for thenavigation function. (Once you change thelanguage, the system restarts.)

1 Touch [Settings] in the navigationmenu, then touch [Regional Settings].

2 Touch [Language].

3 Touch the language that you want touse.Once you change the language, the system re-starts.

p Touching [Back] returns you to the previousdisplay.

Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions

En88

Chapter

11

p If you select [English with TTS], the nameof the next street you will pass is an-nounced. If you select [English withoutTTS], the name of the next street you willpass is not announced.

Setting the time differenceAdjusts the systems clock. Set the time differ-ence (+, -) from the time originally set in yournavigation system.


2 Touch [Time].

3 To set the time difference, touch [+] or[-].

Time difference

The time difference between the time origin-ally set in the navigation system (Pacific Stan-dard Time) and the current location of yourvehicle is shown. If necessary, adjust the timedifference. Touching [+] or [-] changes thetime difference display in one-hour incre-ments.The time difference can be set from -4 to +9hours.

4 If necessary, set to summer time.Daylight Saving Time (DST) is off by default.Touch [Summer Time] to change the time ifyou are in the daylight saving period. Thisturns the display below summer time [On].


Customizing the keyboard layoutYou can select the type of keyboard to be usedfor inputting characters.


2 Touch [Keyboard] to select the layoutthat you want to use.Each time you touch the key changes that set-ting.[QWERTY] (default):

[QWERTZ]:

[ABC]:

[AZERTY]:

Changing the unit between kmandmilesThis setting controls the unit of distance andspeed displayed on your navigation system.


En 89

Chapter

11Modifying

theGeneralSettings

forNavigation

Functions


2 Touch [km / mile] to change the setting.Each time you touch the key changes that set-ting.[mile] (default):Show distance in miles.[Mile&Yard]:Show distance in miles and yards.[km]:Show distance in kilometers.

Changing the virtual speed ofthe vehicleWhen calculating the expected time of arrivaland the number of hours to the destination,set the average speed for the freeway or ordin-ary roads using [+] and [-].


2 Touch [Average Speed].

3 Touch [+] or [-] to set the speed.

p The estimated time of arrival is not necessa-rily estimated based on this speed value.

Checking the SettingRelated with HardwareThe hardware status, including the driving sta-tus of a vehicle, positioning status by satellite,learning status of the 3D sensor, and cableconnection status, can be checked.

Checking the connections ofleads and installation positionsCheck that leads are properly connected be-tween the navigation system and the vehicle.Please also check whether they are connectedin the correct positions.

1 Touch [Settings] in the navigationmenu, then touch [Hardware].

2 Touch [Connection Status].The “Connection Status” screen appears.

12345678

1 Speed PulseThe Speed Pulse value detected by the navi-gation system is shown. [0] is shown whilethe vehicle is stationary.

2 GPS AntennaIndicates the connection status of the GPSantenna, the reception sensitivity, and fromhow many satellites the signal is received. Ifthe signal is received correctly, [OK] is dis-played. If reception is poor, [NOK] appears.In such case, please change the installationposition of the GPS antenna.

3 Phone Connection StatusIndicates the connection status of the Blue-tooth unit (sold separately) and the signalstrength between the Bluetooth unit andthe cellular phone. If the Bluetooth unit isconnected correctly, [OK] is displayed.[NOK] appears when the Bluetooth unit isnot connected or incorrectly connected.

4 Installation Position


En90

Chapter

11

The installation position of the navigationsystem is shown. That indicates whetherthe installation position of the navigationsystem is correct or not. If installed cor-rectly, [OK] appears. When the navigationsystem is installed at an extreme angle ex-ceeding the limitation of the installingangle, [Incorrect angle] will be displayed.When the angle of the navigation systemhas been changed, [Excessive vibration]will be displayed.

5 Parking BrakeWhen the parking brake is applied, [On] isdisplayed. When the parking brake is re-leased, [Off] is displayed.

6 Power VoltageThe power voltage (reference value) pro-vided from the vehicle battery to the naviga-tion system is shown. If the voltage goesout of the range from 11 V to 15 V, checkthat power cable connection is correct.

7 IlluminationWhen the headlights or small lamps of a ve-hicle are on, [On] is displayed. When thesmall lamps of a vehicle are off, [Off] is dis-played. (If the orange/white lead is not con-nected, [Off] appears.)

8 Back SignalWhen the gear lever is shifted to “R”, thesignal switches to [High] or [Low]. (One ofthese is displayed depending on the vehi-cle.)

Checking sensor learningstatus and driving status1 Touch [Settings] in the navigationmenu, then touch [Hardware].

2 Touch [3D Calibration Status].The 3D Calibration Status screen appears.

12

3

45

6

7

1 DistanceDriving distance is indicated.

2 Speed PulseTotal number of speed pulses is indicated.

3 Learning StatusCurrent driving mode is indicated.

4 Degree of learningSensor learning situations for distance(Distance), right turn (Right Turn), left turn(Left Turn) and 3D detection (3D) are indi-cated by the length of bars.p When tires have been changed or

chains fitted, turning on the SpeedPulse allows the system to detect thefact that the tire diameter has changed,and automatically replaces the value forcalculating distance.

p If ND-PG1 is connected, the distancecalculation value cannot be replacedautomatically.

5 SpeedThe speed detected by the navigation sys-tem is indicated. (This indication may bedifferent from the actual speed of your vehi-cle, so please do not use this instead of thespeedometer.)

6 Acceleration or deceleration/RotationalspeedAcceleration or deceleration velocity of yourvehicle is indicated. Also, rotational speedwhen your vehicle turns to left or right isshown.

7 InclinationDegree of slope of the street that you arecurrently running is indicated.


En 91

Chapter

11Modifying

theGeneralSettings

forNavigation

Functions

To clear values...

If you want to delete the learned results storedin [Distance], [Speed Pulse] or [Learning Sta-tus], touch the relevant result, then touch[Yes].p If you select [Learning Status], you can se-

lect [Reset All] or [Reset Distance Study].To clear all learning statuses, touch [ResetAll]. To clear only the Distance study, touch[Reset Distance Study].

p Touch [Reset All] for the following cases:— After changing the installation position

of the navigation system— After changing the installation angle of

the navigation system— After moving the navigation system to

another vehiclep When the distance accuracy is low, touch

[Reset Distance Study].p Touching [Reset All] returns the installa-

tion angle setting also to the default or fac-tory setting. Reconfigure the setting.

= For details, refer to Correcting the installa-tion angle on this page

p The navigation system can automaticallyuse its sensor memory based on the outerdimensions of the tires.

Correcting the installation angleYou can correct the installation angle of thenavigation system. Correcting the installationangle improves the accuracy of sensor learn-ing, even if the unit is not facing center. Selectthe orientation of the LCD panel from the left,center, and right.


2 Touch [Installation Angle Setup].

3 Check the direction the LCD panelfaces, and touch the corresponding item.

[Left]:Select this when the angle is 5° or more to theleft from the center.[Center] (default):Select this when the angle is less than 5° tothe left and right from the center.[Right]:Select this when the angle is 5° or more to theright from the center.

p If [Learning Status] in [3D CalibrationStatus] is [Simple Hybrid], the installationangle can be corrected.

Checking the device andversion information1 Touch [Settings] in the navigationmenu, then touch [Hardware].

2 Touch [Service Info Screen].

3 Check the device and version informa-tion.

Checking the hard diskinformationYou can check the volume of the hard disk,current used space and remaining space.p The hard disk space (%) means free space

of the music library. In some cases, evenwhen about 10% of free space is left, nomore music tracks may be recorded due tosystem restriction.



En92

Chapter

11

2 Touch [Hard Disk Info].

Hard disk space (%)

Registering the Home Locationand Favorite LocationYou can register one home location and onefavorite location. You can change the regis-tered information later. You might find it usefulto register your workplace or a relative’s homeas your favorite location.

1 Touch [Settings] in the navigationmenu, then touch [Defined Locations].

2 Touch [Go to].When registering your home location, touch[Home].

3 Search for a location to register.You can select a method of location search.

= For more details about “Address Search”,refer to Calculating your destination by usingAddress Search on page 28

= For more details about “Information onsearching for locations to register”, refer toChapter 6

p If you select [Map Search], move the scrollcursor to the place you want to set andtouch [OK].

4 Point the scroll cursor to the locationyou want to register and touch [OK].The location is registered, and the Edit regis-tered information screen appears.= For details, refer to Editing the entry in “Ad-dress Book” on page 60


Changing the BackgroundPicture

Be sure to read “Limitations for importing pic-tures” before creating a CD-R (-RW) and “Pre-cautions when changing the Splash Screen”.= For details, refer to Limitations for importingpictures on the next page= For details, refer to Precautions when chan-ging the Splash Screen on page 95

In the menu operation screen, you can custo-mize a picture for the background. Some pic-tures are already stored in the hard disk drive,and you can also import JPEG format pictures,such as a picture from your digital camera, byusing a CD-R (-RW). You can use pictures asbackground pictures by burning them onto aCD-R (-RW) with your PC and inserting it intothe navigation system.The following types of background picturescan be changed:! Splash Screen: The screen that appears

when the Navigation system starts up.! Navigation Background: Background pic-

ture of the navigation menu screen.! AV Background: Background picture dur-

ing the operation of audio source screen.


En 93

Chapter

11Modifying

theGeneralSettings

forNavigation

Functions

Here, a method for changing the backgroundpicture is described with an example of load-ing a picture stored on a CD-R (-RW) onto thenavigation system as the background picture.


2 Touch [Settings] in the navigationmenu, then touch [Background Picture Set-ting].The picture selected for each screen is indi-cated on the right side of [Splash Screen],[Navigation Background] and [AV Back-ground] items.

3 Touch [Splash Screen], [NavigationBackground] or [AV Background].

4 Touch [Import from Disc].

The list of the pictures stored in the CD-R (-RW) is displayed.On this screen, you can select the followingitem:[Back to Original], [Back to PIONEER Origi-nal]:The picture originally used when the systemwas purchased is selected.

p Touching an option other than [Importfrom Disc] allows you to select a back-ground image stored on the hard disk drive.

5 Touch a picture you want to set.

6 Touch [OK].

If you touch [OK], the background imagestarts changing. After a short while, the confir-mation screen appears.

p When the image has a large file size, ittakes more time to change the BackgroundPicture. Do not perform other operationsuntil the message “Updating. Please donot turn off the power.” disappears.

p If you want to change to another picture,touch [Back] to return to Step 4.

p When the picture starts to change, do notturn off the vehicle engine until the mes-sage appears to indicate that the picturehas finished changing.

Limitations for importing pictures

When you burn a CD-R (-RW), make sure thetotal data size of the CD-R (-RW) is greaterthan 100MB by storing dummy data or otherfiller information. Otherwise, the disc may notbe recognized by the built-in DVD drive.

p You cannot use a CD-R (-RW) containingMP3 files or Audio data (CD-DA part) forimporting pictures.

p When storing pictures on a CD-R (-RW),create a folder named “Pictures” in the CD-R (-RW), and store the picture files in thisfolder. (Up to 200 picture files can be usedin total, including pictures that are alreadystored in the hard disk drive and pictures inthe CD-R (-RW).)


En94

Chapter

11

p When you burn a CD-R (-RW), limit thenumber of folder hierarchy levels to eight.

p You can only use a CD-R (-RW) finalizedwith single-session for importing pictures.

p You can only use a CD-R (-RW) finalizedwith “Mode1” for importing pictures.

p Only JPEG format (“.jpg” or “.JPG”) picturescan be used. Progressive format JPEG pic-tures cannot be used.

p Using only the standard Latin characters(alphabets of both cases: A-Z, a-z) andnumbers (0-9) is recommended for the filename. If you want to use letters with diacri-tical marks (such as ä or è) for file name, fi-nalize the CD-R(-RW) with Joliet (Unicode)format.

p Pictures up to a maximum of 2 592 x 1 944pixels can be used. We cannot guaranteeproper operation for a picture bigger thanthis size.

p After changing a set image that was im-ported from a CD-R (-RW), you must usethe CD-R (-RW) where the image is re-corded to restore the previous SplashScreen.

Precautions when changing theSplash Screen

The following is the default Splash Screen forthe Navigation System.[PIONEER Original]

If an image other than the one shown above ispreviously set (such as an image from thedealer or other source) and you change theSplash Screen once, you must use the CD-R (-RW) where the image is recorded to restorethe previous Splash Screen.

Using the DemonstrationGuidanceThis is a demonstration function for shops.After a route is set, the simulation of the routeguidance to a destination is automatically dis-played. Normally, set this to [Off].

1 Touch [Settings] in the navigationmenu.

2 Touch [Demo Mode] to change the set-ting.Each time you touch the key changes that set-ting.[On]:Repeat demo drive.[Off] (default):Demo Mode is set off.

Correcting the CurrentLocationTouch the screen to adjust the current positionand direction of the vehicle displayed on themap.

1 Touch [Settings] in the navigationmenu, then touch [Modify Current Loca-tion].

2 Scroll to the position where you wantto set, then touch [OK].

3 Touch the arrow key on the screen toset the direction, then touch [OK].


En 95

Chapter

11Modifying

theGeneralSettings

forNavigation

Functions

Restoring the Default SettingResets various settings registered to the navi-gation system and restores to the default orfactory settings.

1 Touch [Settings] in the navigationmenu, then touch [Restore Factory Set-tings].

2 Touch [Yes] to clear the current setting.p Touch [No] to cancel clear the current set-

ting.= For details, refer to Returning the Naviga-tion System to the Default or Factory Set-tings on page 187


En96

Chapter

11

You can play or use the following sources withthe navigation system.! DVD-Video! CD! MP3 disc! Radio (FM)! Radio (AM)! Music Library= For more details about “music library”, referto Chapter 13This chapter describes how to use the AVsource and the basic operation of the AVsource.

Basic OperationSwitching the Audio operationscreen% Press AV button to switch Audio opera-tion screen.

1

1 Touch panel keysp Touch [Hide] to hide the touch panel

keys. If you touch the screen, the touchpanel keys are displayed again.

Selecting a sourceSelect a source on “AV Source Menu”

1 Press AV button to switch Audio opera-tion screen.

2 Touch the source icon.

Source icon

3 Touch the desired source.

p Touch [OFF] to turn the source off.p Touch [REAR SCREEN] to select the source

for “Rear display”.= For details, refer to Selecting the video for“Rear display” on page 153

Select a source by using AV buttonYou can press AV button to switch the source.


2 Press AV button to select the desiredsource.Press AV button repeatedly to switch betweenthe following sources:

Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)

En 97

Chapter

12Usin

gth

eAVSo

urce

(Built-in

DVD

Drive

andRad

io)

[CD/ROM (MP3)/DVD] (built-in DVD drive) —[LIBRARY] (Music library)— [FM] (FM tuner)— [AM] (AM tuner) — [XM] (XM tuner)—[SIRIUS] (SIRIUS tuner) — [iPod] (iPod)—[M-CD] (multi-CD)— [TV] (television) —[AV INPUT] (video input) — [AUX] (auxiliaryequipment) — [EXT 1] (external unit 1)—[EXT 2] (external unit 2)

p In the following cases, the sound sourcecannot to be used:— When a unit corresponding to each

source is not connected to the naviga-tion system.

— When no disc is set in the navigationsystem.

— When no magazine is set in the multi-CD player.

— When [AUX Input] is set to [Off].= For details, refer to Switching the aux-iliary setting on page 150

— When [AV Input] is not set to [Video].= For details, refer to Setting the videoinput on page 150

p The term “external unit” refers to futurePioneer devices that are not currentlyplanned for, or devices that allow control ofbasic functions although they are not fullycontrolled by the navigation system. Two ex-ternal units can be controlled by this navi-gation system. When two external units areconnected, the navigation system allocatesthem to external unit 1 or external unit 2.

p When [Auto ANT] mode is set to[Radio],the vehicle’s antenna can be stowed orturned off by following the instructionsbelow.— Change the source from radio (AM or

FM) to another source.— Turn the source off.— Turn off the ignition switch (ACC OFF).If [Auto ANT] mode is set to [Power], thevehicle’s antenna can be stowed or turnedoff only when the ACC is set to “OFF”.= For more details about “[Auto ANT]”,refer to Switching the auto antenna settingon page 151

About Steering Remote Control

p When using “CD-SR1” Steering RemoteControl (sold separately), the following but-tons can be used for operation:

PHONE MENU buttonSwitches to Phone menu when Bluetooth unit(sold separately) is connected.

VR ACTIVATION / OFF HOOK buttonPress to accept the call when there is an in-coming call.In other situations, press to start the voice op-eration.

VR CANCEL / ON HOOK buttonPress to reject a call when there is an incom-ing call.Press to hang up the phone during talking onthe phone.In voice operation, return to the previousscreen.

a b button:Same function as P.LIST (a/b) button.

c d button:Same function as TRK (c/d) button.

+, – button:Same function as VOL (b/a) button.

BAND button:Same function as [Band] touch panel key.

SOURCE button:Same function as AV button.


En98

Chapter

12

Viewing the audio operation screen and displaying the AudioSettings menu

Normal screen (e.g. CD)

8

76

8

Touch

2

4

1

3 5

1 Information plateDisplays the information (e.g. track title) aboutthe source being played.

2 Touch panel keysTouch to operate the source being played.

3 Detailed informationDisplays the detailed information about thesource being played.

4 AV Settings keyDisplays the AV Settingsmenu.

5 Hide keyTouch [Hide] to hide the touch panel keys anddetailed information. If you touch the screen,they are displayed again.

6 Audio Settings tabSwitches the setting items to those forAudio Settings.

7 System Settings tabSwitches the setting items to those forSystem Settings.

8 Setting Items= For details, refer to Customizing the AudioSetting related with Audio Visual on page142

Operating a Music CDYou can play a normal music CD using thebuilt-in DVD drive of the navigation unit. Thissection describes that operations.

Selecting [CD] as the source% Press OPEN CLOSE button and insert adisc you want to play to disc loading slot.The source changes and then playback willstart.

p If the disc is already set, touch the sourceicon and then touch [CD].= For details, refer to Selecting a source onpage 97

p When being read in, Checking disc is dis-played.


En 99

Chapter

12Usin

gth

eAVSo

urce

(Built-in

DVD

Drive

andRad

io)

About auto hard disk recordingThe Navigation system can record the tracksfrom a music CD into the hard disk drive. Indefault setting, the system starts recordingautomatically when an unrecorded music CDis inserted.If you want to cancel the recording, touch[Stop].

Stop

= For more details about “Setting the harddisk recording mode”, refer to Setting the CDrecording mode on page 152= For details, refer to Music Library Recordingon page 110= For details, refer to Music Library Play onpage 112p Also see at “Handling and Care of the Disc”

in the hardware manual and “Detail Infor-mation for Playable Media on page 199” formore cautions about handling each type ofmedia.

Screen configuration1 2 34 5

6

7

8

1 Source iconShows which source has been selected.

2 Disc title indicatorShows the title of the disc currently playing.(when available.)

3 Playback method indicator

Shows which playback method has been se-lected.

4 Track number indicatorShows the number of the track currently play-ing.

5 Track title indicatorShows the title of the track currently playing.(when available.)

6 Artist name indicatorShows the name of the artist currently play-ing. (when available.)

7 Play time indicatorShows the elapsed playing time of the currenttrack.

8 Track listShows tracks of the CD currently playing.

Title displayMusic recognition technology and relateddata are provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote isthe industry standard in music recognitiontechnology and related content delivery. Formore information visit www.gracenote.com.p Title information will be displayed when the

information is found in the Gracenote® Da-tabase on the built-in hard disk drive. If youinsert a CD-TEXT disc*, the system priori-tizes the title information encoded in CD-TEXT disc.*: Some discs have text information en-coded on the disc during manufacture.These discs may contain such informationas the CD title, track title, and artist’sname. These discs are called CD-TEXTdiscs.

p When multiple options for the title informa-tion are found or no title information exists,[–] is displayed.

p The title information displayed on the CDplayback screen and the recording screenis synchronized with the one edited in themusic library. Once you edit the title infor-mation in the music library, the title dis-played on each screen will changeaccordingly.= For details, refer to Editing a playlist ortracks on page 117

p Up to 32 characters can be entered. Butthe navigation system incorporates propor-tional font. Therefore, the number of thecharacters that you can display varies ac-cording to the type of character.


En100

Chapter

12

p If the built-in DVD drive does not operateproperly, an error message may be dis-played.= For details, refer to Messages for AudioFunctions on page 184

Touch panel key operationTouch panel keys

33

5 6 7

42

1

1 Select a desired track from the listTouch a desired track to play.

2 Playback and PauseTouchingf switches between “playback”and “pause”.

3 Touch: Skip the track forward or back-wardTouchingp skips to the start of the nexttrack.Touchingo once skips to the start of thecurrent track. Touching again will skip to theprevious track.Touch and hold: Fast rewind or forwardKeep touchingo orp to perform fast re-wind or forward.p You can also perform these operations

by using TRK (c/d) button.p Fast rewind is canceled when it reaches

the beginning of the first track on thedisc.

4 Stop playbackWhen you stop playback by touchingg, thattrack number on the disc is memorized, en-abling playback from that track when you playthe disc again.p To play the disc again, touch f.

5 Repeat the current trackEach touch of turns the repeat play onor off.“Track Repeat” is displayed on the playbackmethod indicator during track repeat.

p If you perform track search or fast for-ward or rewind, repeat play is automati-cally canceled.

6 Play tracks in a random orderTouching turns the random play on oroff.

7 Scan tracks of a CDTouching turns the scan play on or off.Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds ofeach track on the CD. When you find the de-sired track touch to turn scan play off.p After scanning of a CD is finished, nor-

mal playback of the tracks will beginagain.

Operating the CD-ROM(MP3 disc)You can play an MP3 disc using the built-inDVD drive of the navigation unit. This sectiondescribes those operations.


En 101

Chapter

12Usin

gth

eAVSo

urce

(Built-in

DVD

Drive

andRad

io)

Selecting [ROM] as the source% Press OPEN CLOSE button and insertthe disc that you want to play into discloading slot.The source changes and then playback willstart.

p If the disc is already set, touch the sourceicon and then touch [ROM].

= For details, refer to Selecting a source onpage 97

p While loading, Checking disc is displayed.p Also see “Handling and Care of the Disc” in

the hardware manual and “Detail Informationfor Playable Media on page 199” in this manualfor more cautions about handling eachmedia.


7

8

6


2 Playback method indicatorShows which playback method has been se-lected.

3 Folder indicatorShows the folder number and folder namecurrently playing. When an ID3 tag has beenencoded on the file, the disc title will beshown instead of the folder name.

4 Track indicatorShows the track number and file name of thetrack currently playing. When an ID3 tag hasbeen encoded on the file, the track title will beshown instead of the file name.

5 Artist name indicator

Shows the artist name currently playing onlywhen an ID3 tag has been encoded on theMP3 file.


7 Folder and track listShows contents of the folder currently playingor temporarily displayed.

8 Bit rateShows the bit rate of the file currently playing.

Touch panel key operationTouch panel keys

32 56

3

4a

1 7 8 9

1 Select tracks from the list or viewing con-tents of the foldersThe list lets you see the list of track titles orfolder names on a disc. If you touch a folderon the list, you can view its contents. If youtouch a track on the list, you can play the se-lected track.p Touching or switches to the next or

previous page in the list.p If the selected folder does not contain

any track that can be played, the tracklist is not displayed.


3 Touch: Skip forward or backwardTouchingp skips to the start of the nexttrack. Touchingo once skips to the start ofthe current track. Touching again will skip tothe previous track.Touch and hold: Fast rewind or forward


En102

Chapter

12

Keep touchingo orp to perform fast re-wind or forward.p You can also perform these operations

by using TRK (c/d) button.p Fast rewind is canceled when it reaches

the beginning of the first track on thedisc.

p In the case of MP3, there is no sound onfast rewind or forward.

4 Stop playbackWhen you stop playback by touchingg, thattrack number on the disc is memorized, en-abling playback from that track when you playthe disc again.p To play the disc again, touch f.

5 Select upper folderTouch to move to the upper folder andplay back the first track on that folder. If thefolder contain no MP3 files, the contents ofthat folder are shown.p If the current folder is the ROOT folder,

can not be used.6 Switch mode between MP3 and music CD

(CD-DA)When playing discs with MP3 files and audiodata (CD-DA) such as CD-EXTRA and MIXED-MODE CDs, both types can be played only byswitching mode between MP3 and CD-DA.Touching [Media] switches between CD-DApart and MP3 part.

7 Display text information on MP3 discText information recorded on an MP3 disc canbe displayed.The next piece of information is displayed.! Disc Title (disc title)*! Track Title (track title)*! Folder Title (folder name)! File Name (file name)! Artist Name (artist name)*! Genre (genre)*! Release Year (release year)*p The information marked with an asterisk

(*) is displayed only when an ID3 taghas been encoded on MP3 files on thedisc. If specific information of the ID3tag has not been encoded on MP3 files

on disc, the corresponding item may beblank.

8 Repeat playEach touch of changes the settings asfollows:! Track Repeat — Repeat just the current

track! Folder Repeat — Repeat the folder cur-

rently playingp If you select another track or perform

fast forward/rewind duringTrack Repeat, the repeat play is can-celed.

p If you select another folder or performfast forward/rewind duringFolder Repeat, the repeat play is can-celed. (You can perform track searchwithin that folder with Folder repeat.)

p When Folder Repeat is selected, it isnot possible to play back a subfolder ofthat folder.

9 Play tracks in random orderTouching switches between playingtracks randomly or sequentially within a se-lected repeat range.

a Scan folders and tracksTouching turns the scan play on or off.Scan play will be performed for the selectedrepeat range.p In default, the beginning of the first

track of each folder will be played forabout 10 seconds. When“Folder Repeat” is selected for repeatplay, the beginning of each track in theselected folder will play for about 10 sec-onds. When you find the desired track,touch to turn scan play off.

p After track or folder scanning is fin-ished, normal playback of the tracks willbegin again.


En 103

Chapter

12Usin

gth

eAVSo

urce

(Built-in

DVD

Drive

andRad

io)

Notes on playing MP3 discp When playing discs with MP3 files and

audio data (CD-DA) such as CD-EXTRA andMIXED-MODE CDs, both types can beplayed only by switching mode betweenMP3 and CD-DA. When playing back theCD-DA part, the operation is the same asfor normal music CDs. Likewise, when play-ing back the MP3 part, the operation is thesame as for MP3. Refer to the instructionsfor each type of media.

p If you have switched between playback ofMP3 files and audio data (CD-DA), play-back starts at the first track on the disc.

p Playback is carried out in order of file num-ber. Folders are skipped if they contain noMP3 files. (For example, if folder 01 (ROOT)contains no MP3 files, playback com-mences with folder 02.)

p When playing back files recorded as VBR(variable bit rate) files, the play time will notbe correctly displayed if fast forward or re-verse operations are used.

p If the built-in DVD drive does not operateproperly, an error message may be dis-played.= For details, refer to Messages for AudioFunctions on page 184

Operating the DVDCAUTION

For safety reasons, video images cannot beviewed while your vehicle is in motion. To viewvideo images, you must stop in a safe place andput on the parking brake before setting your route(refer to To ensure safe driving on page 22).

You can play a DVD-Video using the built-inDVD drive of the navigation system. This sec-tion describes operations for DVD-Video.

Selecting [DVD] as the source% Press OPEN CLOSE button and insert adisc you want to play to disc loading slot.The source changes and then playback willstart.

p If the disc is already set, touch the sourceicon and then touch [DVD].= For details, refer to Selecting a source onpage 97

p Also see “Handling and Care of the Disc” inthe hardware manual and “Detail Informationfor Playable Media on page 199” in this manualfor more cautions about handling DVD-Video.

Screen configuration8761

2

34 5

9


2 Sound output indicatorShows which sound output setting has beenselected.

3 Repeat range indicatorShows which repeat range has been selected.

4 Title number indicatorShows the title number currently playing.

5 Subtitle language indicatorShows what subtitle language has been se-lected.

6 Chapter number indicatorShows the chapter currently playing.

7 Audio language indicatorShows what audio language has been se-lected.

8 Viewing angle indicatorShows what viewing angle has been selected.

9 Play time indicatorShows the elapsed playing time of the currentchapter.


En104

Chapter

12

Touch panel key operationPlayback screen (page1)

7

6

1

2

2

3

4

5

Playback screen (page2)8

9

a

b

c

d

e

Menu screen

f

g

p With some discs, the icon 9 may be dis-played, meaning that the operation is notvalid.


2 Touch: Skip forward or backwardTouchingp skips to the start of the nextchapter. Touching o once skips to the startof the current chapter. Touching again willskip to the previous chapter.Touch and hold: Fast rewind or forwardKeep touchingo orp to perform fast re-wind or forward. If you keep touchingo orp for five seconds, the iconm ornchanges into or . When this hap-

pens, fast rewind/ fast forward continues evenif you releaseo orp. To resume playbackat a desired point, touch f,o orp.p You can also perform these operations

by using TRK (c/d) button.3 Stop playback4 Display the DVD menu

You can display the menu by touching [Menu]or [Top Menu] while a disc is playing. Touch-ing either of these keys again lets you startplayback from the location selected from themenu. For details, refer to the instructions pro-vided with the disc.

5 Display the DVD menu keypad6 Frame-by-frame playback (or slow-motion

playback)Touch and hold to start slow-motion playback.Touching this during playback pauses theimage and each touch forwards a frame.To return to normal playback, touchf.p With some discs, images may be un-

clear during frame-by-frame playback orslow motion playback.

p There is no sound during slow motionplayback.

p Reverse slow motion playback is notpossible.

7 Switch next page of touch panel keys8 Repeat play

Each touch of the changes the settingsas follows:! Chapter Repeat — Repeat just the cur-

rent chapter! Title Repeat — Repeat just the current

titlep If you perform chapter (title) search, fast

forward/rewind, or slow motion play-back, the repeat play range changes tooff.

9 Change the subtitle language (Multi-sub-title)Each time you touch [Subtitle], the DVDswitches between subtitle language.

a Change the viewing angle (Multi-angle)Each time you touch [Angle], the DVDswitches between viewing angles.


En 105

Chapter

12Usin

gth

eAVSo

urce

(Built-in

DVD

Drive

andRad

io)

p During playback of a scene shot frommultiple angles, the angle icon isdisplayed. Turn the angle icon displayon or off using “DVD-V Setup”menu.

= For details, refer to Setting angle icon dis-play on page 147

b Change audio language and audio sys-tems (Multi-audio)Each time you touch [Audio], the DVDswitches between audio language and audiosystem.p Only digital output of DTS audio is pos-

sible. If navigation system’s optical digi-tal outputs are not connected, DTSaudio can not be output, so select anaudio setting other than DTS.

p Display indications such as Dolby D and5.1ch indicate the audio system re-corded on the DVD. Depending on thesetting, playback may not be with thesame audio system as that indicated.

c Specify the chapter you want to play backor the time to start playback by entering anumber= For details, refer to Searching for a desiredscene, starting playback from a specified timeon this page

d Perform the operation (such as resuming)stored in the discWhen using a DVD that has a point recordedthat indicates where to return to, the DVD re-turns to the specified point and begins playback from that point.

e Switch to the previous page of touchpanel keys

f Select the DVD menu itemg Decide the item

When you select a certain video item, play-back starts from the selected item. When youselect an item with a submenu, the next menuscreen will appear.p The way to display the menu differs de-

pending on the disc. For details, refer tothe instructions provided with disc.

Searching for a desired scene,starting playback from aspecified timeYou can search for a desired scene by specify-ing a title or a chapter, and the time.p Chapter search and time search are not

possible when disc playback has beenstopped.

1 Touch [10Key Search] and then touch[Title] (title), [Chapter] (chapter), [Time](time).

2 Touch the keys to input the desirednumber.For titles, chapters

! To select 3, touch [3].! To select 10, touch [1] and [0] in order.! To select 23, touch [2] and [3] in order.

For time (time search)! To select 21 minutes 03 seconds, touch [2],

[1], [Min], and [3], [Sec] in order.! To select 71 minutes 00 seconds, touch [7],

[1], [Min] in order.p To cancel the input numbers, touch [Clear].

3 While the input number is displayed,touch [Enter].This starts playback from the selected scene.

p With discs featuring a menu, you can alsotouch [Menu] or [Top Menu] and thenmake selections from the displayed menu.

Entering the numerical commandsYou can use this function when you need toenter a numerical command during DVD play-back.

1 Touch [10Key Search] and then touch[10key Mode] (10key mode).


En106

Chapter

12

2 Touch 0 — 9 to input the desired num-ber.

3 While the input number is displayed,touch [Enter].

Operating the Radio (FM)You can listen to the radio by using the naviga-tion system. This section describes operationsfor Radio (FM).

Selecting [FM] as the source% Touch the source icon and touch [FM].= For details, refer to Selecting a source onpage 97

Screen configuration1 2 7

5

6

4 3


2 Band indicatorShows which band the radio is tuned to: FM1to FM3.

3 Preset number indicatorShows the program type of the current station(when available).

4 Frequency indicatorShows to which frequency the tuner is tuned.

5 Preset list displayShows the preset list.

6 LOCAL indicatorShows when local seek tuning is on.

7 STEREO indicatorShows that the frequency selected is beingbroadcast in stereo.

Touch panel key operation% Touch the source icon and then touch[FM] to select the radio (FM).When the source icon is not displayed, youcan display it by touching the screen.

Touch panel keys

1

2

5 3

4

1 Touch: Recall the preset stationTouch and hold: Store the broadcaststationYou can register the frequency currentlybeing received to the preset list. You can ea-sily store up to six broadcast frequenciesfor later recall with the touch of a key.p Touch to recall the preset frequency.p Up to 18 stations, 6 for each of three FM

bands can be stored in memory.2 Touch: Performmanual tuning

To perform manual tuning, touchor briefly. The frequencies move upor down one step.Touch and hold: Perform seek tuningTo perform seek tuning, keep touching

or for about one secondand release. The tuner will scan the fre-quencies until a broadcast strong enoughfor good reception is found.p You can cancel seek tuning by touching

either or briefly.p If you keep touching or

, you can skip broadcasting fre-quencies. Seek tuning starts as soon asyou release the keys.

p You can also perform these operationsby using TRK (c/d) button.

3 Tune in strong signals= For details, refer to Tuning in strong sig-nals on page 109

4 Store the strongest broadcast frequen-cies


En 107

Chapter

12Usin

gth

eAVSo

urce

(Built-in

DVD

Drive

andRad

io)

= For details, refer to Storing the strongestbroadcast frequencies on the next page

5 Select a FM bandTouch [Band] repeatedly until the desiredFM band is displayed, FM 1, FM 2 or FM 3.p This function is convenient to prepare

different preset lists for each band.

Storing the strongestbroadcast frequencies“BSM” (best stations memory) lets you auto-matically store the six strongest broadcast fre-quencies under preset tuning keys [P1] — [P6]and once stored there you can tune in to thosefrequencies with a touch of the key.

% Touch and hold [BSM].“BSM” starts. The six strongest broadcast fre-quencies will be stored under preset tuningkeys [P1]— [P6] in order of their signalstrength.

p To cancel the storage process, touch [Can-cel].

p Storing broadcast frequencies with “BSM”

may replace broadcast frequencies youhave saved using [P1]— [P6].

Tuning in strong signalsLocal seek tuning lets you tune in only thoseradio stations with sufficiently strong signalsfor good reception.

1 Touch [Local].

2 Touch [On] to turn local seek tuning on.p To turn local seek tuning off, touch [Off].

3 Touch [c] or [d] to set the sensitivity.There are four levels of sensitivity for FM.Level: 1 — 2 — 3 — 4The level “4” setting allows reception of onlythe strongest stations, while lower settings letyou receive weaker stations.

Operating the Radio (AM)You can listen to the radio by using the naviga-tion system. This section describes operationsfor Radio (AM).

Selecting [AM] as the source% Touch the source icon and touch [AM].= For details, refer to Selecting a source onpage 97


4


2 Preset number indicatorShows what preset has been selected.

3 Frequency indicatorShows to which frequency the tuner is tuned.


5 LOCAL indicatorShows when local seek tuning is on.

Touch panel key operation% Touch the source icon and then touch[AM] to select the radio (AM).When the source icon is not displayed, youcan display it by touching the screen.


En108

Chapter

12

Touch panel keys

1

2

3

4

1 Select a desired frequency from the listTouch to recall the preset frequency.p To register the frequency currently being

received to the preset list, touch andhold the preset list.

Touch and hold: Store broadcast sta-tionsYou can register the frequency currentlybeing received to the preset list. You can ea-sily store up to six broadcast frequenciesfor later recall with the touch of a key.p Touch to recall the preset frequency.p Up to 6 stations can be stored in mem-

ory.2 Touch: Performmanual tuning

To perform manual tuning, touchor briefly. The frequencies move upor down one step.Touch and hold: Perform seek tuningTo perform seek tuning, keep touching

or for about one secondand release. The tuner will scan the fre-quencies until a broadcast strong enoughfor good reception is found.p You can cancel seek tuning by touching

either or briefly.p If you keep touching or

, you can skip broadcasting fre-quencies. Seek tuning starts as soon asyou release the keys.


3 Tune in strong signals= For details, refer to Tuning in strong sig-nals on the previous page

4 Store the strongest broadcast frequen-cies= For details, refer to Storing the strongestbroadcast frequencies on this page

Storing the strongest broadcastfrequencies“BSM” (best stations memory) lets you auto-matically store the six strongest broadcast fre-quencies under preset tuning keys P1 — P6and once stored there you can tune in to thosefrequencies with the touch of a key.

% Touch and hold [BSM].“BSM” starts. The six strongest broadcast fre-quencies will be stored under preset tuningkeys P1 — P6 in order of their signal strength.


p Storing broadcast frequencies with BSMmay replace broadcast frequencies youhave saved using P1— P6.

Tuning in strong signalsLocal seek tuning lets you tune in only thoseradio stations with sufficiently strong signalsfor good reception.

1 Touch [Local].

2 Touch [On] to turn local seek tuning on.p To turn local seek tuning off, touch [Off].

3 Touch c or d to set the sensitivity.There are two levels of sensitivity for AM.Level: 1 — 2The level “2” setting allows reception of onlythe strongest stations, while lower settings letyou receive weaker stations.


En 109

Chapter

12Usin

gth

eAVSo

urce

(Built-in

DVD

Drive

andRad

io)

You can record tracks from a music CD to thehard disk in the navigation system. The musiclibrary function enables you to record musicCDs on the hard disk in the navigation systemand play them back with various methods. Touse the music library, start by recording soundsources from the CD.

Music Library RecordingWhen you play back a music CD that is not re-corded on the navigation system, the systemautomatically begins recording that CD to themusic library. This section describes cautionsand recording procedure.p The music library can record up to 200 gen-

eral music CDs worth of music data. (Thisis just an average number and varies de-pending on the size of music data con-tained in the CDs.)

Screen configuration1 2

3

4

5

6 7

89

“100%” appears to indicate that the recordinghas completed. You can touch [Stop] to switchthe screen and perform another operation.

1 Recording mode indicatorShows the current recording mode.= For details, refer to Setting the CD recordingmode on page 152

2 Recording progress indicatorShows the progress of the recording. Frac-tions show number of recorded tracks totalnumber of tracks in the CD.

3 Recording indicator

Shows the recording status. (Red) indi-cates that recording is in progress. (Blue)indicates preparing recording.


5 Track indicatorShows the number and title of the track cur-rently playing.



8 Track listShows tracks in the CD.

9 Record status of tracks: Recorded track(Red): Track being recorded(Blue): Track is not recorded yet

p Track selection operation or special play-back functions such as random play aredisabled until recording finishes. To se-lect tracks or perform special playbackfunctions, touch [Stop] to stop record-ing.

Title displayMusic recognition technology and relateddata are provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote isthe industry standard in music recognitiontechnology and related content delivery. Formore information visit www.gracenote.com.p Title information will be displayed when the

information is found in the Gracenote® Da-tabase on the built-in hard disk drive. If youinsert a CD-TEXT disc, the system priori-tized a title information encoded in CD-TEXT disc.

p When multiple options for the title informa-tion are found or no title information exists,[–] is displayed. A title may be displayed ifyou update the title information manuallyafter recording has finished.= For details, refer to Assigning anothercandidate for title information on page 122

Using the AV Source (Music Library)

En110

Chapter

13

p If no title information exists in the Grace-note® Database on the built-in hard diskdrive, the date when the track was recordedis entered automatically. If you want to dis-play the title information, enter the titlemanually after recording has finished.= For more details about “Changing thetitle of the playlist or track”, refer to Editinga playlist or tracks on page 117

p The title information displayed on the CDplayback screen and the recording screenis synchronized with the one edited in themusic library. If you edit the title informa-tion in the music library, the title displayedon each screen will change accordingly.= For details, refer to Editing a playlist ortracks on page 117

p Title information can only be edited whenone or more tracks are recorded in themusic library.

p Once you record a CD-TEXT disc, the titleinformation encoded in CD-TEXT disc isalso stored into the hard disk drive. (If youedit the title information with the Music li-brary, the edited title will be shown.)

Recording all tracks in a CDWhen you play back a CD that is not recorded,it is automatically recorded in the music li-brary (hard disk drive).p All tracks are automatically recorded

(Auto) in the default setting.= For details, refer to Setting the CD recordingmode on page 152

% Insert the CD that you want to record.Recording automatically starts.

p To cancel the recording, touch [Stop].When recording finishes, the system returnsto the normal playback screen of the CD in theblank between current track and next track.

p If the CD is scratched or damaged, no datacan be recorded on that part. In such acase, the track that falls on that part may beskipped.

Recording a CDmanuallyYou can record only your favorite tracks in theCD.

1 [REC Mode] is set to [Manual].= For details, refer to Setting the CD recordingmode on page 152

p REC Mode cannot be changed during re-cording.

2 Play back the track you want to record.

3 Touch [REC].The track being played is recorded.When recording finishes, the system returnsto the normal playback screen of the CD in theend of the track.

p To cancel the recording, touch [Stop].

Recording only the first track ofa CDYou can record only the first track of the CD.This mode is useful when you want to recordonly the first tracks from multiple CD singles(or EPs) consecutively.

1 [REC Mode] is set to [Single].= For details, refer to Setting the CD recordingmode on page 152

p REC Mode cannot be changed during re-cording.

2 Insert the CD you want to record.Recording automatically starts for the firsttrack.When recording finishes, the system returnsto the normal playback screen of the CD in theend of the track.

p To cancel the recording, touch [Stop].

Stopping CD recordingYou can stop recording while recording a CD.(Recording can resume depending on the re-cording mode.)

% Touch [Stop].When REC Mode is [Auto] or [Single]:


En 111

Chapter

13Usin

gth

eAVSo

urce

(Music

Library)

Recording is paused, and the system startsnormal CD playback. To resume recording,touch [REC]. Recording also resumes in thefollowing cases:

! When you switch to another source, andthen return to the CD source.

! When you turn off the ignition switch of thevehicle, and then restart the engine.

When REC Mode is [Manual]:Recording is stopped. Touch [REC] to recordthe track being played.

Notes on CD recordingp Operations on the navigation system may

take more time during recording than nor-mal.

p Tracks from a CD are recorded in 4 timesspeed. You can listen to that sound duringrecording.

p The data is recorded using a highly efficientcompression method, so the sound mayslightly differ from the original dependingon the sound source. Noise may be heardin some cases, but this is not an malfunc-tion.

p Recording is possible only with a CD thatcontains 44.1 kHz, 16-bit-stereo PCM digitalaudio data.

p Recording (or copying) to the music libraryis not possible from recording media (suchas CD-Rs) in which a CD or other data is di-gitally stored. This is due to the Serial CopyManagement System (SCMS) that was de-veloped to prevent second-generation or se-rial copies.

p Recording to the music library is not possi-ble from media (such as CD-Rs) in whichMP3 files are stored.

p When you are recording a CD with no trackintervals (such as a live concert CD), if theengine stops and the power turns off, thesound may break in a track when themusic data is played back.

Also see “Notes for Hard Disk Drive” for morecautions about handling hard disk drive.= For details, refer to Notes for Hard Disk Driveon page 24

Music Library PlayYou can play back or edit the tracks recordedin the hard disk drive in the source namedmusic library (LIBRARY).

Selecting [LIBRARY] as the source% Touch the source icon and touch[LIBRARY].= For details, refer to Selecting a source onpage 97

Screen configurationMusic Library (LIBRARY)1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8


2 Group name indicatorShows the group currently playing.

3 Playlist name indicatorShows the playlist currently playing.

4 Track indicatorShows the number and title of the track cur-rently playing.

5 Playback method indicatorShows which playback method has been se-lected.


7 Play time indicator


En112

Chapter

13

Shows the elapsed playing time of the currenttrack.

8 Track list and playlistShows the track list or the playlist currentlyplaying or temporary displayed.The icon on the left indicates that the itemis a “Playlist”, and the icon indicates thatthe item is a “Track”.

Title displayMusic recognition technology and relateddata are provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote isthe industry standard in music recognitiontechnology and related content delivery. Formore information visit www.gracenote.com.p If no title information exists in the Grace-

note® Database on the built-in hard diskdrive, the date when the track was recordedis entered automatically. If you want to dis-play the title information, enter the titlemanually after recording has finished.

= For details, refer to Changing the title of theplaylist or track on page 119

Relationship of groups, playlists, andtracksThe music library is organized as follows withthree levels: groups, playlists, and tracks.

There are four types of groups:! Album group ([Albums]):

Stores the recorded track data in its origi-nal order. One playlist is automatically cre-ated when a CD is recorded.

! Artist group ([Artists]):Stores playlists in which tracks are sortedby artist names.

! Genre group ([Genres]):Stores playlists in which tracks are sortedby genres.

! My Favorite group ([My Favorites]):Stores playlists registered with your favoriteselection.

! Maximum number you can register

Group PlaylistTracks for aplaylist

[Albums] 400 99

[Artists] 400 400

[Genres] 13 400

[My Favor-ites]

5 99

If you try to record one playlist more thanthe number listed above, the oldest playlistwill be deleted.

Touch panel key operationListening to a track recorded in theMusic Library

% Touch the source icon and then touch[LIBRARY].When the source icon is not displayed, youcan display it by touching the screen.

Touch panel keys

1

23

3 45

6

7

8 9

a

1 Select a desired track from the listTouch a desired track to play.p Touching or switches to the next or

previous page in the list.2 Playback and Pause

Touchingf switches between “playback”and “pause”.

3 Touch: Skip the track forward or back-wardTouchingp skips to the start of the nexttrack. Touchingo once skips to the startof the current track. Touching again willskip to the previous track.Touch and hold: fast backward or for-ward


En 113

Chapter

13Usin

gth

eAVSo

urce

(Music

Library)


4 View upper contentsTouching displays the contents of theupper playlist or group.p You cannot touch on the group se-

lection screen.= For more details about “Relationship ofgroups, playlists, and tracks”, refer toScreen configuration on page 112

5 Display group selection screenYou can search a track from categories.= For more details about “Search for a play-list”, refer to Searching a track from the play-list on this page

6 Display the details information screenDisplays the information about the track orplaylist displayed in blue on the track list.On the details information, you can deletethe track or edit the track information.= For details, refer to Editing a playlist ortracks on page 117

7 Touch and hold: Register the track inMy Mix.= For details, refer to Registering a track to“MyMix” playlist in one action on page 116

8 Repeat playEach touch of changes the repeatrange as follows:! Track Repeat— Repeat just the current

track! Playlist Repeat— Repeat just the cur-

rent playlist! No display— Repeat the currently se-

lected groupp Repeat play may stop if you perform an

operation that affects a track outside therepeating range during track repeatplay.

p If you perform random play or scan playduring track repeat play, the repeatingrange changes to Playlist Repeat.

9 Play tracks in random orderThe selected tracks in the repeated rangeare randomly played.p Random play may stop if you perform

an operation that affects a track outsidethe repeating range or perform repeat

play or scan play during track repeatplay.

p When the range of repeat play isTrack Repeat, if you perform randomplay, the repeating range changes toPlaylist Repeat.

Indicator Implication

[Random] onlyTracks of all playlists in thegroup are played in randomorder.

[Playlist Re-peat] and [Ran-dom]

Tracks in the selected play-list are played in randomorder.

a Scan playScan play will be performed for the selectedrepeat range.p When the range of repeat play is

Track Repeat, if you perform scan play,the repeating range changes toPlaylist Repeat.

p When you find the desired track, touchto turn scan play off.

p After track or playlist scanning is fin-ished, normal playback of the tracks willbegin again.


[Scan] only

The beginning of the firsttracks of each playlist in thegroup is played for about 10seconds.

[Playlist Re-peat] and[Scan]

The beginning of each trackin the selected playlist isplayed for about 10 sec-onds.

Searching a track from the playlistOnce tracks are recorded, the navigation sys-tem categorizes them in a “Group”, and sev-eral types of playlists are automaticallycreated. A playlist is a list that shows the play-back order of tracks.= For more details about “Relationship ofgroups, playlists, and tracks”, refer to Screenconfiguration on page 112


En114

Chapter

13

Searching for an albumSelect a playlist formed by an album, and playit back.

1 Touch [Search].The group selection screen appears.

2 Touch [Albums].

3 Touch the album name (“Album” play-list) you want to play back.

The first track in the selected playlist is playedback.

Searching the playlist by artistSelect a playlist formed by an artist, and play itback.


2 Touch [Artists].“Artist” playlist appears.

3 Touch the artist name (“Artist” playlist)you want to play back.


Search a playlist by genreSelect a playlist formed by a genre, and play itback.p Only the genre of a recorded track is dis-

played in a genre playlist.


2 Touch [Genres].“Genre” playlist appears.

3 Touch the genre (“Genre” playlist) youwant to play back.



En 115

Chapter

13Usin

gth

eAVSo

urce

(Music

Library)

Creating a playlist with acustomized orderYou can register your favorite tracks as a play-list, and play them back in desired order.[My Favorites] group has two types of play-lists.

“My Mix” playlist:You can register the track being played in oneaction.“My Favorite 1-4” playlist:You can register tracks from the detailedscreen information.

Registering a track to “MyMix”playlist in one actionYou can register the track being played to thefavorite playlist called “My Mix”.

% Touch and hold [Memo] while playingback the track you want to register.The track being played is registered in“My Mix” playlist.

Register tracks one by one

1 Play back the track you want to regis-ter.

2 Touch , then touch[Add to My Favorites].

3 Touch the playlist ([My Favorite 1] to[My Favorite 4] or [My Mix]) in which youwant to register the track.

4 Touch [Yes].The track is registered in the selected My Fa-vorite playlist.

Registering multiple tracks at a time

1 Play back the playlist that contains thetracks you want to register.

2 Touch to display the list of play-lists.

3 Touch , then touch[Add to My Favorites].The item displayed in blue is the selected play-list.

4 Touch the playlist ([My Favorite 1] to[My Favorite 4] or [My Mix]) in which youwant to register the tracks.

5 Touch the tracks you want to register.When you touch a track, a check mark ap-pears indicating that it is selected. To deselectit, touch the track again.Touch d to proceed to the next operation.


En116

Chapter

13

Select All:Selects all tracks in the playlist.All Off:Cancels selection of all tracks in the playlist.

6 Touch [Back].

7 Touch [Yes].The tracks are registered in the selected“My Favorite” playlist.

p Up to 99 tracks can be registered in one“My Favorite” playlist.

Editing a playlist or tracksYou can edit the tracks or playlist recorded inthe Music library.Only the playlists and tracks in [Albums]group and [My Favorites] group can be edi-ted. In [Artist] group, only the pronunciationof the artist playlist can be edited.

Switching to the edit mode

1 Touch the playlist in [Albums],[My Favorites], or [Artists].

2 Touch the track you want to edit.The item displayed in blue is the track cur-rently playing.

3 Touch .The system enters the track edit mode.

= For details, refer to Operating the track editmode on the next page

4 Touch [Back] to return the previousscreen.

5 Touch to return to the previouslevel.

The item displayed in blue is the selected play-list.

6 Touch .The system enters the playlist edit mode.

p To return to the previous screen, touch[Back].

Operating the playlist edit mode“Album” playlist:


En 117

Chapter

13Usin

gth

eAVSo

urce

(Music

Library)

All editing operations are possible. The editedcontents will be reflected to all groups in thehard disk drive.

123

4 5 6 7 8

“My Mix” playlist, “My Favorite” playlist:Only4,6, and 8 can be performed.

4 6 8

1 Enter a desired playlist title= For details, refer to Changing the title of theplaylist or track on the next page

2 Edit the pronunciation that is used as avoice command for voice recognition= For details, refer to Changing the pronuncia-tion of a playlist name or track name on thenext page

3 Enter a desired artist name= For details, refer to Renaming an artistname in the playlist or track on page 120

4 Sort playback order of the playlists= For details, refer to Sorting the playlists onpage 120

5 Delete the playlist= For details, refer to Deleting a playlist onpage 121

6 Delete the selected tracks from that play-list= For details, refer to Deleting a track from theplaylist on page 121

7 Update title information= For details, refer to Assigning another candi-date for title information on page 122

8 Add the selected tracks to “My Favorite”= For details, refer to Registering multipletracks at a time on page 116

Operating the track edit mode“Album” playlist:All items can be edited except for 5. The edi-ted contents will be reflected to all groups inthe hard disk drive.

1

2

34

6 7 8

“My Mix” playlist, “My Favorite” playlist:Only5,6, 8 can be performed.

5 6 8

1 Enter a desired track title= For details, refer to Changing the title of theplaylist or track on the next page

2 Edit the pronunciation that is used as avoice command for voice recognition= For details, refer to Changing the pronuncia-tion of a playlist name or track name on thenext page

3 Enter a desired artist name= For details, refer to Renaming an artistname in the playlist or track on page 120

4 Change genre= For details, refer to Changing the genre of atrack on page 122

5 Change the order to play back tracks


En118

Chapter

13

= For details, refer to Sorting the tracks in“MyMix” (“My Favorite”) playlist on page121

6 Delete the current track= For details, refer to Deleting the currenttrack on page 121

7 Update track title information= For details, refer to Assigning another candi-date for title information on page 122

8 Add the track to “My Favorite”= For details, refer to Register tracks one byone on page 116

Changing the title of the playlist or trackYou can change titles of playlists or tracks. Thetitles changed here are displayed on thescreen.

1 Enter the playlist edit mode or trackedit mode.= For details, refer to Switching to the editmode on page 117

2 Touch [Title].

3 Touch [Yes].The content to be changed in Step 4 can be re-flected to the voice command.[No]:Proceeds to the next step without registering itas a voice command.

4 Enter a new character string, and thentouch [OK].

p Touch [Small] to enter lowercase letters.Touch [Caps.] to enter uppercase letters.Touch to toggle the selection.

The system pronounces the character stringonce, and the pronunciation confirmationmessage appears.[No]:Completes the edit without editing the pronun-ciation.[Repeat]:You can listen to the pronunciation again.


5 Touch [Yes].The changed character string is fixed and thesystem returns to the previous screen.

Changing the pronunciation of aplaylist name or track nameYou can change the pronunciation of a playlistor track name. The pronunciation is used as acommand for voice recognition.p Only pronunciation can be edited for

“Artist” playlist.p The navigation system recognizes only the

voice recognition characters registered inthe current language. If you change the in-terface language, the voice recognitioncharacter registered before you change thelanguage will not be recognized.


2 Touch .


En 119

Chapter

13Usin

gth

eAVSo

urce

(Music

Library)

3 Enter a new character string, and thentouch [OK].The system pronounces the character once,and the pronunciation confirmation messageappears. Touch [Yes] to fix the change.[No]:Returns to the detailed information screen.[Repeat]:You can listen to the pronunciation again.


4 Touch [Yes].The changed character is fixed and the systemreturns to the previous screen.

Renaming an artist name in theplaylist or trackYou can rename the artist name in the playlistor track.


2 Touch [Artist].

3 Touch [Select from history List].[Keyboard Input]:The character input screen appears, and youcan change the artist name with the keyboard.

4 Select an artist name from the list.The artist name is changed to the one you se-lected. In the playlist edit mode, touching[Yes] changes the artist name to the one youselected.

Sorting the playlistsThe playback order of playlists in the groupcan be changed.p If there is only one playlist, the playback

order cannot be changed.

1 Enter the playlist edit mode.= For details, refer to Switching to the editmode on page 117

2 Touch [Sort Playlists].

3 Touch the playlist that you want tochange the order for.

4 Touch , , , or to determine the po-sition you want to put.

:Moves playlists by page.

:Moves playlists one by one.

5 Touch the selected playlist again.The position of that playlist is fixed.

6 Repeat Step 3 to Step 5 to change theplayback order of other playlists.

7 Touch [ESC].The new order is fixed, and the system returnsto the normal playback screen.


En120

Chapter

13

Sorting the tracks in “MyMix”(“My Favorite”) playlistThe playback order of tracks in “My Mix” play-list and “My Favorite” playlist can be chan-ged.

1 Enter the track edit mode.= For details, refer to Switching to the editmode on page 117

2 Touch [Sort Tracklists].

3 Touch the track that you want tochange.

4 Touch , , , or to determine the po-sition you want to put.

5 Touch the selected track again.The destination is fixed.

6 Repeat Step 3 to Step 5 to change theplayback order of other tracks.

7 Touch [ESC].The new order is fixed, and the system returnsto the normal playback screen.

Deleting a playlistYou can delete a playlist in [Albums] group.(You cannot delete playlists in other groups.)p If you delete a playlist in [Albums] group,

all tracks in the playlist are deleted fromthe hard disk drive. (They are deleted from[My Favorites] group at the same time.)

p If you delete the playlist, the system doesnot delete the edited title information, suchas album title, artist name, or track name.


2 Touch [Delete This Playlist].

3 Touch [Yes].The playlist is deleted.

Deleting a track from the playlistYou can delete tracks from the playlist.p If you delete a track in [Albums] group, the

track is deleted from the hard disk drive. (Itis deleted from [My Favorites] group at thesame time.)

p If you delete the track, the system does notdelete the edited title information.

p If you delete the tracks in “My Mix” playlistor “My Favorite” playlist, they are only de-leted from the playlist, and not from thehard disk drive.


2 Touch [Delete Tracks].

3 Touch the tracks you want to delete.When you touch a track, a check mark ap-pears indicating that it is selected. To deselectit, touch the track again.

Touch d to proceed to the next operation.[Select All]:Selects all tracks in the playlist.[All Off]:Cancels the selection of all tracks in the play-list.

4 Touch [Back].

5 Touch [Yes].

Deleting the current trackp If you delete the track, the track is deleted

from the hard disk drive. (It is deleted from[My Favorites] group at the same time.)

p If you delete the track, the system does notdelete the edited title information.


En 121

Chapter

13Usin

gth

eAVSo

urce

(Music

Library)

p If you delete the tracks in “My Mix” playlistor “My Favorite” playlist, they are only de-leted from the playlist, and not from thehard disk drive.


2 Touch [Delete This Track].

3 Touch [Yes].

Changing the genre of a track


2 Touch [Genres].

3 Select the desired genre from the list.

The genre is changed, and the system returnsto the previous screen.

Assigning another candidatefor title informationIf the current title information is not desiredtitle, you can search for another title informa-tion from Gracenote® Database in the harddisk drive manually and assign another candi-date. If there were multiple options for the titleinformation, you can select one title fromthem.p Music recognition technology and related

data are provided by Gracenote®. Grace-note is the industry standard in music re-cognition technology and related contentdelivery. For more information visitwww.gracenote.com.

p Once you update the title information, theinformation you edit before will be overwrit-ten by the title information of the Grace-note® Database.

Gracenote® Database updates are available.You can download the latest update fromPioneer website by using your PC. To install theupdate, burn the data onto a CD-R(-RW) andinsert it into your navigation system. When youdownload the files and install the update, fol-low the instructions in the website.

1 Select the playlist in [Albums] group,and enter the playlist edit mode or trackedit mode.= For details, refer to Switching to the editmode on page 117

2 Touch [Update Title].Information search begins. When the title in-formation is obtained, the candidates screenappears.

3 Select the desired album title from thelist.The title information is updated to the one youselected.


En122

Chapter

13

Operating the XM SatelliteRadioYou can use the navigation system to controlan XM satellite digital tuner, which is sold se-parately.For details concerning operation, refer to theXM tuner’s operation manuals. This sectionprovides information on XM operations withthe navigation system which differs from thatdescribed in the XM tuner’s operation man-ual.

Selecting [XM] as the source% Touch the source icon and touch [XM].= For details, refer to Selecting a source onpage 97

Screen configurationGEX-P10XMT, GEX-P920XM

All CH Mode1 2 34 6

8

5

7

Category Mode9

GEX-P910XM, GEX-P900XM

1 2 3

8

5

7

About the logo for channel nameOnly the logo data that is contained in the na-vigation system can be displayed for eachchannel. The logo of a newly established chan-nel that is not contained cannot be displayed.When no logo can be displayed, the followingsubstitute icon is displayed.

Substitute icon


2 XM band indicatorShows the XM band which has been selected.

3 XM channel number indicatorShows XM channel number the tuner is cur-rently tuned to.

4 XM station name indicatorShows XM broadcast station name the tuneris currently tuned to.

5 XM channel select mode indicatorShows what channel select mode has beenselected. You can select a channel from allchannels in All CH Mode, and select a chan-nel from selected category inCategory Mode.= For details, refer to Touch panel key opera-tion on the next page

6 XM channel categoryShows the category of broadcast channel.

7 XM station name logop The message “-ON THE AIR-” disap-

pears if the navigation system cannot re-ceive XM tuner reception for somereason.

Using the AV Source (XM, SIRIUS)

En 123

Chapter

14Usin

gth

eAVSo

urce

(XM,SIR

IUS)

p If you use GEX-P910XM or GEX-P900XM,the logo for channel name is not avail-able.

8 Detail informationShows the detailed information of the broad-cast channel currently being received.

9 Category iconShows the category icon for the selectedchannel.

Touch panel key operation% Touch the source icon and then touch[XM] to select the XM.When the source icon is not displayed, youcan display it by touching the screen.Touch panel keys (GEX-P10XMT, GEX-P920XM)

Page 1 (All CH Mode)

3

1

254

6

Page 1 (Category Mode)

3

b

254

6

Page 2

89a

7

Touch panel keys (GEX-P910XM or GEX-P900XM)

c

Items marked with an asterisk (*) cannot beused on GEX-P910XM or GEX-P900XM.

1 Touch: Recalling channels from the pre-setTouch to recall the preset channel.p In All CH Mode, you can also recall the

preset channel by pressing the P.LIST(a/b) button.

p In Category Mode, the screen showscategory search.

Touch and hold: Storing broadcast sta-tionsYou can register the channel currentlybeing broadcast to the preset list.p Up to 18 stations, 6 for each of three XM

bands can be stored in memory.p If you use GEX-P910XM or GEX-P900XM,

the channel number does not appear onthe touch panel key.

2 Performmanual tuningThe channels move up or down one at atime.p If you keep touching or

you can skip broadcastingchannels.

p You can also perform these operationsby using the TRK (c/d) button.

3 Switching to the list display*You can select a desired channel from thelist display.= For details, refer to Selecting a channelfrom the XM channel list display on the nextpage

4 Switching the XM channel select modeYou can switch the mode between the twomethods for selecting and listing the chan-nel.All CH Mode :


En124

Chapter

14

You can select a channel from all channelswhen you operate.Category Mode:You can select a channel within selected ca-tegory when you operate.

5 Select an XM bandTouch [Band] repeatedly until the desiredXM band is displayed, XM 1, XM 2 orXM 3. This is useful for switching the pre-set.

6 Switching the touch panel keys to nextpage

7 Memorizing the current song*The song title and artist name being broad-cast will be memorized in “My Mix”. When asong that matches the song informationmemorized in “My Mix” is broadcast, youcan tune the channel to the one that isbroadcasting that song.= For details, refer toMemorizing the songtitle and the artist name of a song on thenext page

8 Setting the notification of the memor-ized songs*You can set an alert for the songs memor-ized in “My Mix”. You can also delete thememorized song.= For details, refer to Setting the alert foreach memorized song on the next page= For details, refer to Deleting the memor-ized songs on page 127

9 Selecting an XM channel directlyYou can select an XM channel directly byentering the desired channel number.Enter the channel number, touch [Enter],and then touch [Back].p To cancel the input numbers, touch

[Clear].p This function in not available with GEX-

P900XM.a Switching the touch panel keys to pre-

vious pageb Switching the channel category

Touch [Up] or [Down] to select the desiredcategory.

c Switching the XM information

Each touch of [DISP] changes the displayon the bottom of the detail information asfollows:GEX-P900XM:Channel name— Artist name/feature —

Song/program title— Information — Chan-nel numberGEX-P910XM:Channel name— Artist name/feature —

Song/program title— Channel categoryp This function is not available with GEX-

P10XMTand GEX-P920XM.

Display the Radio IDIf you select CH: 000, the Radio ID is dis-played.

1 Touch [10Key Direct].

2 Input [000] and then touch [Enter].If you select another channel, display of theRadio ID is canceled.

p You can also display the Radio ID to select[RADIO ID] from channel category inCategory Mode.

Selecting a channel from theXM channel list displayThe list content can be switched so you cansearch for the track you want to listen to notonly by the channel name but also by the artistname or song title.p The channel list shows all channels during

All CH Mode, and the channels includedin the selected category duringCategory Mode. To switch the channelmode, touch [Mode].

1 Touch [List].XM channel list appears in the display.Each touch of [List] changes the settings asfollows:Detail information display — Ch Name List(Channel name)— Song Title List (Song title)— Artist Name List (Artist name)


En 125

Chapter

14Usin

gth

eAVSo

urce

(XM,SIR

IUS)

2 Touch the desired channel that youwant to listen to.Touch or to switch to the next page or pre-vious page.

p During Category Mode, touch [Up] or[Down] to switch to another category.

Using “MyMix” function“My Mix” function memorizes the song titleand artist name of the song currently being re-ceived. When the song that matches the mem-orized song title and artist name is beingbroadcast on a station other than the one youare listening to, you will be alerted, and youcan switch the station to listen to that song.A track itself is NOT downloaded. ONLY thesong title and the artist name are memorized.

Memorizing the song title and theartist name of a songThe song title and artist name of the song youare listening to can be memorized to “My Mix”.

% Touch and hold [Memo].The song title and artist name of current songyou are listening to are memorized, and a con-firmation message appears.

p The song title and artist name of up to 15songs can be memorized. Trying to savemore than 15 songs will overwrite old ones.

p The song title or the artist name cannot bememorized when [————————] isdisplayed on the title information.

p This function invalid for the channel 000.p There is a possibility the memorized title is

not displayed correctly.

When the memorized song is broadcastAlert message is displayed. Touch [Yes] toswitch to that station, and you can listen tothat track.p If the memorized song is not selected in

“My Mix” list or [Alert Off] is selected, nonotification will be provided even when thatsong is broadcast.

= For details, refer to Setting the alert foreach memorized song on this page= For details, refer to Switching the alertsetting on this page

p If there is slight difference between thememorized title and the title of the songbeing broadcast, no notification will be pro-vided though they are the same song.

p Alert may not be provided depending onthe situation of the navigation system.

Setting the alert for each memorizedsongYou can change the setting of the alert whenthe track is broadcast again. You can enableor disable alert for each song.

1 Touch [Memo Edit].Memorized song list (“My Mix” list) will be dis-played. If the alert setting for the song is on,the square on the right is blue. Otherwise, thesquare is inactive.

2 Touch the song title that you want toexclude from the alert target.

The square on the right turn inactive and thesong title is excluded from the alert target.

p If you touch that again, the square will turnblue and the song title is included in thealert target.

Switching the alert settingYou can enable or disable the alert for allitems at once. This function will be usefulwhen you want to turn the alert off temporarilywithout changing the condition of each mem-orized song.

1 Touch [Memo Edit].


En126

Chapter

14

2 Touch [Alert On] or [Alert Off].When the alert setting is [Alert Off],is displayed on the information plate.

Deleting the memorized songsYou can delete each one of the memorizedsongs from the song title list.


2 Touch and hold the track you want todelete.A message will appear asking you to confirmthe deletion.

p To delete all songs that are memorized,touch [Delete All].

3 Touch [Yes].

Using the direct trafficannouncement functionYou can listen to the memorized “Instant Traf-fic & Weather” channel by directly calling it upwith the T button on the navigation unit. (Onlyone station can be memorized.)p This function is not available with GEX-

P910XM and GEX-P900XM.

Memorize a “Instant Traffic &Weather” channel

1 Tune into “Instant Traffic & Weather”channel.

2 Press and hold T button for two sec-onds or more.That “Instant Traffic & Weather” channel willbe memorized.

p The channel 000 and 001 can not be mem-orized newly (although the channel 001 isthe default).

p Even if you use the SiriusConnect universaltuner together, only one station can bememorized. The station memorized after-ward will overwrite the existing one.

Calling up the memorized “InstantTraffic & Weather” channel

% Press T button.p You can call up a “Instant Traffic & Weather”

channel even from a source other than theXM source.

p To cancel the announcement, touch[TRFC Off] on the screen or press T buttonagain.

Operating the SIRIUSSatellite RadioYou can use the navigation system to control aSiriusConnect universal tuner, which is soldseparately. This section provides informationon SIRIUS operations with the navigation sys-tem which differs from that described in theSiriusConnect universal tuner’s operationmanual.p When you use the SiriusConnect universal

tuner (sold separately) with this NavigationSystem, Pioneer SIRIUS BUS INTERFACE isrequired. For details concerning operation,refer to the owner’s manual of Pioneer SIR-IUS BUS INTERFACE and SiriusConnectuniversal tuner.

p The following function is not available ifthis navigation system is connected to thePioneer SIRIUS BUS INTERFACE CD-SB10and the SiriusConnect universal tuner.— Using Instant Replay function

p The following functions are not available inSIR-PNR1.— Selecting team for game alert— Displaying game information— Using the song alert function— Using the direct traffic announcement

function


En 127

Chapter

14Usin

gth

eAVSo

urce

(XM,SIR

IUS)

Selecting [SIRIUS] as the source% Touch the source icon and touch[SIRIUS].= For details, refer to Selecting a source onpage 97Screen configuration

1 2 4 3

5


2 SIRIUS band indicatorShows the SIRIUS band which has been se-lected.

3 SIRIUS channel select mode indicatorShows what channel select mode has beenselected. You can select a channel from allchannels in All Ch Mode, and select achannel from the selected category inCategory Mode.= For details, refer to Switch the SIRIUSchannel select mode on the next page

4 SIRIUS channel number indicatorShows the SIRIUS channel number that thetuner is tuned to.

5 Detail informationShows the detail information of the broad-cast channel currently being received.

p The message “-ON THE AIR-” disappears ifthe navigation system cannot receive SIR-IUS tuner reception for some reason.

= For details, refer to Troubleshooting on page174

Touch panel key operation% Touch the source icon and then touch[SIRIUS] to select the SIRIUS.When the source icon is not displayed, youcan display it by touching the screen.Touch panel keys

Page 1 (All Ch Mode)

3

1

254

6

Page 2 (All Ch Mode)

b

8ac

9

7

Page 1 (Category Mode)

d

Items marked with an asterisk (*) cannot beused on SIR-PNR1.

1 Touch: Recalling channels from the pre-setTouch to recall the preset channel.p In All Ch Mode, you can also recall the

preset channel by pressing the P.LIST(a/b) button.

p In Category Mode, the screen displayscategory search.

Touch and hold: Storing broadcast sta-tionsYou can register the channel currentlybeing broadcast to the preset list.


En128

Chapter

14

p Up to 18 stations, 6 for each of threeSIRIUS bands can be stored in memory.

2 Performmanual tuningThe channels move up or down one at atime.p If you keep touching or

you can skip broadcastingchannels.

p You can also perform these operationsby using the TRK (c/d) button.

3 Switch the SIRIUS displayEach touch of [DISP] changes the displayinformation.Channel number— Channel name—Channel category— Artist name/feature—Song/program title— Composerp Touch and hold to switch ON/OFF the in-

formation scroll.4 Switch the SIRIUS channel select

modeYou can switch the mode between the twomethods for selecting and listing the chan-nel.All Ch Mode:You can select a channel from all channelswhen you operate.Category Mode:You can select a channel within selected ca-tegory when you operate.

5 Select a SIRIUS bandTouch [Band] repeatedly until the desiredSIRIUS band is displayed, SIRIUS 1,SIRIUS 2, or SIRIUS 3. This is useful forswitching the preset.

6 Switch the touch panel keys to nextpage

7 Select team for game alert*You can register your favorite team.= For details, refer to Selecting teams forGame Alert on this page= For details, refer to Switching the GameAlert on or off on the next page

8 Display game information*You can display game information andchanges to the broadcast channel.= For details, refer to Displaying game infor-mation (Game Info) on the next page

9 Memorize the current song*The song title and artist name being broad-cast will be memorized in “My Mix”. Whenthe song that matches the song informa-tion memorized in “My Mix” is broadcast,you can tune the channel to the one that isbroadcasting that song.= For details, refer toMemorizing the songtitle and the artist name of a song on page131

a Set the notification of the memorizedsongs*You can set the alert for the songs memor-ized in “My Mix”. You can also delete thememorized song.= For details, refer to Setting the alert foreach memorized song on page 131= For details, refer to Deleting the memor-ized songs on page 131

b Select a SIRIUS channel directlyThe Channel number input screen appears.You can select a SIRIUS channel directly byentering the desired channel number.While the input number is displayed, touch[Enter], and then touch [Back].p To cancel the input numbers, touch

[Clear].c Switch the touch panel keys to previous

paged Switch the channel category

Touch [Up] or [Down] to select the desiredcategory.

Selecting teams for Game AlertThis navigation system can alert you whengames involving your favorite teams are aboutto start. To use this function you need to setthe game alert to the teams in advance.

1 Touch [Game Alert].The League/Team Setting screen appears.


En 129

Chapter

14Usin

gth

eAVSo

urce

(XM,SIR

IUS)

2 Touch [Next] or [Previous] to select theleague.

3 Touch [Next] or [Previous] to select theteam.

4 Touch [On/Off].The team displayed as [On] is the alert target.

5 Touch [Alert On].p When the selected team is excluded from

the alert target, the team is displayed as[Off]. Up to 12 teams can be selected.When you have already made 12 team se-lections, Full is displayed and additionalteam selection is not possible. In this case,first delete the team selection and then tryagain.

Switching the Game Alert on or offYou can enable or disable the alert for selecteditems. This function will be useful when toturn the alert off temporarily without changingthe setting of each selected team.

1 Touch [Game Alert].The League/Team Setting screen appears.


When a game involving team isbroadcastA message is displayed. Touch [Jump] toswitch to that station, and you can view to thatgame information. If you touch [Stay], thechannel does not switch.p Alert may not be provided depending on

the situation of the navigation system.

Displaying game information(Game Info)You can display the game information of ateam that you have set an alert for, and changeto the broadcast channel.p This function is unavailable if no team is se-

lected in the game alert function.

1 Touch [Game Info].The game name and the broadcast channelare also displayed.

2 Touch [Next] or [Previous] to view thegame score information which is regis-tered.

p The game score will be updated automati-cally.

p Touch [Tune To] to switch to the channelthat broadcasts the displayed game.

p If you have not made any team selections,Not Set is displayed.

p When games involving your favorite teamsare not currently playing, No Game is dis-played.

Using “MyMix” function“My Mix” function memorizes the song titleand artist name of the song currently being re-ceived. When the track that matches the mem-orized song title and artist name is beingbroadcast on a station other than the one youare listening to, you will be alerted, and youcan switch the station to listen to that song.p A track itself is NOT downloaded. ONLY the

song title and the artist name are memor-ized.


En130

Chapter

14

Memorizing the song title and theartist name of a songThe song title and artist name of the currentsong you are listening to can be memorized to“My Mix”.

% Touch and hold [Memo].The song title and artist name of the song youare listening to are memorized, and[Song Saved] is displayed.

p The song title and artist name of up to 10tracks can be memorized. If you try to savemore than 10 tracks [FULL] is displayed.

p You cannot memorize a song that does nothave song title and artist name information.

p There is a possibility the memorized title isnot displayed correctly.

When the memorized song is broadcastAlert message is displayed. Touch [Jump] toswitch to that station, and you can listen tothat track. If you touch [Stay], the cannel doesnot switch.p If the alert for the song is “OFF” or

[Alert Off] is selected, no notification willbe provided even when that song is broad-cast.= For details, refer to Setting the alert foreach memorized song on this page= For details, refer to Switching the alertsetting on this page

p If there is a slight difference between thememorized title and the title of the trackbeing broadcast, no notification will be pro-vided though they are the same song.

p Alert may not be provided depending onthe situation of the navigation system.

Setting the alert for each memorizedsongYou can change the setting of the alert whenthe track is broadcast again. You can enableor disable alert for each song.

1 Touch [Memo Edit].“My Mix” setting screen will be displayed.

2 Touch [Previous] and [Next] to selectthe song title that you want to excludefrom the alert target.

3 Touch [On/Off].Each touch of [On/Off] turns the alert settingfor the song “On” or “Off”.

Switching the alert settingYou can enable or disable the alert for allitems at the time. This function will be usefulwhen you want to turn the alert off temporarilywithout changing the condition of each mem-orized song.



Deleting the memorized songsYou can delete each one of the memorizedsongs.


2 Touch [Previous] or [Next] to select thesong title that you want to delete.

3 Touch [Delete This Song] when thesong you want to delete is displayed.A message will appear asking you to confirmthe deletion.

4 Touch [Yes].


En 131

Chapter

14Usin

gth

eAVSo

urce

(XM,SIR

IUS)

Using the Traffic & Weatherpreset functionYou can listen to the memorized Traffic &Weather channel by directly calling it up withthe T button on the navigation system. (Onlyone station can be memorized.)

Memorize a Traffic & Weather channel

1 Tune into the Traffic & Weather chan-nel.

2 Press and hold T button for two sec-onds or more.That Traffic & Weather channel will be memor-ized.

p Even if you use the XM satellite radio tunertogether, only one station can be memor-ized. The station memorized afterward willoverwrite the existing one.

Calling up the memorized Traffic &Weather channel

% Press T button.p You can call up a Traffic & Weather channel

even from a source other than the SIRIUSsource.

p To cancel the announcement, touch[TRFC Off] on the screen or press T buttonagain.


En132

Chapter

14

When Pioneer audio equipment is connectedto the navigation system using IP-BUS or AV-BUS, such equipment can be operated fromthe navigation system. This chapter describesthe operation of the audio source that can beused when the Pioneer audio equipment isconnected. When reading this chapter, pleasealso refer to the operation manual of the AVequipment connected to the navigation sys-tem.

Operating the Multi-CD PlayerYou can use the navigation system to control amulti-CD player, which is sold separately.p Only those functions described in this man-

ual are available for multi-CD player. (De-pending on the multi-CD player, thefunction may be invalid.)

Selecting [M-CD] as the source% Touch the source icon and touch[M-CD].= For details, refer to Selecting a source onpage 97

Screen configuration

8

1 52 3 46 7


2 Disc number indicatorShows the disc currently playing.

3 Disc title indicator*Shows the title of the disc currently playing.

4 Playback method indicator

Shows which repeat range has been selected.5 Track number indicator

Shows the track currently playing.6 Track title indicator*

Shows the title of the track currently playing.7 Play time indicator

Shows the elapsed playing time of the currenttrack.

8 Disc number displayShows the number of the disc in the multi-CDplayer.

p The titles of the items marked with an aster-isk (*) will be displayed only when the CD-TEXT disc is used. When using a normalmusic CD, they are displayed as [–].

Touch panel key operation% Touch the source icon and then touch[M-CD] to select the multi-CD player.When the source icon is not displayed, youcan display it by touching the screen.

Touch panel keys53 4

82

3

1 6 7

p When the multi-CD player has performedthe preparatory operations, Ready is dis-played.

p If the multi-CD player does not operateproperly, an error message such asError-XX may be displayed. Refer to themulti-CD player owner’s manual.

p If there are no discs in the multi-CD playermagazine, No Disc is displayed.

1 Change the disc in the magazine2 Playback and Pause

Touchingf switches between “playback”and “pause”.

Using the AV Source (M-CD, iPod®, TV)

En 133

Chapter

15Usin

gth

eAVSo

urce

(M-CD,iPo

d®,TV

)

3 Touch: Skip forward or backwardTouchingp skips to the start of the nexttrack. Touchingo once skips to the startof the current track. Touching again willskip to the previous track.Touch and hold: fast backward or for-wardKeep touchingo orp to perform fastbackward or forward.p You can also perform these operations

by using TRK (c/d) button.4 Play back the previous disc

The disc before the currently played discwill be played.

5 Play back the next discThe disc after the currently played disc willbe played.

6 Repeat playEach touch of changes the settingsas follows:Track Repeat— Repeat just the currenttrackDisc Repeat— Repeat the current discp If you select other discs during repeat

play, the repeat play range setting willbe canceled.

p If you perform track search or fast for-ward/rewind during Track Repeat, therepeat play range changes toDisc Repeat.

7 Play tracks in random orderTracks will play in a random order withinthe previously selected repeat ranges.


[Random] onlyTracks of all disc in themagazine are played inrandom order.

[Disc Repeat]and [Random]

Tracks in the selecteddisc are played in ran-dom order.

p If you perform random play during[Track Repeat], the repeat play rangechanges to [Disc Repeat].

8 Scan play

The first 10 seconds of each track of thecurrent disc (or the first track of each disc)are played.


[Scan] only

The beginning of thefirst tracks of each discis played for about 10seconds.

[Disc Repeat]and [Scan]

The beginning of eachtrack in the selecteddisc is played for about10 seconds.

p When you find the desired track (or disc)touch to turn scan play off.

p After track or disc scanning is finished,normal playback of the tracks will beginagain.

Operating the iPod®

You can control an iPod by combining thePioneer Interface adapter for iPod (sold sepa-rately) to the navigation system. For detailsconcerning operation, refer to the owner’smanual of the Interface adapter for iPod. Thissection provides information on iPod opera-tions with the navigation system that differfrom those described in the owner’s manualof Interface adapter for iPod.p When you use the iPod (sold separately)

with this Navigation System, Pioneer Inter-face adapter for iPod is required.iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-tered in the U.S. and other countries.

Selecting [iPod] as the source% Touch the source icon and touch [iPod].= For details, refer to Selecting a source onpage 97


En134

Chapter

15


67

8

9a


2 Song number indicatorShows the number of the song playing in theselected list.

3 Repeat play indicatorShows whether Repeat is selected for the cur-rent song or all songs on current list.

4 Shuffle play indicatorShows whether Shuffle play is selected forsongs of albums.

5 Album title indicatorShows the title of the album for the song.

6 Artist name indicatorShows the name of the artist of the currentsong.

7 Play time indicatorShows the elapsed playing time of the currentsong.

8 Song title indicatorShows the title of the current song.

9 Playing Song InformationShows the information and status of the cur-rent song.

a Song title, Artist name, and Album title in-dicatorWhen playing a song, Song title, Artist name,and Album title are displayed.

Touch panel key operation% Touch the source icon and then touch[iPod] to select the iPod.When the source icon is not displayed, youcan display it by touching the screen.

Touch panel keys

5 6

12

2 34


2 Touch: Skip back or forward to anothersongTouchingp skips to the start of the nextsong. Touchingo once skips to the startof the current song. Touching again willskip to the previous song.Touch and hold: fast forward or rewindp You can also perform these operation

with pressing TRK (c/d) button.3 Display the previous screen

Touch on the refine search or other screento return to the previous screen.

4 Narrow down the songs to play backYou can narrow down the choices of songsto play from five categories.= For details, refer to Browsing for a songon the next page

5 Repeat playTouch repeatedly until the desired re-peat range appears in the display.! Repeat One— Repeat just the current

song! Repeat All — Repeat all songs in the

selected list6 Shuffle play

This function shuffles songs or albums andplays them in random order.Each touch of changes the settingsas follows:! Shuffle Songs— Play back songs in

random order within the selected list


En 135

Chapter

15Usin

gth

eAVSo

urce

(M-CD,iPo

d®,TV

)

! Shuffle Albums— Select an albumrandomly, and then play back all songsin that album in order

Browsing for a songThe operations for controlling an iPod withthis navigation system are designed to beclose to iPod operation. This allows you tosearch and play songs as you would with aniPod.

1 Touch [Search].If you do nothing about 30 seconds after Steps1 to 4 are finished, the screen returns to theprevious screen.

2 Touch one of the categories in whichyou want to search for a song.

! Playlists (playlists)! Artists (artists)! Albums (albums)! Songs (songs)! Genres (genres)

The search screen is displayed.The icon on the left indicates that the itemis a “Playlist”, and the icon indicates thatthe item is a “Song”.

p If you select [Songs], proceed to step 4.p When you select [Artists], [Albums] or

[Genres], you can start a playback of allsongs in the selected list. To do this, keeptouching the list title.

3 Touch the title of the list that you wantto play.Repeat this operation until you find the de-sired song.

p To return to the previous screen touch.

4 From the song list, touch the song youwant to play.

p To go to the next page of the list, touch .p To return to the previous page of the list,

touch .

Operating the TV tuner

CAUTIONFor safety reasons, visual images cannot beviewed while your vehicle is in motion. To view vi-sual images, you must stop in a safe place andput on the parking brake before setting your route(For details, refer to To ensure safe driving on page22).

You can use the navigation system to control aTV tuner (e.g. GEX-P6400TV, GEX-P5700TV),which is sold separately. For details concern-ing operation, refer to the TV tuner’s operationmanual. This section provides information onTV operations with the navigation system thatdiffer from those described in the TV tuner’soperation manual. When you attempt to watchvisual images while driving, the warning AT-TENTION! Viewing of front seat videosource while driving is strictly prohibited.will appear on the screen.

Selecting [TV] as the source% Touch the source icon and touch [TV].= For details, refer to Selecting a source onpage 97


En136

Chapter

15


5


2 Band indicatorShows which band the TV tuner is tuned to:TV 1 or TV 2.

3 Preset number indicatorShows which preset has been selected.

4 Channel indicatorShows which channel the TV tuner is tunedto.


Touch panel key operation% Touch the source icon and then touch[TV] to select the TV tuner.When the source icon is not displayed, youcan display it by touching the screen.

Touch panel keys

41

2

3

1 Select channels from the listThe list lets you see the list of channels andselect one of them to view.p Touching or switches to the next or

previous page in the list.

p You can register your favorite channelsin the list.

= For details, refer to Storing and recallingbroadcast frequencies on this page

2 Touch: Performmanual tuningThe channels move up or down one step.Touch and hold: Perform seek tuningThe tuner will scan the channels until abroadcast strong enough for good recep-tion is found.p If you keep touching or

you can skip broadcastingchannels. Seek tuning starts as soon asyou release the keys.


3 Store the strongest broadcast stationssequentiallyTwelve channels with strong reception sen-sitivity can be registered automatically inthe preset list.= For details, refer to Storing the strongestbroadcast stations sequentially on the nextpage

4 Change bandTouching [Band] switches between “TV 1”and “TV 2”.

Storing and recalling broadcastfrequenciesIf you touch any of the preset tuning keys P1— P12, you can easily store up to 12 broadcaststations for later recall with a touch of the key.

% When you find a station that you wantto store in memory keep touching a presettuning key P1 — P12.The selected station is stored in memory. Thenext time you touch the same preset tuningkey P1 — P12 the station is recalled frommemory. To switch between P1 — P6 and P7— P12, touch or . When the touch panelkeys are not displayed, you can display themby touching the screen.

p Up to 24 stations, 12 for each of two TVbands can be stored in memory.


En 137

Chapter

15Usin

gth

eAVSo

urce

(M-CD,iPo

d®,TV

)

p You can also press the P.LIST (a/b) buttonto recall stations assigned to preset tuningkeys P1— P12.

Storing the strongest broadcaststations sequentially% Touch and hold [BSSM].BSSM starts. The 12 strongest broadcast sta-tions will be stored under preset tuning keysP1— P12 in order from the lowest channelup.


p Storing broadcast stations with [BSSM]may replace current broadcast stationsstored in preset memory.


En138

Chapter

15

Operating the AV Input source

CAUTIONFor safety reasons, visual images cannot beviewed while your vehicle is in motion. To view vi-sual images, you must stop in a safe place andput on the parking brake before setting your route(For details, refer to To ensure safe driving on page22).

Selecting [AV INPUT] as the source1 [AV Input] is set to [Video].= For details, refer to Setting the video inputon page 150

2 Touch the source icon and touch[AV INPUT].= For details, refer to Selecting a source onpage 97

Operating the External UnitThe term “external unit” refers to futurePioneer devices that are not currently plannedfor, or devices that allow control of basic func-tions although they are not fully controlled bythe navigation system. Two external units canbe controlled by this navigation system. Whentwo external units are connected, the naviga-tion system allocates them to external unit 1or external unit 2.For details concerning operation, refer to theexternal unit’s operation manual. This sectionprovides information on external unit opera-tions with the navigation system that differfrom those described in the external unit’s op-eration manual.p Operation varies depending on the external

unit connected. (In some cases, the exter-nal unit may not respond.)

Selecting [EXT 1] or [EXT 2] asthe source% Touch the source icon and touch [EXT 1]or [EXT 2].= For details, refer to Selecting a source onpage 97

Screen configuration1 3 2


2 External unit indicatorDisplays any connected external units.

3 Auto/Manual mode indicatorShows the current mode.= For details, refer to Switching the automaticand manual function on the next page

Touch panel key operation% Touch the source icon and then touch[EXT 1] or [EXT 2] to select the externalunit.When the source icon is not displayed, youcan display it by touching the screen.

Touch panel keys2

1

4

3

1 Send an a, b, c, or d commandTouch to operate the external unit.

Using the AV Source (AV, EXT, AUX)

En 139

Chapter

16Usin

gth

eAVSo

urce

(AV,EX

T,AUX)

p Operation varies depending on the exter-nal unit connected. (In some cases,some functions may not be used untilyou touch and hold the key.)

2 Send a band commandTouch to send a band command to the ex-ternal unit.p Operation varies depending on the exter-

nal unit connected. (In some cases, theexternal unit may not respond.)

3 Send a 1 key to 6 key command= For details, refer to Operate the externalunit by using 1 key— 6 key on this page

4 Operate the external unit by usingFunction 1 to Function 4 key andAuto/Manual key= For details, refer to Operate the externalunit by using Function 1 — Function 4 onthis page= For details, refer to Switching the auto-matic and manual function on this page

Operate the external unit byusing 1 key— 6 keyThe external unit can be operated by transmit-ting the operating commands set to 1 key — 6key.

1 Touch [1] — [6].

2 Touch desired key to operate the exter-nal unit.


p Operation varies depending on the externalunit connected. (In some cases, some func-tions may not be used until you touch andhold the key.)

Operate the external unit byusing Function 1— Function 4The external unit can be operated by transmit-ting the operating commands set toFunction 1 — Function 4.p The operating commands set to Function 1

— Function 4 vary depending on the exter-nal unit.

1 Touch [Function].

2 Touch [Function 1, 2, 3 or 4].

The operation command is transmitted to theexternal unit.

p Some functions may not be used until youtouch and hold the key.


Switching the automatic andmanual functionYou can turn automatic and manual functionon or off.You can switch between Auto and Manualfunctions of the external unit connected.Initially, this function is set to Auto.p Operating commands set for Auto and

Manual operations vary depending on theexternal unit connected.

1 Touch [Function].

2 Touch [Auto/Manual].Touching [Auto/Manual] switches between[Auto] and [Manual].

p Operation varies depending on the externalunit connected. (In some cases, the exter-nal unit may not respond.)



En140

Chapter

16

Operating the AUX inputsource (AUX)An IP-BUS-RCA Interconnector such as CD-RB20/CD-RB10 (sold separately) lets you con-nect your navigation system to auxiliary equip-ment featuring RCA output. For more details,refer to the IP-BUS-RCA Interconnector own-er’s manual.

Selecting [AUX] as the source1 [AUX Input] is set to [On].= For details, refer to Switching the auxiliarysetting on page 150

2 Touch the source icon and touch [AUX].= For details, refer to Selecting a source onpage 97


En 141

Chapter

16Usin

gth

eAVSo

urce

(AV,EX

T,AUX)

Various settings are available with the audiosource according to your audiovisual needs.This chapter describes the methods of chan-ging the various settings and setting the LCDpanel.

AV Setting OverviewThe audio visual setting is divided into[Audio Settings] and [System Settings].

Audio Settings screen

System Settings screen

= For more details about “[Audio Settings]”,refer to this page to page 146.= For more details about “[System Settings]”,refer to page 146 to page 152.p When Preout (the subwoofer controller set-

ting in System Settings menu) is Full, theNon Fading will be displayed instead ofSub Woofer.

= For details, refer to Setting the rear outputand subwoofer controller on page 152When selecting the FM tuner as the source,you cannot select [Source Level].

How to Operate the AudioSettings screen1 Press AV button.The Navigation screen changes to the Audiosource screen (of any source).

2 Touch [AV Settings].The AV Settings screen appears.

3 Touch the item you want to change.

4 Change Setting.

(E.g. Equalizer screen)

p Touch [ESC] to return to the selected sourcescreen currently.

p Touch [Back] to return to the AV Settingsscreen.

Customizing the AudioSettings ItemsUsing the equalizerThe equalizer lets you adjust the equalizationto match vehicle interior acoustic characteris-tics as desired.

Recalling equalizer curvesThere are six stored equalizer curves whichyou can easily recall. Here is a list of the equal-izer curves:

Equalizer curve

Super BassSuper Bass is a curve in which only low-range isboosted.

Powerful (Default)Powerful is a curve in which low-range and high-range sounds are boosted.

Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual

En142

Chapter

17

NaturalNatural is a curve in which low-range and high-rangesounds are slightly boosted.

VocalVocal is a curve in which the mid-range sounds, suchas the human vocal range, are boosted.

FlatFlat is a flat curve in which nothing is boosted.

Custom1Custom1 is an adjusted equalizer curve that you cre-ate. A separate custom curve can be created. Cus-tom1 and Custom2 are adjusted equalizer curvesthat you create. Adjustments can be made with a 3-band parametric equalizer.

Custom2Custom2 is an adjusted equalizer curve that you cre-ate. If you select this curve, the effect is reflected allaudio source.

1 Touch [Equalizer] in Audio Settingsmenu.

2 Touch desired equalizer.

p When [Flat] is selected, no supplement orcorrection is made to the sound. This isuseful to check the effect of the equalizercurves by switching alternatively between[Flat] and a set equalizer curve.

Adjusting equalizer curvesYou can adjust the currently selected equalizercurve setting as desired.! A separate Custom1 curve can be created

for each source. If you make adjustmentswhen a curve Super Bass, Powerful,Natural, Vocal, Flat, or Custom1 is se-lected, the equalizer curve settings will bememorized in Custom1.

! A Custom2 curve can be created commonto all sources. If you make adjustments

when Custom2 curve is selected, theCustom2 curve will be updated.

p The adjusted Custom1 curve is memorizedfor each of the source selected, but onecurve is shared for the following sources.! AM and FM! EXT 1 and EXT 2! AUX and AV INPUTIn the built-in DVD drive, different curvescan be memorized for a DVD-Video and aCD (CD-DA or MP3).You can adjust the center frequency, leveland the Q (curve characteristics) of eachband (Low/Mid/High).

! Band:You can select the band you want to ad-just.

! Frequency:You can select which frequency to beset as the center frequency.

! Level:You can adjust the decibel (dB) level ofthe selected band.

! Q:You can select the details of the curvecharacteristics. (The following figureshows the characteristic image.)

1 Touch [Equalizer] in Audio Settingsmenu.

2 Touch [Customize].The details setting screen appears.


En 143

Chapter

17Custom

izingthe

Audio

Settingrelated

with

Audio

Visual

3 Touch c or d to select the equalizerband to adjust.Each time you touch c or d selects equalizerbands in the following order:Low —Mid — High

4 Touch c or d to select the desired cen-ter frequency.Low: 40 — 80 — 100 — 160 (Hz)Mid: 200 — 500 — 1K— 2K (Hz)High: 3.15K— 8K — 10K — 12.5K (Hz)

5 Touch c or d to adjust the level of theequalizer band.Each time you touch c or d increases or de-creases the level of the equalization band.+12dB to –12dB is displayed as the level is in-creased or decreased.

6 Touch c or d to select the desired [Q].Touch c or d until the desired the curve char-acteristics appears in the display.Wide2— Wide1 — Narrow1— Narrow2

p To adjust other bands, repeat step 3 to step6.

Setting the simulated sound stageYou can select the desired effect from varioussimulated sound stages, such as Music Studioor Dynamic Theater. You can also adjust a lis-tener positioning effect.

Setting a stage that fits your image

1 Touch [Staging] in Audio Settingsmenu.

2 Touch desired stage setting.

p [Living Room] setting that emphasizesmid-range sound hardly has any effect nearthe maximum volume level.

p When you set staging to an option otherthan [Off], the high pass filter (HPF) settingturns [Off].

= For details, refer to Using the high pass filteron page 146

Adjusting a position effectYou can select a listener position that youwant to make as the center of sound effects.

1 Touch [Staging] in Audio Settingsmenu.

2 Touch [Position].

3 Touch desired position.

Using balance adjustmentYou can select a fader/balance setting thatprovides an ideal listening environment in alloccupied seats.

1 Touch [FAD/BAL] in Audio Settingsmenu.The FAD/BAL screen appears. When Rear SP(the subwoofer controller setting inSystem Settings menu) is Sub.W, Balancewill be displayed instead of FAD/BAL.= For details, refer to Setting the rear outputand subwoofer controller on page 152

2 Touch a or b to adjust front/rearspeaker balance.Each time you touch a or b moves the front/rear speaker balance towards the front or therear.


En144

Chapter

17

Front: 15 to Rear: 15 is displayed as the front/rear speaker balance moves from front to rear.When the rear output setting is Rear SPSub.W, you cannot adjust front/rear speakerbalance.= For details, refer to Setting the rear outputand subwoofer controller on page 152

3 Touch c or d to adjust left/right speak-er balance.Each time you touch c or d moves the left/right speaker balance towards the left or theright.Left: 9 to Right: 9 is displayed as the left/rightspeaker balance moves from left to right.

Using subwoofer outputThis navigation system is equipped with a sub-woofer output which can be turned on or off.p When the subwoofer output is on, you can

adjust the cut-off frequency, the outputlevel, and the phase of the subwoofer.

1 Touch [Sub Woofer] in Audio Settingsmenu.When Preout (the subwoofer controller set-ting in System Settings menu) is Full, youcannot select [Sub Woofer].= For details, refer to Setting the rear outputand subwoofer controller on page 152

2 Touch [On] to turn subwoofer outputon.To turn subwoofer output off, touch [Off].

3 Touch [Reverse] or [Normal] to selectthe phase of subwoofer output.

p If subwoofer output sound is not clear with[Normal], change it to [Reverse].

4 Touch c or d to select cut-off fre-quency.Each time you touch c or d selects cut-off fre-quencies in the following order:50 — 80— 125 (Hz)Only frequencies lower than those in the se-lected range are output from the subwoofer.

5 Touch [+] or [-] to adjust the outputlevel of the subwoofer.+6 to -6 is displayed as the level is increasedor decreased.

Using non fading outputWhen the non fading output setting is on, theaudio signal does not pass through navigationsystem’s low pass filter (for the subwoofer),but is output through the RCA output.

1 Touch [Non Fading] in Audio Settingsmenu.Only when Preout (the subwoofer controllersetting in System Settings menu) is Full, youcan select [Non Fading].= For details, refer to Setting the rear outputand subwoofer controller on page 152

2 Touch [On] to turn non fading outputon.To turn non fading output off, touch [Off].

3 Touch [+] or [-] to adjust the outputlevel of the non fading.+6 to -6 is displayed as the level is increasedor decreased.

Adjusting loudnessLoudness compensates for deficiencies in thelow- and high-sound ranges at low volume.

1 Touch [Loudness] in Audio Settingsmenu.

2 Touch [On] to turn loudness on.To turn loudness off, touch [Off].


En 145

Chapter

17Custom

izingthe

Audio

Settingrelated

with

Audio

Visual

3 Touch c or d to select a desired level.Each time you touch c or d selects level inthe following order:Low —Mid — High

Using the high pass filterWhen you do not want low sounds from thesubwoofer output frequency range to playfrom the front or rear speakers, turn HPF (highpass filter) on. Only frequencies higher thanthose in the selected range are output fromthe front or rear speakers.

1 Touch [HPF] in Audio Settings menu.

2 Touch [On] to turn high pass filter on.To turn high pass filter off, touch [Off].

3 Touch c or d to select cut-off fre-quency.Each time you touch c or d selects cut-off fre-quencies in the following order:50 — 80— 125 (Hz)When Preout (the subwoofer controller set-ting in System Settings menu) is Sub.W, HPFfunction is effective for front speakers only.

If you change the acoustic field after you set itonce, the high pass filter (HPF) setting turns Off.

Adjusting source levelsSource Level (source level adjustment) letsyou adjust the volume level of each source toprevent radical changes in volume whenswitching between sources.p Settings are based on the FM tuner volume

level, which remains unchanged.

1 Compare the FM tuner volume levelwith the level of the source you wish to ad-just.

2 Touch [Source Level] in Audio Settingsmenu.

3 Touch [+] or [-] to adjust the source vo-lume.+8 to -8 is displayed as the source volume isincreased or decreased.Sources are set to same source level adjust-ment volume automatically.

! CD and ROM (MP3)! XM and SIRIUS! EXT 1 and EXT 2! AUX and AV INPUT

Customizing the SystemSettings ItemsSystem Settings lets you perform system setup of different settings for navigation system.

How to view and operate theSystem Settings1 Press AV button.The Navigation screen changes to the Audiosource screen (of any source).

2 Touch [AV Settings].The AV Settings screen appears.

3 Touch [System Settings].

4 Touch the item you want to change.The setting change screen appears, or the set-ting changes by toggling it.


En146

Chapter

17

p Touch or to move to thenext or previous page.

5 Change Setting.

p Touch [ESC] to return to the selected sourcescreen.


Setting up the built-in DVD driveYou can change the preference for playing aDVD on the built-in DVD drive.You can use this menu to change audio, subti-tle, parental lock, and other DVD settings.Some changes or settings which you have sethere may be invalid depending on the featuresof the DVD disc. For details, see the disc’s in-structions.p You can enter this menu while [DVD] is se-

lected as audio source.p If you can enter this menu during DVD

playback, playback will be stopped and re-turn to the first chapter.

Setting the languageYou can set each desired language for subtitle,audio and menu. If the selected language isrecorded on the DVD, subtitles, audio, andmenu are displayed in that language.

1 Switch the audio source to [DVD].

2 Touch [DVD-V Setup] inSystem Settings menu.

3 Touch [Subtitle Language],[Audio Language] or [Menu Language].Each language menu is displayed and the cur-rently set language is selected.

4 Touch the desired language.When you select [Others], a language codeinput display is shown. Input the four digitcode of the desired language then touch[Enter].= For details, refer to Language Code Chart forDVD on page 155

p If the selected language is not recorded onthe disc, the default language specified onthe disc is output and displayed.

p You can also switch the subtitle and audiolanguage by touching [Subtitle] or [Audio]during playback.

= For more details about “Changing the subti-tle language during playback (Multi-subtitle)”,refer to Touch panel key operation on page 105= For more details about “Changing audiolanguage during playback (Multi-audio)”, referto Touch panel key operation on page 105

Setting assist subtitles on or offAssist subtitles offer explanations for the au-rally impaired. However, they are only dis-played if they are recorded on the DVD.You can turn assist subtitles on or off as de-sired.


2 Touch [Assist Subtitle].Touching [Assist Subtitle] switches between[On] and [Off].

Setting angle icon displayYou can set to display the angle icon onscenes where the angle can be switched.


2 Touch [Multi Angle].Touching [Multi Angle] switches between[On] and [Off].


En 147

Chapter

17Custom

izingthe

Audio

Settingrelated

with

Audio

Visual

Setting the aspect ratioThere are two kinds of display. A wide screendisplay has a width-to-height ratio (TV aspect)of 16:9, while a regular display has a TV aspectof 4:3. If you use a regular rear display has aTV aspect of 4:3, you can set the aspect ratiosuitable for your rear display. (We recommenduse this function only when you want to fit it torear display.)p When using a regular display, select either

Letter Box or Panscan. Selecting 16:9 mayresult in an unnatural picture.


2 Touch [TVAspect].Each touch of [TVAspect] changes the set-tings as follows:

! 16:9— Wide screen picture (16:9) is dis-played as it is (initial setting)

! Letter Box— The picture is in the shape ofa letter box with black bands at the top andbottom of the screen

! Panscan— The picture is cut short at theright and left of the screen

p When playing discs that do not have a pan-scan system, the disc is played back with[Letter Box] even if you select [Panscan]setting. Confirm whether the disc packagebears the 16 : 9 LB mark.

Setting the parental lockSome DVD-Video discs let you use parentallock to set restrictions so that children cannotwatch a violent and adult oriented scenes. Youcan set the parental lock level in steps as de-sired.p When you set a parental lock level and then

play a disc featuring parental lock, codenumber input indications may be dis-played. In this case, playback will beginwhen the correct code number is input.

Setting the code number and levelWhen you first use this function, register yourcode number. If you do not register a codenumber, parental lock will not operate.


2 Touch [Parental Level].

3 Touch [0] — [9] to input a four digitcode number.

4 While the input number is displayed,touch [Enter].The code number is registered, and you cannow set the level.

5 Touch any of [1] — [8] to select the de-sired level.The parental lock level is set.

! Level 8 — Playback of the entire disc ispossible (initial setting)

! Level 7 — Level 2— Playback of discs forchildren and non-adult oriented discs ispossible

! Level 1 — Only playback of discs for chil-dren is possible

p If you want to change the parental level,enter the registered code number.Proceed to Step 3.

p We recommend that you keep a record ofyour code number in case you forget it.

p The parental lock level is recorded on thedisc. You can confirm it by looking at thedisc package, the included literature or thedisc itself. With discs that do not feature arecorded parental lock level, you cannotuse parental lock.

p With some discs, parental lock operates toskip certain scenes only, after which normalplayback resumes. For details, refer to thedisc’s instructions.

p If you forget the registered code number,touch [Clear] 10 times on the screen in theStep 3. The registered code number is can-celed, letting you register a new one.


En148

Chapter

17

Changing the wide screen mode


% Touch [Wide Mode] in System Settingsmenu.The Wide Mode screen appears.On the Wide Mode screen, you can select thefollowing items:Full, Just, Cinema, Zoom, or NormalNormal (normal)A 4:3 picture is displayed normally, giving youno sense of disparity since its proportions arethe same as that of the normal picture.Full (full)A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the horizontal di-rection only, enabling you to enjoy a 4:3 TV pic-ture (normal picture) without any omissions.Just (just)The picture is enlarged slightly at the centerand the amount of enlargement increases hor-izontally toward the ends of the picture, en-abling you to enjoy a 4:3 picture withoutsensing any disparity even on a wide screen.Cinema (cinema)A picture is enlarged by the same proportionas Full or Zoom in the horizontal directionand by an intermediate proportion betweenFull and Zoom in the vertical direction; idealfor a cinema-sized picture (wide screen pic-ture) where captions lie outside the frame.Zoom (zoom)A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the same propor-tion both vertically and horizontally; ideal for acinema-sized picture (wide screen picture).

p Different settings can be memorized foreach video source.

p When video is viewed in a wide screenmode that does not match its original as-pect ratio, it may appear differently.

p Remember that use of this system for com-mercial or public viewing purposes may

constitute an infringement on the author’srights protected by the Copyright Law.

p Video may appear grainy when viewed inCinema or Zoommode.

p The navigation map and the rear view cam-era picture is always Full.

Setting for rear view cameraThe following two functions are available. Therear view camera feature requires a separatelysold rear view camera (e.g. ND-BC2). (For de-tails, consult your dealer.)

Camera for backing upThe navigation system features a function thatautomatically switches to the full-screen rearcamera image installed on your vehicle. Whenthe shift lever is in the REVERSE (R) position,the screen automatically switches to full-screen rear view camera.

Camera for Rear view mode[Rear View] can be displayed at all times (e.g.when monitoring an attached trailer, etc.) as asplit screen where map information is partiallydisplayed. Please be aware that in this setting,camera image is not resized to fit, and that aportion of what is seen by the camera is notviewable.

CAUTIONPioneer recommends the use of a camera whichoutputs mirror reversed images, otherwise screenimage may appear reversed.

p Immediately confirm whether the displaychanges to a rear view camera image whenthe shift lever is moved to REVERSE (R)from another position.

p When the screen changes to full-screenrear view camera image during normaldriving, switch to the opposite setting in[Polarity].

p Initially, this function is set to [Off].

1 Touch [Camera Input] inSystem Settings menu.


En 149

Chapter

17Custom

izingthe

Audio

Settingrelated

with

Audio

Visual

2 Touch [On] to turn rear view camerasetting on.

p Unless this setting is [On], you cannotswitch to Rear Viewmode.

3 Touch [Polarity] to select an appropriatesetting for polarity.Each time you touch [Polarity] switches be-tween the following polarity:

! Battery—When the polarity of the con-nected lead is positive while the shift leveris in the REVERSE (R) position

! GND— When the polarity of the connectedlead is negative while the shift lever is inthe REVERSE (R) position

Setting the video inputYou can switch the setting according to theconnected component.p Select [Video] to watch video of a con-

nected component as AV INPUT source.

% Touch [AV Input] in System Settingsmenu.Each touch of [AV Input] changes the set-tings as follows:

! Off— No video component is connected! Video— External video component! EXT— Pioneer external unit connected

with an RCA video cablep When a Pioneer external unit is connected

with an IP-BUS cable, select [EXT]. Whenthe audio source is [EXT], the “Videoimage” of the Pioneer external unit can bedisplayed.

Switching the auxiliary settingIt is possible to use auxiliary equipment withthe navigation system as the one of sources.Activate the auxiliary setting when using aux-iliary equipment connected to the navigationsystem.

% Touch [AUX Input] in System Settingsmenu.Touching [AUX Input] switches between [On]and [Off].

= For details, refer to Selecting [AUX] as thesource on page 141

Switching the muting/attenuation timingYou can mute the audio source volume or at-tenuate the output signal. This setting is inva-lid for the mute signal has been received fromthe MUTE lead connected to the navigationunit. (Even if this setting is [Off], the naviga-tion system will mute or attenuate the audiosource volume when the signal is output viaMUTE lead.)

% Touch [Mute Set] in System Settingsmenu.Each touch of [Mute Set] changes the set-tings as follows:

! Guide/Tel/VR— The volume is muted or at-tenuated according to the following condi-tions— When the navigation outputs the gui-

dance voice.— When you use a cellular phone via Blue-

tooth technology (dialing, talking, in-coming call).

— When the voice recognition mode is ac-tivated.

! Tel/VR— The volume is muted or attenu-ated according to the following conditions— When you use a cellular phone via Blue-

tooth technology (dialing, talking, in-coming call).

— When the voice recognition mode is ac-tivated.

! Off— The volume does not changep Operation returns to normal when the cor-

respond action is ended.p The navigation voice guidance itself cannot

be attenuated or muted. If you want to mutethe navigation guidance voice temporarily,use on the navigation map screen.


En150

Chapter

17

Switching the muting/attenuation levelYou can select the muting/attenuation level of[Mute Set]. This setting is also effective for amute signal that has been received from theMUTE lead connected to the navigation unit.p This menu is not available in the following

cases:— Audio source is [OFF]— During muting/attenuation— [5.1Ch Setup] is [On]

% Touch [Mute Level] in System Settingsmenu.Each touch of [Mute Level] changes the set-tings as follows:

! All— The volume becomes 0! –20dB— The volume becomes 1/10! –10dB— The volume becomes 1/3p When you select [All], [Mute] is displayed

and no audio adjustments are possible dur-ing the sound is turned off.

p When you select [–20dB] or [–10dB], noaudio adjustments, except volume control,are possible during the sound is attenu-ated.

p Operation returns to normal when the cor-respond action is ended.

p Even when a mute signal has been receivedfrom MUTE lead connected to the naviga-tion unit, navigation voice guidance cannotbe attenuated or muted. If you want to mutethe navigation guidance voice temporarily,use on the navigation map screen.

Changing the voice output ofthe navigation guidanceYou can set the speaker to output the naviga-tion guidance and phone voice, etc.

% Touch [Guide/Tel SP] in System Settingsmenu.Each touch of [Guide/Tel SP] changes the set-tings as follows:

! Left SP— Uses only the front left speaker! Right SP— Uses only the front right speak-

er

! L+R SP— Uses both the front right and leftspeakers

Switching the auto antennasettingIf the blue lead of the navigation system isconnected to the antenna control terminal ofthe vehicle, select either of the following set-tings.! Radio — The antenna extends or turns on

only when the audio source is FM or AM.The antenna is stored or turned off whenthe source is switched to another.

! Power— The antenna extends or turns onwhen the ignition switch is turns on. Theantenna is stored or turned off when theignition switch is turned off.

% Touch [Auto ANT] in System Settingsmenu.Touching [Auto ANT] switches between[Radio] and [Power].

p Regardless of whether [Radio] or [Power]is selected, turning off the ignition switchwill cause the antenna to automatically re-tract or turn off.

Setting the clock display on thevideo imageYou can select whether to display the clock onthe video image screen without touch panelkeys, such as DVD-Video, AV INPUT, or TVtuner.

% Touch [Clock DISP] in System Settingsmenu.Touching [Clock DISP] switches between[All SCRN] and [Audio SCRN].

! All SCRN— The clock is overlaid on the“Video image”

! Audio SCRN— The clock is not overlaid onthe “Video image”


En 151

Chapter

17Custom

izingthe

Audio

Settingrelated

with

Audio

Visual

Setting the CD recording modeYou can set whether to start recording tracksautomatically when you play a CD, or to manu-ally trigger recording.

% Touch [REC Mode] in System Settingsmenu.Each touch of [REC Mode] changes the set-tings as follows:

! Auto— Records the tracks automaticallywhen a CD is played

! Manual— Lets you select the tracks youwant to record manually, and records them

! Single— Automatically records only thefirst track of the CD

Setting the rear output andsubwoofer controllerThe navigation system’s rear output can beused for full-range speaker or subwoofer con-nection. If you switch Rear SP setting toSub.W, you can connect a rear speaker leaddirectly to a subwoofer without using an auxili-ary amp.Initially, the navigation system is set for rearfullrange speaker connection. When rear out-put is connected to full-range speakers (whenRear SP setting is Full), you can connect theRCA subwoofer output (SUBWOOFER OUT-PUTor NON-FADING OUTPUT) to a subwoofer.In this case, you can select whether to use thesubwoofer controller’s (low pass filter, phase)built-in amp of the navigation system or theauxiliary amp or subwoofer.p If you change the subwoofer controller

[Rear SP] or [Preout], [Sub Woofer] or[Non Fading] in Audio Settingsmenu re-turn to the factory settings.

p Both rear speaker leads output and RCArear output are switched simultaneously inthis setting.

p Rear SP can be set only when the source is[OFF].

1 Touch [Rear SP] in System Settingsmenu.

2 Touch [Full] or [Sub.W] to switch therear output setting.

p When no subwoofer is connected to therear output, select Full. When a subwooferis connected to the rear speaker leads di-rectly, select Sub.W.

3 Touch [Preout] to switch the subwooferoutput or non fading output.

p When [Rear SP] setting is Sub.W, [Preout]is invalid.

p Even if you change this setting, there is nooutput unless you turn [Non Fading] or[Sub Woofer] in Audio Settingsmenu[On].

= For details, refer to Using non fading outputon page 145= For details, refer to Using subwoofer outputon page 145

Switching the 5.1ch settingWhen the navigation system is combined withthe multi-channel processor system (sold se-parately), you can use the multi-channelsound.Enter the following setting when combiningthe multi-channel processor system.

CAUTIONDO NOT enter this setting before you connect themulti-channel processor system. (If this setting isentered, the RCA (“SUBWOOFER OUTPUTorNON-FADING OUTPUT”) will output maximum vo-lume for the multi-channel processor system.)Pioneer is not responsible for any damage to thespeaker equipment caused by ignoring this warn-ing.

p This setting is possible only when the opti-cal cable connection box (supplied with theMulti-channel processor) is connected tothe navigation system.

1 Touch the source icon and then touch[OFF] to turn source off.When the source icon is not displayed, youcan display it by touching the screen.


En152

Chapter

17

2 Touch [5.1Ch Setup] in the System Set-tings menu.If you touch [5.1Ch Setup], it will be turned[On]. If you touch [5.1Ch Setup] again to turn[Off] the setting, [5.1Ch Setup] will disappear.If you want to turn it [On] again, you have torepeat the procedure from the Step1.

Other FunctionsSelecting the video for “Reardisplay”You can choose either to show the sameimage as the front screen or to show the se-lected source on the “Rear display”.


2 Touch the source icon and then touch[REAR SCREEN].

Each touch of [REAR SCREEN] changes thesettings as follows:

! MIRROR— The video on the front screen ofthe navigation unit is output to the “Reardisplay”

! DVD— The video and sound of the DVDsare output to the “Rear display”

! AV — The video and sound of AV INPUTare output to the “Rear display”

p WhenMIRROR is selected, the following re-strictions are applied to “Rear display”.— When the TV tuner is connected with

AV-BUS, its “Video image” cannot beoutput. (Connect the TV tuner’s rear out-put to “Rear display” directly.)

— When selecting [Rear View] in the mapdisplay, nothing is displayed.

— All sounds cannot be output for “Reardisplay”.

— There is no picture on “Rear display”while [Picture Adjust] for[Back-Camera] is carried out.

— The map screen navigation images out-put to the “Rear display” differ fromstandard NTSC format images. There-fore, their quality will be inferior to theimages that appear on the front screen.

p When DVD is selected, the following re-strictions are applied to “Rear display”.— When a CD or MP3 disc is set in the

built-in DVD drive, nothing is output.p When AV is selected, the following restric-

tions are applied to “Rear display”.— The “Video image” and sound are output

only when AV INPUT has both video andsound.

— The “Video image” and sound are outputonly when the appropriate setting on[AV Input] is [Video].

Operating the picture adjustment


You can adjust the picture for each source andrear view camera.

1 Press V button to display Picture Adjustscreen.

! Brightness— Adjusts the black intensity! Contrast— Adjusts the contrast! Color— Adjusts the color saturation


En 153

Chapter

17Custom

izingthe

Audio

Settingrelated

with

Audio

Visual

! Hue— Adjusts the tone of color (red is em-phasized or green is emphasized)

! Dimmer— Adjusts the brightness of dis-play

! [Back-Camera] — Shows the picture ad-justment display for the rear view camera

p Touching [Source] while adjusting the rearview camera image returns you to the pre-vious screen.

p The adjustments of Brightness, Contrastand Dimmer are stored separately whenyour vehicle’s headlights are off (daytime)and when your vehicle’s headlights are on(nighttime). These are switched automati-cally depending on the vehicle’s headlightsare on or off.

p You cannot adjust Color and Hue for thesource without a video and navigation mapdisplay.

p The setting contents can be memorized se-parately for the following screen and the“Video image”.— AM/FM/M-CD/iPod/AUX/XM/SIRIUS

screen— LIBRARY (Music Library) screen— Built-in DVD drive— TV image— AV INPUT and EXT 1, EXT 2— Rear view camera image— Navigation map and menu screen

p The picture adjustment may not be avail-able with some rear view cameras.

p Because of the LCD screen characteristics,you may not be able to adjust the screen atlow temperatures.

2 Touch [+] or [-] to adjust the desireditem.Each time you touch [+] or [-] increases or de-creases the level of the desired item.

3 Touch [ESC] to return to the previousscreen.

Switching the backlight on or offBy turning off the backlight of the LCD screen,you can turn off the screen display and thevoice guidance.

% Press and hold V button.The backlight turns off, and the screen turnsoff.

p Press V button once again to turn on thebacklight, and the screen is displayed.


En154

Chapter

17

Language Code Chart for DVDLanguage (code), input code Language (code), input code Language (code), input codeJapanese (ja), 1001 Guarani (gn), 0714 Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619English (en), 0514 Gujarati (gu), 0721 Quechua (qu), 1721French (fr), 0618 Hausa (ha), 0801 Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813Spanish (es), 0519 Hindi (hi), 0809 Kirundi (rn), 1814German (de), 0405 Croatian (hr), 0818 Rumanian (ro), 1815Italian (it), 0920 Hungarian (hu), 0821 Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823Chinese (zh), 2608 Armenian (hy), 0825 Sanskrit (sa), 1901Dutch (nl), 1412 Interlingua (ia), 0901 Sindhi (sd), 1904Portuguese (pt), 1620 Interlingue (ie), 0905 Sango (sg), 1907Swedish (sv), 1922 Inupiak (ik), 0911 Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908Russian (ru), 1821 Indonesian (in), 0914 Shinghalese (si), 1909Korean (ko), 1115 Icelandic (is), 0919 Slovak (sk), 1911Greek (el), 0512 Hebrew (iw), 0923 Slovenian (sl), 1912Afar (aa), 0101 Yiddish (ji), 1009 Samoan (sm), 1913Abkhazian (ab), 0102 Javanese (jw), 1023 Shona (sn), 1914Afrikaans (af), 0106 Georgian (ka), 1101 Somali (so), 1915Amharic (am), 0113 Kazakh (kk), 1111 Albanian (sq), 1917Arabic (ar), 0118 Greenlandic (kl), 1112 Serbian (sr), 1918Assamese (as), 0119 Cambodian (km), 1113 Siswati (ss), 1919Aymara (ay), 0125 Kannada (kn), 1114 Sesotho (st), 1920Azerbaijani (az), 0126 Kashmiri (ks), 1119 Sundanese (su), 1921Bashkir (ba), 0201 Kurdish (ku), 1121 Swahili (sw), 1923Belorussian (be), 0205 Kirghiz (ky), 1125 Tamil (ta), 2001Bulgarian (bg), 0207 Latin (la), 1201 Telugu (te), 2005Bihari (bh), 0208 Lingala (ln), 1214 Tajik (tg), 2007Bislama (bi), 0209 Laotian (lo), 1215 Thai (th), 2008Bengali, Bangla (bn), 0214 Lithusnian (lt), 1220 Tigrinya (ti), 2009Tibetan (bo), 0215 Latvian, Lettish (lv), 1222 Turkmen (tk), 2011Breton (br), 0218 Malagasy (mg), 1307 Tagalog (tl), 2012Catalan (ca), 0301 Maori (mi), 1309 Setswana (tn), 2014Corsican (co), 0315 Macedonian (mk), 1311 Tongan (to), 2015Czach (cs), 0319 Malayalam (ml), 1312 Turkish (tr), 2018Welsh (cy), 0325 Mongolian (mn), 1314 Tsonga (ts), 2019Danish (da), 0401 Moldavian (mo), 1315 Tatar (tt), 2020Bhutani (dz), 0426 Marathi (mr), 1318 Twi (tw), 2023Esperanto (eo), 0515 Malay (ms), 1319 Ukrainian (uk), 2111Estonian (et), 0520 Maltese (mt), 1320 Urdu (ur), 2118Basque (eu), 0521 Burmese (my), 1325 Uzbek (uz), 2126Persian (fa), 0601 Nauru (na), 1401 Vietnamese (vi), 2209Finnish (fi), 0609 Nepali (ne), 1405 Volapük (vo), 2215Fiji (fj), 0610 Norwegian (no), 1415 Wolof (wo), 2315Faroese (fo), 0615 Occitan (oc), 1503 Xhosa (xh), 2408Frisian (fy), 0625 Oromo (om), 1513 Yoruba (yo), 2515Irish (ga), 0701 Oriya (or), 1518 Zulu (zu), 2621Scottish Gaelic (gd), 0704 Panjabi (pa), 1601Galician (gl), 0712 Polish (pl), 1612


En 155

Chapter

17Custom

izingthe

Audio

Settingrelated

with

Audio

Visual

To Ensure Safe Driving

CAUTIONFor safety reasons, Voice Help menu (Voice Reco-g.Help) is not available while your vehicle is inmotion. To enable this function, you must stop ina safe place and put on the parking brake beforesetting your route.

Depending on the selected languages, thecommands that you registered before may notbe available.= For details, refer to Available Voice Com-mands on page 159

Basics of Voice OperationYour Pioneer navigation system uses the latestin voice recognition technology. You can usevoice commands to operate many of its func-tions. This chapter describes where you canuse voice commands, and also what com-mands the system accepts.

Flow of voice operationYou can start voice operation any time evenwhen the map screen is displayed or audio isoperated. (Some operations are not available.)The basic steps of voice operation are as fol-lows.

1 Touch VOICE icon to activate voice op-eration.

2 Speak a command into the microphoneafter the beep.

3 When the command is recognized, thenavigation system displays the responsemessage on the screen, and pronounces itin some cases.

4 As necessary, repeat Step 3.

5 The requested operation will be carriedout.

p The voice operation may not be operable for aminute after the navigation system has bootedup.

p If you operate using “CD-SR1” Steering Re-mote Control (sold separately), the followingbuttons can be used for operation:

VR ACTIVATION / OFF HOOK button:Same function as VOICE icon.VR CANCEL / ON HOOK button:Return to previous screen.

To start voice operation


% Touch VOICE icon.

Navigation screen

Audio screen

Operating Your Navigation Systemwith Voice

En156

Chapter

18

p Depending on the operating state of the na-vigation system, some commands dis-played in Voice Help may be unavailable.Available commands are in white and una-vailable commands are in gray.

When using voice operation for thefirst timeUntil you are familiar with this system, it is re-commended that you stop the vehicle in a safeplace and refer to the commands displayed inthe Voice Help menu (a list of the words youcan speak). When your vehicle is parked withthe parking brake on, see the Voice Helpmenu and speak voice command on thatmenu (except for some cases).

Voice Help menu

VOICE icon

! When voice command is possible! When voice command is not acceptedp When you say “Voice Help”, the navigation

system pronounces the displayed wordsthat can be vocalized.

p If no VOICE icon is displayed, check to seewhether the microphone is properly con-nected and turn the power on again.

p If there are multiple pages, the voice helpmenu can be switched by using or

on the screen. You can also switchthe page by saying “Next page” or “Pre-vious page”.

p If you say “Back” or touch [Back], thescreen returns to the previous screen.

To cancel voice operationYou can cancel voice operation features at anytime by saying “Cancel”. After you cancelvoice operation, the map is displayed.

p If no command is made in the next 6 sec-onds or the recognition fails three timessuccessively, the voice recognitionswitches to standby mode. To reactivatevoice operation, touch VOICE icon.

Tips for Voice OperationFor your voice commands to be correctly re-cognized and interpreted, ensure that condi-tions are suitable for recognition.

Reduce the volume setting on yourvehicle audio system= For details, refer to Switching the muting/at-tenuation timing on page 150

Close the vehicle windowsPlease note that wind through the vehicle win-dow or miscellaneous noise from outside thevehicle can interfere with voice operation.

Position the microphone carefullyFor optimum pick-up, the microphone shouldbe fixed at a suitable distance directly in frontof the driver.

Pause before giving a commandSpeaking too soon may cause the recognitionto fail.

Pronounce your commands carefullySpeak slowly, deliberately, and clearly.p If the registered voice command and the

default voice command is the same, the re-gistered voice command (e.g. the pronun-ciation for the entry in “Address Book” andthe playlist in Music library ) will take prior-ity. In this case, the default voice commandwill not function. To use the default voicecommand, change or delete the registeredvoice command that is identical to the de-fault voice command.


En 157

Chapter

18Operatin

gYourNavig

ationSystem

with

Voice

An Example of VoiceOperationSearch for POI in vicinityIn this example, you want to search for thenearest gas station and set it as your destina-tion.p Give the following verbal commands after

switching to the navigation screen.= For details, refer to Voice commands relatedto navigation on page 161

1 Press MAP button to display the navi-gation map screen.

2 Touch VOICE icon.A list of commands for voice operation ap-pears. After the message, the beep indicatesthat the system is ready to accept your voicecommand. Say a command after this beep.

3 Say “Destination”.

A message to prompt the next operation isgiven.

p If you say “Back” or touch [Back], thescreen returns to the previous screen.

4 Say “Vicinity Search”.Say the corresponding commands for thefunction you want to operate. Here, the selec-tion method of your destination is specified.

When you want to search the gas station near-est to the current location, say “VicinitySearch”.The message “Vicinity search. Please re-quest POI category.” appears, and the naviga-tion system pronounces that message.

5 Say “GAS Station”.The message “Vicinity search. Gas Station”appears.The map of the nearest gas station is shown.

p For categories that can be used as the voicecommands, refer to “Category list for vicinitysearch”.

= For details, refer to Category list for vicinitysearch on page 172

6 Touch VOICE icon.

7 Say “Next” or “Previous” to select thedesired facilities.

8 After confirming the location, say “SetAs Destination”.If there is no route, the system starts the routecalculation. If the route is already set, touchVOICE icon to start route calculation.


En158

Chapter

18

Search for the playlistIn this example, you want to search for a play-list and play that playlist.

1 Touch VOICE icon when the audiosource is “LIBRARY”.

2 Say “Music Search”.

3 Say the desired group.

p If the desired group is already selected, youcan skip this step.

4 Say the name of the playlist you wantto play.

p If there are multiple pages, voice help menucan be switched by using or onthe screen. You can also switch the page bysaying “Next page” or “Previous page”.

p You can also search the track in the currentplaylist by saying “Track Search”.

Available Voice CommandsThis section describes the flow and availablecommands of each voice operation.p When [Language] in [Regional Settings]

is changed to another language, the com-mands that you registered can be usedonly if the language for voice operation isthe same.

p For <City Name>, <Street Name>,<House number> shown on the followingchart, say the real name or number whichyou want to search for. For example, if thereal city name is “Long Beach” and youwant to operate “Search by address,” say“Long Beach” instead of <City Name>.

p For <POI Name> shown on the followingchart, say the real POI name that you wantto search for. For example, if the real POIname is “San Francisco International Air-port” and you want to operate “Go to <POIName>,” say “Go to San Francisco Interna-tional Airport” (or “Go to SFO”). You can vo-calize <POI Name> included in thefollowing categories only.— Railway Station, City Center, Airport,

Ferry Terminal, Airline Access, GolfCourses, Shopping Center, Parks, andRecreation Area

p For <Registered location’s pronunciation>shown on the following chart, say the regis-tered pronunciation. For example, if the re-gistered pronunciation in address book is“My office” and you want to operate“Search by entry on the address book”, say“My office”. You can hear and edit the pro-nunciation.= For details, refer to Changing a pronun-ciation on page 62

p For <Registered phone book’s pronuncia-tion> shown on the following chart, saythe registered pronunciation. For example,if the registered pronunciation in phonebook is “My friend” and you want to operate“Telephone Book”, say “My friend”. You canhear and edit the pronunciation.= For details, refer to Editing the entry in“Phone Book” on page 84

p For <Album playlist name>, <Artist play-list name>, <Track name> shown on thefollowing chart, say the name in the musiclibrary (if you edited their pronunciation,say their pronunciation). You can hear andedit the pronunciation.


En 159

Chapter

18Operatin

gYourNavig

ationSystem

with

Voice

= For details, refer to Changing the pronun-ciation of a playlist name or track name onpage 119

p For <Category Name>and <Sub CategoryName> in “Vicinity Search”, refer to “Cate-gory list for vicinity search” and say the de-sired category in that list.

p You can skip the commands with the mark(*). For example, in case search by Point ofinterest, the system can recognize the com-mand even if you say “POI” without saying“Destination”.

p If some candidates have been found, thecandidate list appears. Select the one fromthe list and proceed to next step.

p During the voice operation, location screen(A) or (B) may appear. In such a case, go to“Location screen (A) and (B)” in the latersection, and continue the voice operation.= For details, refer to Location screen (A)and (B) on page 167

p The voice operations related the telephoneare available only using hands-free phoningfeature of this system and is unavailableduring a call.= For details, refer to Using Hands-freePhoning on page 77

p Terms written in italics are voice com-mands.


En160

Chapter

18

Basic commands for voice operationThe following verbal commands can be usedboth in navigation screen and audio operationscreen.

Basic commands

Backd Return the previous screen.Canceld Cancel the voice operation.Current Location d Return the current location map screen.Voice Helpd Pronounces the display words that can be vocalized.Next Page, Previous Page d Switch the page of Voice Help Menu.

Voice commands related to navigationGive the following verbal commands afterswitching to the navigation screen.

Search by address

Destination*d Address d <City Name> d <Street Name> d<House Number> d Location Screen (A)Notes:! Select the state, province or territory manually before the voice operation.! When you say the street name, say the street type together <e.g. XXXX street, xxxx avenue, xxxx road, xxxxx boule-

vard, etc. >! Some operation may be skipped depending on the address.! If you don’t know the street name or house number, you can say “Area” so that your destination can be set to the

main point of that city or street.

Search by Points of interest

Destination*d POI d<POI Name> d Location Screen (A)

Destination*d POI d Go To <POI Name> d If the route already set, touch VOICE icon to start route calculation. Ifthere is no route, the system starts the route calculation.

Destination*d POI d Waypoint <POI name> d Touch VOICE icon to start route calculation.

Making phone call to POI

Destination*d POI d Call <POI name> d Touch VOICE icon to call that facility (Only when the phone number isregistered in the facility.)

Displaying the map of POI

Destination*d POI d Display <POI name> d Display the map of that facility’s surroundings.

Search by telephone number

Destination*d Telephone Numberd Say the telephone number you want to search.d Location Screen (A) (If mul-tiple facilities exist with the same phone number, the facilities you intend may not be displayed.)Note:You can say 10 digits telephone number only. 911 and the number other than 10 digits is not available.


En 161

Chapter

18Operatin

gYourNavig

ationSystem

with

Voice

Search by entry on the address book

Destination*d Address Book* d<Registered location’s pronunciation> d Location Screen (A)

Destination*d Go To <Registered location’s pronunciation> d If the route already set, touch VOICE icon to startroute calculation. If there is no route, the system starts the route calculation.

Destination*d Waypoint<Registered location’s pronunciation> d Touch VOICE icon to start route calculation.

Making phone call to entry on the address book

Destination*d Call <Registered location’s pronunciation> d If the registered location has telephone number data,touch VOICE icon to call the registered location.

Displaying the map of the entry on the address book

Destination*d Display <Registered location’s pronunciation> d Display the map of surroundings on that facility.

Search the facilities in vicinity

Destination*d Vicinity Search d <Category Name>, <Sub Category Name> d Location Screen (B)

Displaying the destination history

Destination*d Destination Historyd Display the Destination History screen.

Setting the route to your home

Destination*d Return Home d If the route already set, touch VOICE icon to start route calculation. (If there is noroute, the system starts the route calculation.)

Making phone call to your home

Destination*d Call Home d Touch VOICE icon to call your home (Only when the phone number is registered inyour home.)

Setting your home to waypoint

Destination*d Waypoint Home d Touch VOICE icon to start route calculation. (This function is only available ifyou have set the destination.)

Display the map of surroundings on your home

Destination*d Display Home d Display the map of surroundings on your home.

Display the map of surroundings on your destination

Destination*d Display Destination d Display the map of surroundings on your destination.

Set the map location as your destination

Scroll the navigation map or switch the scroll mode from search result screen.d Basic Operation*d Set As Desti-nation d If the route already set, touch VOICE icon to start route calculation. If there is no route, the system startsthe route calculation.


En162

Chapter

18

Set the map location as your waypoint

Scroll the navigation map or switch the scroll mode from search result screen.d Basic Operation*d Set As Way-point d Touch VOICE icon to start route calculation.

Registering the map location to the address book

Basic Operation* d Registration d The system register that point and Information edit screen appears.

Operating the navigation map scale

Map Operation* d Change Scale*d XXXX kilometer(s) Scale <25 meters Scale, 50 meters Scale, 100 meters Scale, 200meters Scale, 500 meters Scale, 1 kilometer Scale, 2 kilometers Scale, 5 kilometers Scale, 10 kilometers Scale, 20 kilo-meters Scale, 50 kilometers Scale, 100 kilometers Scale, 200 kilometers Scale, 500 kilometers Scale, 1000 kilometersScale, 2000 kilometers Scale> d Map screen will be changed to selected scale.Notes:! These commands are available only when [km / mile] setting is [km].! This function is not available in vehicle dynamics mode.

Map Operation* d Change Scale*d XXXX mile(s) Scale<0.02 miles Scale, 0.05 miles Scale, 0.1 miles Scale, 0.25miles Scale, 0.5 miles Scale, 0.75 miles Scale, 1 mile Scale, 2.5 miles Scale, 5 miles Scale, 10 miles Scale, 25 milesScale, 50 miles Scale, 100 miles Scale, 250 miles Scale, 500 miles Scale, 1000 miles Scale> dMap screen will bechanged to selected scale.Notes:! These commands are available only when [km / mile] setting is [mile].! This function is not available in vehicle dynamics mode.

Map Operation* d Change Scale*d XXXX mile(s)/yards Scale<25 yards Scale, 50 yards Scale, 100 yards Scale, 0.25miles Scale, 0.5 miles Scale, 0.75 miles Scale, 1 mile Scale, 2.5 miles Scale, 5 miles Scale, 10 miles Scale, 25 milesScale, 50 miles Scale, 100 miles Scale, 250 miles Scale, 500 miles Scale, 1000 miles Scale> dMap screen will bechanged to selected scale.Notes:! These commands are available only when [km / mile] setting is [Mile&Yard].! This function is not available in vehicle dynamics mode.

Map Operation* d Change Scale*d Zoom Out, Zoom In d Map screen will zoom out or zoom in.

Operating the view mode

Map Operation* d Change View Mode*d Map View, Driver’s View, 2D Twin Map View, 3D Twin Map View, Route View,Guide View, Rear View, Vehicle Dynamics dMap screen will be changed to selected view mode.

Operating the map orientation

Map Operation* d Heading Up, North Upd Map orientation will be changed.

Recalculating the route

Route Options* d Change Route* d Rerouting, Use Main Road, Use Fast Route, Use Short Route, Use Freeway,Avoid Freeway, Use Ferry, Avoid Ferry, Use Toll Road, Avoid Toll Roadd If the route already set, touch VOICE icon to re-calculate.


En 163

Chapter

18Operatin

gYourNavig

ationSystem

with

Voice

Checking the current route

Route Options* d Route Profile d Displaying the route profile screen.

Route Options* d Next Guidance d You can hear the information of next guidance point.

Canceling the route

Route Options* d Cancel Routed If the route is already set, touch VOICE icon to cancel the current route.

Route Options* d Cancel Waypoint d If the waypoint is already set, touch VOICE icon to cancel route until nextwaypoint.

Checking the traffic list

Traffic Information*d Traffic Events List d Displaying the traffic event list.

Traffic Information*d Traffic On Route List d Displaying the traffic event list on your route.

Traffic Information*d Traffic Flow List d Displaying the traffic flow list.

Erase the tracking

Other Operation*d Erase Tracks d Touch VOICE icon to delete the tracking.

Viewing the Emergency Info screen

Other Operation*d Emergency Information d Displaying the Emergency info screen.

Turning on or off the Overlay POI

Other Operation*d Display Overlay POI d Displaying the selected POI in Overlay POI.

Other Operation*d Hide Overlay POI d Turn off Overlay POI.

Voice commands related to hands-free phoningThe following verbal commands can be usedboth in navigation screen and audio operationscreen.

Operating the cellular phone featuring Bluetooth technology

Call*d Telephone Book d <Registered phone book’s pronunciation> d If the registered entry in phone book hastelephone number data, touch VOICE icon to call the entry.

Call*d Call Registered Point d<Registered location’s pronunciation> d If the registered location has telephonenumber data, touch VOICE icon to call the registered location.

Call*d Rediald Touch VOICE icon to redial.

Call*d Call Phone Numberd Say the number you want to call. d Touch VOICE icon to dial. (Note 1)

Call*d Received Call d Displaying the received call list.

Call*d Call Favorite Xd Touch VOICE icon to dial.


En164

Chapter

18

Call*d Call Home d Touch VOICE icon to call your home (Only when the phone number is registered in yourhome.)

Call*d Call <Registered location’s pronunciation> d If the registered location has telephone number data, touchVOICE icon to call the registered location.

(Note 1): International call with using “+” is not available in the voice operation.

Voice commands related to AVoperationThe following verbal commands can be usedboth in navigation screen and audio operationscreen.

Common AV commands

AV Operation*d Change Display* d Navigation Screen d Switching to the navigation map or menu screen.

AV Operation*d Change Display* d AV Screen d Switching to the Audio source screen.

AV Operation*d Source Offd Turning the Audio source off.

AV Operation*d Traffic Channel d Recalling the memorized traffic channel for XM or SiriusConnect universaltuner.

AV Operation*d Change Source* d CD, DVD, AM, FM, TV, MCD, AV Input, AUX, Sirius, iPod, XM, EXTERNAL1, EXTER-NAL2, Music Library d Switching to the desired audio source. (You cannot switch to an unavailable source.)

Give the following verbal commands afterswitching the correspond audio source.

Operation for Multi-CD

AV Operation*d Disc 1 to Disc 12 d Selecting the disc for playback.

Operation for FM

AV Operation*d Preset 1 to Preset 6 d Switching to that preset station directly.

AV Operation*d Change Band d Switching the band.

Operation for AM


Operation for TV



Operation for XM, SIRIUS tuner




En 165

Chapter

18Operatin

gYourNavig

ationSystem

with

Voice

AV Operation*d Category Mode d Switching to the Category mode.

AV Operation*d All Channel Mode d Switching to the All Channel mode.

AV Operation*d Memod Memorizing the title and artist information of that song to “My Mix”.

Operation for CD

AV Operation*d Change Media d Switching the CD-DA part and CD-ROM (MP3) part.

Operation for Music Library

AV Operation*d Music Search*d Album d <Album Playlist name> d Playback the selected album playlist.

AV Operation*d Music Search*d<Album Playlist name> d Playback the selected album playlist. (Note 2)

AV Operation*d Music Search*d Artist d <Artist Playlist name> d Playback the selected artist playlist.

AV Operation*d Music Search*d<Artist Playlist name> d Playback the selected artist playlist. (Note 2)

AV Operation*d Music Search*d Genred <Genre name> d Playback the selected genre playlist.

AV Operation*d Music Search*d<Genre name> d Playback the selected genre playlist. (Note 2)

AV Operation*d Music Search*dMy Favorites dMy Favorite 1, My Favorite 2, My Favorite 3, My Favorite 4, My Mixd Playback selected playlist.

AV Operation*d Music Search*dMy Favorite 1, My Favorite 2, My Favorite 3, My Favorite 4, My Mix d Playback se-lected playlist. (Note 2)

AV Operation*d Track Search d<Track name> d Playback the selected track. (Note 3)

(Note 2):This operation is available only when that group is already selected.(Note 3):This operation is available for the playlist currently playing.


En166

Chapter

18

After checking trafficinformation manuallyIf traffic congestion is found after checkingthe traffic information manually, “Do youwant to reroute?” appears on screen. In thistime, you can say voice commands to operate.Options:Yes:The route will be recalculated by touchingVOICE icon.No:The route will not be recalculated and the mapscreen of that location appears.

Location screen (A) and (B)Location screen (A)

The following commands can be vocalized:Set As DestinationIf there is no route, the system starts the routecalculation. If the route is already set, touchVOICE icon to start route calculation.Set As WaypointTouch VOICE icon to start route calculation.Display MapDisplays the map of surroundings on that lo-cation.Call hereIf the location has telephone number data,touch the VOICE icon to make a call to the lo-cation.

Location screen (B)

The following commands can be vocalized:Set As DestinationSame as above.Set As WaypointSame as above.Display MapSame as above.NextSee the next POI.PreviousSee the previous POI.


En 167

Chapter

18Operatin

gYourNavig

ationSystem

with

Voice

Other Voice CommandsThe navigation system also can recognize thewords in the following list.

Other voice commands fornavigation operation

Preferential voice command Other voice command

Back Return, Before

Cancel Escape, Skip

Current Location My Location

Voice Help Recognition Help, Help

Next Page Next, Following

Previous Page Back Page

Basic Operation Basics, Basic

Set As Destination Set, Go, Route To Destination, Begin Guidance, Start

Set As Waypoint Set Waypoint, Waypoint

Registration Register, Store

Destination Go To, Search

POI Point Of Interest, Points Of Interest, Business Listing

Address Addresses, Address Search, Search By Address

Area Surrounding, Around

Telephone Number Telephone, Phone Number

Address Book Registered Points, My Addresses, Search By Address Book

Destination History Search History, Destination List

Vicinity Search Vicinity, Search Around, Search In Vicinity

Return Home Go Home, Drive Home

Waypoint Home Waypoint To Home, Registered Home As Waypoint

Call Home Phone Home, Dial Home

Display Home Show Home

Display Destination Destination Map, Show Destination

Map Operation Map, Map Option

Zoom Out Out, Higher

Zoom In In, Lower

Change Scale Scale, Zoom

XXXX meter(s) Scale XXX meter(s)


En168

Chapter

18

XXXX kilometer(s) Scale XXXX kilometer(s)

XXXX mile(s) Scale XXXX mile(s)

XXXX yards Scale XXXX yards

Change View Mode View Mode, Change View

Map View Normal Map, Flat Map

Driver’s View Driver, 3D

2D Twin Map View 2D Twin, 2D Split

3D Twin Map View 3D Twin, 3D Split

Route View Turns, Turn View

Guide View Guide, Arrow

Rear View Rear, Back View

Vehicle Dynamics Dynamics, Meters

North Up North, Compass

Heading Up Head Up, Car Up

Route Options Change Route Options

Change Route Edit Route

Rerouting New Route, Update Route

Use Main Road Main Roads, Take Main Roads

Use Fast Route Fast Route, Fastest Route

Use Short Route Short Route, Shortest Route

Use Freeway Freeways, Highways

Use Ferry Ferry, Ferries

Use Toll Road Toll Road, Payroad

Avoid Freeway Avoid Highway, Avoid Interstate

Avoid Ferry Avoid Ferries, Skip Ferries

Avoid Toll Road Avoid Tolls, Avoid Pay

Cancel Route Delete Route, Cancel Guidance

Route Profile Profile

Cancel Waypoint Delete Waypoint, Take Away Waypoint

Next Guidance Following Guidance, Guidance After This

Traffic InformationTraffic, View Traffic Info, Display Traffic Information, Current Traffic Information, DisplayTraffic Condition

Traffic Events List Event List, Events, Traffic Events

Traffic On Route List On Route List, Route List, Traffic On Route

Traffic Flow List Flow List, Flows, Traffic Flow


En 169

Chapter

18Operatin

gYourNavig

ationSystem

with

Voice

Call Dial, Ring, Dial Out , Place A Call, Make A Call

Call Registered Point Call Address Book, Call Registered

Call Phone Number Call By Number, Call Number, Call By Phone Number, Call Using Phone Number

Telephone Book Tel Book, Phone Book

Redial Call Again, Phone Again

Call Favorite X Call X, Phone X

Received Call Received, Who Called

Other Operation Other, Others

Erase Tracks Delete Tracks, Remove Tracks

Display Overlay POI Show Overlay POI, Display POIs

Yes Ok, I Agree

No Not Ok, I Disagree

Other voice commands for AVoperation

Preferential voice command Other voice command

Navigation Screen Navigation, Navi

AV Screen AV, Audio

Change Source Next Source, Source Change

CD Change To CD, Switch To CD

DVD Change To DVD, Switch To DVD

TV Change To TV, Switch To TV

AM Change To AM, Switch To AM

FM Change To FM, Switch To FM

AV Input Video Input

MCD CD Changer

Music Library Change To Music Library, Switch To Music Library

Music Search Search My Music, Search Music

Album Search By Album, Search Album

Artist Search By Artist, Search Artist

Genre Search By Genre, Search Genre

Rock/Pop Rock, Pop

Hip-Hop/Rap Hip-Hop, Rap

Soul/Urban Soul, Urban

Track Search Search By Track


En170

Chapter

18

iPod Change To iPod, Switch To iPod

XM Change To XM, Switch To XM

Sirius Change To Sirius, Switch To Sirius


En 171

Chapter

18Operatin

gYourNavig

ationSystem

with

Voice

Category list for vicinity searchp If you say the category name (category

title), the system searches for vicinity POIsin that category without taking the chaininto consideration.

Category name:Gas Station76, ARCO, BP-AMOCO, CHEVRON, CITGO, CLARK,CONOCO, ESSO, EXXON, FINA, GETTY, GULF, MOBIL,PETROCANADA, PHILLIPS 66, SHELL, SINCLAIR, SU-NOCO, TEXACO, ULTRAMAR, Gas Station-Others

Category name:Bank & ATMB B & T, BANK OF AMERICA, BANK OF MONTREAL,BANK OF NEW YORK, BANK OF NOVA SCOTIA,CIBC BANK, CITIBANK, HSBC BANK USA, J P MOR-GAN CHASE, KEY BANK, LA SALLE BANK, LAUREN-TIAN BANK OF CANADA, MELLON BANK, NATIONALBANK OF CANADA, PNC BANK, REGIONS BANK,ROYAL BANK OF CANADA, SUN TRUST BANK, TDCANADA TRUST, UNION BANK OF CALIFORNIA, USBANK, WACHOVIA BANK, WASHINGTON MUTUAL,WELLS FARGO BANK, Bank & ATM-Others

Category name:RestaurantAmerican, Asian, Barbecue, Café & Espresso, Chi-nese, Continental, Creole-Cajun, French, Greek, In-dian, Italian, Japanese, Mexican, Pizzeria, Seafood,Steak House, Thai, Restaurant-Others

Category name:Fast Food ChainsARBY'S, AU BON PAIN, BAJA FRESH, BASKIN-ROB-BINS, BOSTON MARKET, BRAUM'S ICE CREAM &DAIRY, BURGER KING, CARL'S JR., CARVEL ICECREAM BAKERY, CHURCH'S CHICKEN, COLDSTONE CREAMERY, DAIRY QUEEN, DUNKIN DO-NUTS, HAAGEN-DAZS ICE CREAM, HARDEE'S, HAR-VEY'S, IN-N-OUT BURGER, JACK IN THE BOX, K F C,LONG JOHN SILVER'S, MC DONALD'S, PANDA EX-PRESS, PICK UP STIX, POPEYE'S CHICKEN & BIS-CUITS, QUIZNOS, RUBIO'S, SECOND CUP, SONIC,STARBUCK'S COFFEE, SUBWAY SANDWICHES &SALADS, TACO BELL, TACO JOHN'S, TCBY, TIM HOR-TON'S, TJ CINNAMONS, TOGO'S, WENDY'S, WHATA-BURGER

Category name:Restaurant ChainsA & W FAMILY RESTAURANT, APPLEBEE’S, BENNI-GAN’S, BOB’S BIG BOY, BONANZA, BONEFISHGRILL, CARRABBA’S ITALIAN GRILL, CHILI’S GRILL &BAR, CHUCK E CHEESE PIZZA, CLAIM JUMPER,COCO’S, DOMINO’S PIZZA, FAZOLI’S, GODFATHER’SPIZZA, GOLDEN CORRAL FAMILY STEAK HSE, IHOPRESTAURANT, KELSEY’S, LITTLE CAESARS PIZZA,LONE STAR STEAKHOUSE, MARIE CALLENDER,OLIVE GARDEN ITALIAN RSTRNT, OUTBACK STEAK-HOUSE, PAPA JOHN’S PIZZA, PASTA CONNECTION,PERKINS FAMILY RESTAURANT, PIZZA HUT, PON-DEROSA STEAK HOUSE, RED LOBSTER, ROUNDTABLE PIZZA, RUBY TUESDAY, SHAKEY’S PIZZA, SIZ-ZLER, SMOKEY BONES, STEAK & ALE, SWISS CHA-LET, TGI FRIDAY’S, THE KEG

Category name:SupermarketsACME, ALBERTSONS, ALDI, A & P, BI-LO, CUBFOODS, CUMBERLAND FARMS, FOOD LION, GIANT,GIANT EAGLE, H-E-B, HY-VEE, IGA, JEWEL-OSCO,KROGER, MEIJER, PANTRY, PATHMARK, PIGGLYWIGGLY, PUBLIX, RALEY’S, RALPH’S, SAFEWAY,SAVE-A-LOT, SHAW’S SUPERMARKET, STOP & SHOP,STOP N GO, TOPS FRIENDLY MARKET, VON’S,WHOLE FOODS, WINN-DIXIE, Supermarkets-Others

Category name:AutomotiveAAA, RV/Truck Facility, Automobile Club, Parking, CarParts & Accessories, Car Repair Facility, Car Wash

Category name:Retailer ChainsBURLINGTON COAT FACTORY, COSTCO, FACTORY 2-U, KMART, KOHL’S, ROSS, SAM’S CLUB, STEINMART, T J MAXX, TARGET STORES, WAL-MART, Retai-ler Chains-Others

Category name:HotelAMERI HOST INN, BAYMONT INN & SUITES, BESTWESTERN, COURTYARD BY MARRIOTT, CROWNEPLAZA, DAYS INN, DOUBLE TREE, ECONO LODGE,EMBASSY SUITES, FAIRFIELD INN, HAMPTON INN,HILTON, HILTON GARDEN INN, HOLIDAY INN, HOLI-DAY INN EXPRESS, HOMEWOOD SUITES, HOWARDJOHNSON, HYATT, KNIGHTS INN, LA QUINTA INN,MARRIOTT, MOTEL 6, QUALITY-COMFORT-CLARION,RAMADA INN, RED ROOF INN, RESIDENCE INNS,SCOTTISH INN, SHERATON, STAYBRIDGE SUITES,STUDIO 6, SUPER 8, TRAVELODGE, WINGATE INN,Hotel-Others


En172

Chapter

18

Category name:Car DealerACURA, AUDI, BMW, BUICK, CADILLAC, CHEVRO-LET, CHRYSLER, DAEWOO, DODGE, FORD, HONDA,HYUNDAI, INFINITI, ISUZU, JAGUAR, JEEP, KIA,LAND ROVER, LEXUS, LINCOLN, MAZDA, MER-CEDES-BENZ, MITSUBISHI, NISSAN, OLDSMOBILE,PONTIAC, PORSCHE, SAAB, SATURN, SUBARU, SU-ZUKI, TOYOTA, VOLKSWAGEN, VOLVO, Car Dealer-Others

Category name:Rental and Other ServicesRental Car, Video Rental, Laundromat, Dry Cleaners

Category name:Electronics RetailerBEST BUY, CIRCUIT CITY, COMP USA, FRY’S ELEC-TRONICS, RADIO SHACK, ULTIMATE ELECTRONICS,Electronics Retailer-Others

Category name:GroceriesLiquor Store, Bakery, Butcher, Convenience Store, De-licatessen, Groceries-Others

Category name:ShoppingShopping Center, Beauty & Barber, Book Store, MusicStore, Fashion, Florist, Furniture, Home Improvement,Glassware, House & Office, Optometrist, Shoes &Bags, Sporting Goods, Toys, Cellular Phone Shop,Shopping-Others

Category name:EntertainmentStadium & Arena, Brewery, Casino, Cinema, NightClub, Theater & Play, Winery, Pub

Category name:LeisureMuseum, Art Gallery, Zoo, Amusement Park, FairGround, Beach, National Park & Forest, Camping &Hiking, Ski Resort, Bowling, Golf Course, Gym, Pool &Tennis, Travel Agency, Tourist Information, Tourist At-traction, Park & Recreation

Category name:Public Service & FacilityPolice Station, Government Office, Post Office, CourtHouse, Convention Center, City Center, Library

Category name:TransportationAirline Access, Airport, Ferry Terminal, Train Station,Rest Area

Category name:MedicalDoctor, Dentist, Veterinarian, Emergency Medical Ser-vice, Hospital, Pharmacy

Category name:SchoolUniversity & College, Nursery School, ElementarySchool, Junior High School, High School, VocationalSchool


En 173

Chapter

18Operatin

gYourNavig

ationSystem

with

Voice

TroubleshootingIf you have problems operating your navigation system, refer to this section. The most commonproblems are listed below, along with likely causes and solutions. While this list is not comprehen-sive, it should answer your most common problems. If a solution to your problem cannot befound here, contact your dealer or the nearest authorized Pioneer service facility.

Problems in the screen

Symptom Cause Action (See)

Power doesn’t turn on. The navi-gation system doesn’t operate.

Leads and connectors are incor-rectly connected.

Confirm once more that all connections arecorrect.

The fuse is blown. Rectify the reason for the fuse blowing, thenreplace the fuse. Be very sure to install a cor-rect fuse with the same rate.

Noise and other factors are causingthe internal memory to operate in-correctly.

Refer to “Page 187” and carry out appropriatemeasures.

The hard disk drive is not workingbecause the temperature is extre-mely low or high.

Wait until the temperature inside the vehiclefalls or rises.

When the ignition switch isturned ON (or turned to ACC),the motor sounds.

This system confirms whether adisc is loaded or not.

This is a normal operation.

The navigation does not boot up. The power cable is not wired cor-rectly.

Turn the system off and the check the wiring.

The hard disk drive is not runningbecause the temperature is too low.

Wait until the inside of the vehicle warms up.

The hard disk drive is defective. Consult your authorized Pioneer dealer.

You cannot position your vehicleon the map or the positioningerror is large.

The quality of signals from the GPSsatellites is poor, causing reducedpositioning accuracy. Such a loss ofsignal quality may happen for thefollowing reasons:• The GPS antenna is in an unsuita-ble location.• Obstacles are blocking signalsfrom the satellites.• The position of satellites relative toyour vehicle is bad.• Signals from the GPS satelliteshave been modified to reduce accu-racy. (GPS satellites are operated bythe US Department of Defense, andthe US government reserves theright to distort positioning data formilitary reasons. This may lead togreater positioning errors.)

Check the GPS signal reception and the posi-tion of the GPS antenna if necessary, or con-tinue driving until reception improves. Keepthe antenna clear. (Page 90)

Appendix

En174

Appendix

You cannot position your vehicleon the map or the positioningerror is large.

The quality of signals from the GPSsatellites is poor, causing reducedpositioning accuracy. Such a loss ofsignal quality may happen for thefollowing reasons:• If a vehicle phone or cellularphone is used near the GPS anten-na, GPS reception may be lost tem-porarily.• Do not cover the GPS antennawith spray paint or vehicle wax, be-cause this may block the receptionof GPS signals. Snow buildup canalso degrade the signals.

Check the GPS signal reception and the posi-tion of the GPS antenna if necessary, or con-tinue driving until reception improves. Keepthe antenna clear. (Page 90)

Signals from the vehicle’s speedpulse are not being picked up prop-erly.

Check that the cables are properly connected.If necessary, consult the dealer that installedthe system.

The navigation system may not bemounted securely in your vehicle.

Check that the navigation system is securelymounted and, if necessary, consult the dealerthat installed the system.

Your vehicle is operating in Simplehybrid mode.

Connect the speed signal input (pink leadwire) of the power cable correctly, and resetthe 3D Hybrid Sensor memory ([LearningStatus]).

The navigation system is installedwith an extreme angle exceedingthe limitation of the installationangle.

Confirm the installation angle. (The naviga-tion system must be installed within the al-lowed installation angle. For details, refer to“Installation Manual” and [InstallationAngle Setup].) (Page 92)

Indication of the position of your ve-hicle is misaligned after a U-turn orreversing.

Check whether or not the reverse gear signalinput lead (violet) is connected properly. (Thenavigation system works properly without thelead connected, but positioning accuracy willbe adversely affected.)

The map continually reorients it-self.

The traveling direction is always setto Heading Up.

Touch on the screen and change the mapdisplay.

The daylight display is usedeven when the vehicle lights areon.

[Day] is selected to [Day/Night Dis-play].

Check [Day/Night Display] setting and makesure [Automatic] is selected. (Page 50)

The orange/white lead is not con-nected.

Check the connection.

The display is very dim. The vehicle’s light is turned ON, and[Automatic] is selected on [Day/Night Display].

Read about [Day/Night Display] setting and,if desired, select [Day]. (Page 50)

The vehicle cabin temperature is ex-tremely low.

A Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) is used, andsuch displays tend to darken when cold. Waitfor the vehicle to warm up.

Picture quality adjustment of thedisplay is not correct.

Adjust the picture quality. (Page 153)

Display tilt is not at the proper set-ting.

Press and hold EJECT button to adjust the tilt.

Appendix

En 175

AppendixAppendix

No sounds are heard.The volume level will not rise.

The volume level is low. Adjust the volume level.

The attenuator or mute is on. Turn the attenuator or mute off.

The speaker lead is disconnected. Check the connection.

The volume of beeps and naviga-tion guidance cannot be ad-justed.

You cannot adjust these parameterswith VOL (a/b) button.

Turn the volume up or down with [Volume] in[Settings] menu.

Adjusting the volume of naviga-tion guidance and beeps is notpossible.

You cannot adjust them with VOL(a/b) button.

Turn the volume up or down according to [Vo-lume] in [Settings] menu. (Page 88)

A strange sound is heard whenthe vehicle comes close to a cer-tain place (e.g. Dog barking).

The sound for the entry of [AddressBook] is set.

Set the sound setting of that entry to [NoSound]. (Page 63)

An alarm sounds when you ap-proach the registered locationand the set image pops up, re-gardless of whether [AddressBook Icon] is set to [Off].

This is a normal operation and not amalfunction.

To turn off the sound output and image popup, select [No Sound] and [No Picture].

Slope is not displayed on Vehi-cle Dynamics screen.“Inclination” does not move on3D Calibration Status screen.

The speed pulse lead is not con-nected.

Connect the speed pulse lead.

No sound, no voice. has been set, or sound volumeis reduced to 0.

Adjust the volume of the guidance or turnoff. (Page 88)

The person on the other end ofthe phone call cannot hear theconversation due to an echo.

The voice from the person on theother end of the phone call is outputfrom the speakers and then pickedup by the microphone again, creat-ing an echo.

Use the following methods to reduce theecho:—Lower the volume on the receiver—Have both speakers pause slightly beforespeaking

The registered phone cannot bedeleted.

Normally, the registered phone can-not be deleted.

! Overwrite the old registered phone with anew phone.! Clear [Phone Settings]. (Page 187)

CD or DVD playback is not pos-sible.

The disc is inserted upside down. Insert the disc with the label upward.

The disc is dirty. Clean disc.

The disc is cracked or otherwise da-maged.

Insert a normal, round disc.

The files on the CD are an irregularfile format.

Check the file format.

The CD format cannot be playedback.

Replace disc.

The loaded disc is a type this systemcannot play.

Check what type the disc is. (Also see “Hand-ling and Care of the Disc” in the hardwaremanual and “Page 199” for more cautionsabout handling each type of media.)

No picture. The parking brake lead is not con-nected or applied.

Connect a parking brake lead correctly, andapply the parking brake.

Parking brake interlock is activated. Park your vehicle in a safe place and applythe parking brake. (Page 22)

[AV Input] setting is incorrect. Please read the following page and set thesetting correctly. (Page 150)

Appendix

En176

Appendix

The audio skips.The navigation system is not firmlysecured.

Secure the navigation system firmly.

Failure hard disk drive. Consult your Pioneer dealer.

“Rear display” picture disap-pears.

The setting for [REAR SCREEN] is in-correct.

Please read the following page and set therear screen setting correctly. (Page 153)

There was a problem with the “Reardisplay” or a faulty wiring connec-tion, for example.

Check the “Rear display” and its connection.

When the shift lever is in [R], therear view camera images are dis-played. (When [MIRROR] is selectedin [REAR SCREEN] menu.)

Select [DVD] or [AV] in [REAR SCREEN]menu. When you move the shift lever to a po-sition other than [R], the screen will be re-turned to the previous display.

[DVD-V Setup] is carried out. You can not display the video image to “Reardisplay” during [DVD-V Setup] menu.

Nothing is displayed and thetouch panel keys cannot beused.

The setting for the rear view camerais incorrect.

Connect a rear view camera correctly.

The shift lever was placed in [R]when the rear view camera was notconnected.

Press AV button to return to the source dis-play and then select the correct polarity set-ting for [Camera Input]. (Page 149)

The back light of the LCD panel isturned off.

Press V button to turn on the back light.

Touch panel key is not respondor a different key is responding.

Touch panel keys deviate from theactual positions that respond toyour touch for some reason.

Perform the touch panel calibration. (Page190)

CD recording is not possible. A disc that cannot be recorded,such as MP3 disc or DVD-video, isinserted.

A disc other than a normal music CD cannotbe recorded.

CD recording doesn’t stopthough the record progress indi-cator shows 100 %.

Music Library recording will be can-celed after playback of the currenttrack is finished. (The recordingmode stops at the interval of thetracks.)

Wait until the current track has ended orchange the source manually.

“NO SIGNAL” is displayed at theright corner on the map.

While waiting for a response fromthe XM tuner.

Wait for a while and try the operation again.

You are in an area that cannot re-ceive XM tuner reception.

Move into an area that can receive XM tunerreception.

Your current location provides verypoor reception.

Change your location.

“UPDATING” is displayed at theright corner on the map.

Service subscription is either XMaudio only or XM NavTraffic standalone.

Since the GEX-P10XMT is capable of receivingboth XM audio and XM NavTraffic service, ifyou are subscribed to only one or the other,the system checks to see if you have addedanother service to your account since youlast powered on the navigation system. Whenyou subscribe to both services, this messagewill stop appearing when you turn the ignitionON (ACC ON).

Appendix

En 177

AppendixAppendix

No sounds are heard.The volume level will not rise.

Cables are not connected correctly. Connect the cables correctly.

The system is performing still, slowmotion, or frame-by-frame playbackwith DVD-video.

There is no sound during still, slow motion, orframe-by-frame playback with DVD-video.

The system is paused or performing,fast rewind or forward during theMP3 disc playback.

For an MP3, there is no sound on fast rewindor forward.

“DTS” is selected for the DVD-Videodisc sound track.

Switch to a non “DTS” sound track.

The icon is displayed, and op-eration is not possible.

The operation is not compatiblewith the DVD’s configuration.

This operation is not possible. (For example,the DVD playing does not feature that angle,audio system, subtitle language, etc.)

The picture stops (pauses) andthe unit cannot be operated.

Reading of data has become impos-sible during DVD playback.

After touching g once, start playback oncemore.

The picture is stretched, the as-pect is incorrect.

The aspect setting is incorrect forthe display.

Select the appropriate setting for that image.(Page 149, Page 148)

A parental lock message is dis-played and DVD playback is notpossible.

Parental lock is on. Turn parental lock off or change the level.(Page 148)

Parental lock for DVD playbackcannot be canceled.

The code number is incorrect. Input the correct code number. (Page 148)

Playback is not with the audiolanguage and subtitle languagesettings selected in [DVD-VSetup].

The DVD playing does not featuredialog or subtitles in the languageselected in [DVD-V Setup].

Switching to a selected language is not possi-ble if the language selected in [DVD-VSetup] is not recorded on the disc.

Dialing is not possible becausethe touch panel keys for dialingare inactive.

Your phone is out of range for ser-vice.

Retry after entering within range for service.

The connection between cellularphone and the Bluetooth unit (soldseparately) (navigation system) can-not be established now.

Perform the connection process.

The cellular phone is not registeredto the navigation system yet.

To use the cellular phone featuring the Blue-tooth wireless technology with this navigationsystem, the registration process is necessary.

When the screen is frozen...Park your vehicle in a safe place, and cut offthe engine. Turn the ignition key back to “Accoff”. Then start the engine again, and turn thepower to the navigation system back on. If thisdoes not solve the problem, press RESET but-ton on the navigation system.

Appendix

En178

Appendix

Messages and How to React to ThemThe following messages may be displayed by your navigation system.p There are occasions when you may see

error messages other than those shownhere. In such a case, follow the instructionsgiven on the display.

Messages for navigation functions

Message When What to do (See)

Irregular speed pulse signaldetected. Please power offthe system and check the in-stallation. Then, please re-boot the system and press“OK”.

If the Navigation system does not re-ceive the vehicle speed pulse.

Consult your Pioneer dealer.

Speed pulse not connected.Calibration will start withoutspeed pulse. Accuracy is notfully ensured without speedpulse.

The speed signal input (pink leadwire) of the power cable is not con-nected.

To operate with 3D hybrid mode, connect thespeed signal input (pink lead wire) of thepower cable correctly.Although it can be operated with Simple hy-brid mode without connecting the speed sig-nal input, the precision of the positioning willbe less accurate.

Vibration detected. Pleasepower off the system andcheck the installation. Then,please re-boot the system andpress “OK”.

The navigation unit is installed in aplace where it may be affected by alarge vibration.

Re-install the navigation unit in a place wherethe unit will not be affected by vibration.

Direction of G sensor is notcorrect. Please power off thesystem and check the installa-tion. Then, please re-boot thesystem and press “OK”.

Direction of G sensor is set incor-rectly.

See the Installation Manual and set the direc-tion of the navigation unit correctly.

Gyro Sensor is not workingproperly. Please consult yourdealer or Pioneer service cen-ter.

Abnormal Gyrosensor output is de-tected.

Write down the error code shown on thescreen. Turn off the power, and then contactyour nearest Pioneer service facility.

Positioning is not possibledue to the hardware. Pleasecontact your dealer or Pioneerservice center.

The location display is not possibledue to hardware failure.

Consult your dealer.

GPS antenna problem de-tected. Please contact yourdealer or Pioneer service cen-ter.

The location display is not possibledue to failure of the GPS antenna.


This function is not availablenow.

The screen cannot be displayed withVehicle Dynamics Display. The sen-sor has not been taught so the sen-sor information cannot be acquired.

If the sensor learning status reaches the Sen-sor Initializing, the system is ready to beused.

The vertical installation angleis changed. Gyro Sensor cali-bration is re-initialized.

If the mounting angle of the naviga-tion unit has been changed.

The system initializes the sensor in order tooperate it with the maximum performanceand automatically starts re-learning.

Appendix

En 179

AppendixAppendix

Excess vertical installationangle detected. Please installthe navigation unit correctly.

The navigation system is installedwith an extreme angle exceedingthe limitation of the installationangle.

Confirm the installation angle. (The naviga-tion system must be installed within the al-lowed installation angle. For details refer toInstallation Manual.)

No data available at this time. No data is available that can beused with the XM tuner.

Wait for a while and try the operation again.

UPDATING (Updating) The selected channel is not in-cluded in your subscription.

Select another channel.

Radio is being updated with the lat-est encryption code.

Wait until the encryption code is fully up-dated.

Route calculation was notpossible.

Route calculation has failed be-cause of a malfunction in map data,software, or hardware.

! Change the destination.! Consult the Pioneer Local dealer if this mes-sage persists.

Route calculation not possiblebecause destination is too far.

The destination is too far. ! Set a destination closer to the startingpoint.! Set one or more waypoints.

Route calculation not possiblebecause destination is tooclose.

The destination or waypoint(s) aretoo close.

Set a destination and waypoint(s) fartherfrom the starting point.

Route calculation not possibledue to traffic regulations.

• The destination or waypoint(s) arein a Control Traffic Zone (CTR) andthe route calculation is hampered.• Your vehicle is currently in a Con-trol Traffic Zone (CTR) and the routecalculation is hampered.

! Set a destination and waypoint(s) outsidethe CTR if you know where the restricted areais.! Try a destination or waypoint(s) away fromthe currently set points to some extent.! Drive your vehicle to an unrestricted areaand reset the destination and waypoint(s).

Route calculation not possiblebecause navigation cannot beprovided around destinationor starting point.

The destination, waypoint(s), orstarting point are in an area whereno road exists (e.g. a mountain) andthe route calculation is impossible.

! Set a destination and waypoint(s) on roads.! Reset the destination after you drive the ve-hicle to any road.

Route to destination cannotbe calculated.

The destination or waypoint(s) are inan isolated island, etc. without aferry and the route calculation is im-possible. If there is no road con-nected to your starting point ordestination, this message will ap-pear.

Change the destination.

• Ferry could not be avoided.• Toll roads could not beavoided.• Freeway could not beavoided.• Ferry, toll roads and free-ways could not be avoided.• Ferry and toll roads couldnot be avoided.• Toll roads and freewayscould not be avoided.• Ferry and freeways couldnot be avoided.

These messages appear when aferry route, toll roads, or freewaysare included in the route to the des-tination or waypoints even though aroute is set to avoid them.You can identify these condition bythe icons.

If the current route is not desired, set destina-tion or waypoints that do not pass through aferry route, toll roads, or freeways. (Page 32)

Appendix

En180

Appendix

The address does not exist.Do you want to continue ?

The house number entered does notexist in the database for the speci-fied street.

Re-enter the existing house number. Or, pro-ceed to the next step without entering thehouse number and set the main point of thatstreet as your destination.

This area does not containany POI's of the selected type.

Facilities of the selected category donot exist in the surrounding areas.

Use another search method or move to an-other location and perform Vicinity Searchagain.

Failed to make the route pro-file.

In rare cases, a route calculationerror may occur.

! Retry.! Consult the Pioneer Local dealer if this mes-sage persists.

There is no Traffic List. There is no available traffic informa-tion now.

Move to the location where you can receivethe XM NavTraffic information, and then trythe operation again.

There is no pictures folder.Please create /Pictures/ folderand store JPEG files in thatFolder.

Cannot load the image because Pic-tures folder is not found in the in-serted disc.

Use the appropriate data after reading “Page94”.

Data Read error. Failed to read the data because theCD-R is damaged or dirty. Or, thepick-up lens of the DVD drive isdirty.

Try re-reading the data by inserting a cleanCD-R. Clean the pick-up lens with a commer-cially available cleaning kit for DVD, then tryto reading again.

Pictures folder exists on the CD-Rbut no data in JPEG format exists.


JPEG file is corrupt. The data is damaged or an attemptwas made to set a JPEG image thatwas not made to specifications asthe background picture.


CAUTION! System detectedimproper connection of Park-ing Brake lead. Please checkyour configuration for safety.Please see Operation Manualfor more information regard-ing safe operation.

Parking brake lead is incorrectlyconnected.

Confirm once more that their connections arecorrect.

Connection failed. The cellular phone’s Bluetooth wire-less technology is turned off.

Turn the target phone’s Bluetooth wirelesstechnology on.

The cellular phone is paired (con-nected) with another device.

Cancel the pairing (connection) and retry.

Rejection has been received fromthe cellular phone.

Operate the target phone and accept the con-nection request from the navigation system.(Furthermore, check the connection settingson your cellular phone.)

The target cellular phone can not befound.

Check whether your cellular phone is turnedoff and, whether the distance to your cellularphone is too far.

Registration step has been success-ful but connection has failed forsome reason.

Retry the registration and if a connection stillcannot be established, try connecting usingyour cellular phone.

Appendix

En 181

AppendixAppendix

Registration failed.The cellular phone’s Bluetooth wire-less technology is turned off duringthe registration step.

Keep turning the target phone’s Bluetoothwireless technology on during the registra-tion.

Rejection by the cellular phone hasreceived.

Operate the target phone and accept the re-gistration request from the navigation system.(Furthermore, check the connection settingson your cellular phone.)

Registration step has failed forsome reason.

Retry the registration and if the registrationstill fails, try registering using your cellularphone.

Automatic connection in pro-gress. Please try again later.

If you try to perform another opera-tion during automatic connectionby the system.

! Wait for a while and retry.! Establish that connection temporarily andretry that later.

Automatic connection in pro-gress. Please try manuallylater.

If you try to connect another phoneduring automatic connection by thesystem.

Establish that connection temporarily andretry it later.

Could not find any availablephone.

No available phone exists in the sur-roundings when the systemsearches for the cellular phone fea-turing Bluetooth wireless technol-ogy for registration.

! Turn the target phone’s Bluetooth wirelesstechnology on.! Check whether your cellular phone isturned off and, whether the distance to yourcellular phone is too far.

Bluetooth unit error. It is notpossible to find any cellphones.

If the Bluetooth unit (sold sepa-rately) is disconnected from this na-vigation system or Bluetooth unitcarries out another processingwhen the system search the cellularphone featuring Bluetooth wirelesstechnology for registration.

! Check the connection and retry.! Establish that connection temporarily andretry later.

Bluetooth unit error. The de-vice name could not be set.

If the Bluetooth unit (sold sepa-rately) is disconnected from this na-vigation system or the Bluetoothunit carries out another processwhen you change the device name.

! Check the connection and retry.! Establish that connection temporarily andretry later.

Registration is not available. If you try to perform another opera-tion immediately after connectionfailure.

Wait for a while and retry.

Reading failed. If you transferred the data from yourcellular phone in a format can notbe received with navigation system.

Select just a suitable item, format, and thenretry.

Disconnection has been made dur-ing transfer for some reason.

Connect your cellular phone again and retry.

Calibration failed. Please referto the owner’s manual.

The touch panel calibration has notbeen carried out with appropriatesteps.

Please read the instruction of touch panel ca-libration and retry. (Page 190)

The HDD is not connected. Failure of the built-in hard disk drivehas occurred, such as internal elec-trical problem or file system error.


Cannot use HDD. Failure of the built-in hard disk drivehas occurred, such as internal elec-trical problem or file system error.


Appendix

En182

Appendix

There is no applicable pro-gram.

Failure of the built-in hard disk drivehas occurred, such as internal elec-trical problem or file system error.


The HDD cannot be operateddue to excessive heat. Pleasemove your vehicle to a safeplace and turn the power offuntil the temperature goesdown.

Hard disk drive cannot run due tohigh temperature.

Park your vehicle to safe place, turn the igni-tion switch off, and wait until the temperatureinside the vehicle drops.

Appendix

En 183

AppendixAppendix

Messages for Audio FunctionsWhen problems occur in the audio source, a message may appears on the display. Refer to thetable below to identify the problem, then take the suggested corrective action. If the error persists,contact your dealer or your nearest Pioneer Service Center.

Built-in DVD drive


Unreadable disc If you try to use a disc which is in-compatible with this system.

Insert a suitable disc.

If you insert a disc upside down. Insert the disc with the label upward.

If the disc is dirty. Clean the disc.

If the disc is cracked or otherwisedamaged.

Insert a normal, round disc.

Mechanical failure of DVD drive oc-curs.

Consult your Pioneer dealer.

Playback error. Please removethe disc.

Electrical or mechanical error hasoccurred.

Press RESET button. (Also see the HardwareManual.) (Page 187)

Region code error The disc does not have the same re-gion number as the navigation sys-tem.

Replace the DVD-Video with one bearing thecorrect region number.

Playback error due to irregu-lar temperature. Please re-move the disc.

The temperature of the built-in DVDdrive exceeds the operating limits.

Park your vehicle in safe place, turn the igni-tion switch off, and wait until the built-in DVDdrive’s temperature returns to within normaloperating limits.

ATTENTION! Viewing of frontseat video source while driv-ing is strictly prohibited.

Parking brake interlock is activated. Park your vehicle in the safe place and applythe parking brake. (Page 22)

Search error The title number, chapter number,time, or 10 key command that youenter in [10Key Search] do notexist. (This message will appearwhen the DVD drive cannot acceptthat command.)

Enter the available numbers or 10 key com-mand or use another search method.

Hard disk drive (Music Library)


This CD cannot be recorded If you insert a CD which prohibitssecond-generation copies or dupli-cate.

Use another CD and retry.

• Recording error. Switchingto CD playback mode• Recording error. Recordingis stopped• The recording was unstable.Restart the recording fromthe beginning of the track.

If recording can not be carried outdue to continuous skipping on cer-tain part of the disc because thedisc is dirty, scratched, or otherwisedamaged, the pick-up lens of theDVD drive is dirty, or extreme vibra-tion occurs continuously.

! Clean the disc and retry.! Clean the pick-up lens with a commerciallyavailable cleaning kit for DVD, then retry.! Retry in vibration-free condition.

Appendix

En184

Appendix

Exceeded playlist maximum.No more playlists can be re-corded.

If you try to record a new CD but themaximum number of playlists arealready recorded. (The album play-list can be stores up to 400.)

Delete some playlists and retry.

Playback error. Music Librarycannot be played

The music library component is ab-normal.


This playlist cannot storemore than 99 tracks.

If you try to add tracks butMy Mixor My Favorite playlists are maxi-mum number. (My Mix and My Fa-vorite playlists can store the tracksup to 99.)

Delete some tracks and retry.

This track cannot be added toMyMix.

The music library component is ab-normal.


Name cannot be used forvoice recognition. Try again.

Some invalid characters have beenentered and the system cannot con-vert it to the appropriate pronuncia-tion.

Enter different characters so that the systemcan pronounce it.

Single recording mode willonly record the first track ofCD

Recording tracks other than the firsttrack of CD when the recordingmode is [Single].

When you set [Single] in [REC Mode], thesystem only can record the first track of CD.Set [Auto] or [Manual] in [REC Mode] andretry. (Page 152)

HDD is full. This CD cannot berecorded

There is no free space for recordingin the hard disk drive.

Delete some tracks or playlists and try againif you want to record that CD.

Unable to select appropriateTrack info due to multiple en-tries in the database.

Some corresponding data is foundin the Gracenote® Database, but thesystem cannot select one to appenda title.

Enter the title manually, or try to retrieve thetitle by touching [Update Title].

All artist names in the playlisthave been deleted becauseno character has been en-tered. Do you want to pro-ceed?

If you try to delete the artist nameentirely. The artist will not be dis-played in the artist group and artistname on the information plate alsowill not be displayed.

If you enter the artist name again, the artistname appears.

Other sources


Search failed. iPod is preparing playback. There-fore, the operation is invalid now.

Wait until [Ready] disappears and try the op-eration.

Invalid command - the memohas not been stored.

• If you try to memorize 000 Chan-nel to My Mix.• If you try to memorize a channelthat is OFF AIR to My Mix.• If you try to memorize a channelto My Mix while an XM tuner erroroccurs.

Tune an appropriate channel and memorizeit.

Invalid command - the CH hasnot been stored.

• If you try to memorize 000 or 001Channel to T button’s preset.• If you try to memorize a channelthat is OFF AIR to T button’s preset.• If you try to memorize a channelto T button’s preset while an XMtuner error occurs.

Tune an appropriate channel and memorizeit.

Appendix

En 185

AppendixAppendix

Appendix

En186

Appendix

Returning the NavigationSystem to the Default orFactory SettingsYou can return settings or recorded contentsto the default or factory settings. There arefour methods to clear user data, and the situa-tions and the cleared contents are different foreach method. For the contents that are clearedin each method, see the list presented later.p The map data and the system data are not

cleared from the hard disk drive by anyclearing method.

Method 1: RESET buttonPressing RESET button clears almost all set-tings of the audio function.

The system becomes the same state when thebattery of the vehicle is removed or the yellowlead of the navigation system is disconnected.

Method 2: [Restore Factory Settings]Clears some items in [Map] menu and in [Set-tings] menu.

= For details, refer to Restoring the Default Set-ting on page 96Method 3: [Reset] on start-up

Clears the setting values stored in the harddisk drive.

= For details, refer to If system errors fre-quently occur on page 190Method 4: [Clear user information fromhard disk] on start-upClears all user data (including Music Library)stored in the hard disk drive.

= For details, refer to Completely returning thenavigation system to the initial state on page190

Appendix

En 187

AppendixAppendix

Setting items to be deletedThe items to be deleted vary depending on thereset method. The items listed in the followingtable return to the default or factory settings.The items not listed below will be retained.However, if you carry out [Clear user infor-mation from hard disk], all the settings re-lated to the navigation function includingthe items not listed below are deleted.— : The setting will be retained.1 : The setting will be cleared and returned tothe default or factory settings.

Navigation functions Method 1 Method 2 Method 3 Method 4

Map function

View mode and scale setting onthe map

— — 1 1

Direction of the map — — 1 1

Last cursor position on the mapscreen

— — 1 1

Route Setting

Current route — — 1 1

Guidance state of the currentroute

— — 1 1

Vehicle position information — — 1 1

Route conditions — 1 1 1

[Destination] menu

Auto fill-in function for citiesand streets

— — 1 1

Point registered in [AddressBook]

— — — 1

Sorting order selected in [Ad-dress Book]

— — 1 1

[Information] menu

Sorting order selected in [Traf-fic Events], [Traffic On Route],and [Traffic Flow]

— — 1 1

[Traffic Settings] — — 1 1

[Phone Settings] ([PhoneMenu])

— — 1 1

[Phone Book], [Dial Favorites],[Dialed Numbers], [ReceivedCalls] ([Phone Menu])

— — 1 1

[Stock Info] — — — 1

[My Favorites] — — — 1

[Emergency Info] — — 1 1

Appendix

En188

Appendix

[Map] menu

[Short-Cut Selection],[ViewMode]

— — 1 1

[Displayed Info], [OverlayPOI], [Day/Night Display], [AVGuide Mode], [Road Color]

— 1 1 1

[Settings] menu

[Language] ([Regional Set-tings]), [Time] ([Regional Set-tings]), [Installation AngleSetup] ([Hardware]), [DefinedLocations], [Modify CurrentLocation], [Background Pic-ture Setting]

— — 1 1

Items other than above — 1 1 1

[3D Calibration Status] ([Hard-ware])

— — — —

[Vehicle Dynamics]Right and left gauge type, [Ad-just Look]

— — 1 1

[Audio Settings] All items 1 — — —

[System Settings]

[Mute Set], [Clock DISP], [RECMode]

1 — 1 1

Other items 1 — — —

Audio functions Method 1 Method 2 Method 3 Method 4

Music Library [LI-BRARY]

Repeat, Random settings 1 — 1 1

Track data — — — 1

Playlist — — — 1

Last playback position — — — 1

[XM] Alert on/off for My Mix 1 — 1 1

[DVD] All settings 1 — — —

[CD] All settings 1 — — —

[ROM](MP3) All settings 1 — — —

[FM]Preset memory and the othersettings

1 — — —

[AM]Preset memory and the othersettings

1 — — —

[TV]Preset memory and the othersettings

1 — — —

[REAR SCREEN] Rear Screen setting 1 — — —

OthersPicture Adjust 1 — — —

Display Tilt 1 — — —

Appendix

En 189

AppendixAppendix

If system errors frequently occurIf system errors frequently occur and thepower to the navigation system turns off, inap-propriate content may have been recorded inthe memory or the hard disk drive. In such acase, normal operations may be restored byclearing the setting values stored in the harddisk drive.

1 Start the engine.After a few moments, the start-up screencomes on for a few seconds.

2 Touch and hold MAP button while thestart-up screen is displayed.“Clear memory screen” appears.

3 Touch [Reset].

4 Touch [Yes].The setting values stored in the hard disk drivereturn to the default or factory settings. Afterthat, the navigation splash screen appears.

Completely returning thenavigation system to the initialstateTo return the entire navigation system to thedefault or factory settings, initialize the naviga-tion system in the following order:1 Press RESET button on the hardware.2 Initialize the user data area on the hard disk

drive.3 Clear the learned data in the sensor.

1 Turn the ignition switch off.

2 Press RESET button.

3 Start the engine.After a few moments, the start-up screencomes on for a few seconds.

4 Touch and hold MAP button while thestart-up screen is displayed.“Clear memory screen” appears.

5 Touch [Clear user information fromhard disk].

p This reset operation clears all music datarecorded in the music library. Note that thecleared data cannot be restored.

6 Touch [Yes].The user area in the hard disk drive is initia-lized. After that, the navigation system re-starts.

7 Press MENU button and then touch[Settings].The setting menu appears.

8 Touch [Hardware] and then touch [3DCalibration Status].

9 Touch [Learning Status] and then touch[Reset All].

Adjusting the ResponsePositions of the Touch Panels(Touch Panel Calibration)If you feel that the touch panel keys on thescreen deviate from the actual positions thatrespond to your touch, adjust the response po-sitions of the touch panel. There are two ad-justment methods: 4-point adjustment, inwhich you touch four corners of the screen;and 16-point adjustment, in which you makefine-adjustments on the entire screen.

Appendix

En190

Appendix

p Make sure to use the supplied stylus for ad-justment, and gently touch the screen. Ifyou press the touch panel forcefully, thetouch panel may be damaged. Do not usea sharp pointed tool such as a ballpointpen or a mechanical pen. Otherwise thescreen is damaged.

Stylus (supplied with navigationsystem)

1 Press V button.The Picture Adjust screen appears.

2 Press and hold V button for two sec-onds or more.The 4-point touch panel adjustment screen ap-pears.

3 Touch and hold each of the arrows onthe four corners of the screen with thetouch panel adjustment pen.Hold the pen on the arrow until each one ofthe four arrows turns red.

4 Press V button.The adjusted position data is saved.

p Do not turn off the engine while saving theadjusted position data.

p PressMAP button to complete the 4-pointadjustment.

5 Press V button.The 16-point touch panel adjustment screenappears.

6 Gently touch the center of + mark dis-played on the screen with the touch paneladjustment pen.After you touch all marks, the adjusted posi-tion data is saved.

p Do not turn off the engine while saving theadjusted position data.

p Press V button to return to the previous ad-justment position.

p To cancel the adjustment, pressMAP but-ton.

7 Press MAP button.The adjustment is complete.

p If touch panel adjustment cannot be per-formed properly, consult your local Pioneerdealer.

Positioning TechnologyThe navigation system accurately measuresyour current location by combining the posi-tioning by GPS and by Dead Reckoning.

Positioning by GPSThe Global Positioning System (GPS) uses anetwork of satellites orbiting the Earth. Eachof the satellites, which orbit at a height of68 900 000 feet (21 000 km), continually broad-casts radio signals giving time and position in-formation. This ensures that signals from atleast three can be picked up from any openarea on the ground’s surface.

Appendix

En 191

AppendixAppendix

The accuracy of the GPS information dependson how good the reception is. When the sig-nals are strong and reception is good, GPScan determine latitude, longitude and altitudefor accurate positioning in three dimensions.But if signal quality is poor, only two dimen-sions, latitude and longitude, can be obtainedand positioning errors are somewhat greater.

Positioning by dead reckoningThe 3D Hybrid Sensor in the navigation systemalso calculates your position. The current loca-tion is measured by detecting driving distancewith the speed pulse, the turning directionwith the Gyrosensor and inclination of theroad with the G sensor.The 3D Hybrid Sensor can even calculatechanges of altitude, and corrects for discre-pancies in the distance traveled caused bydriving along winding roads or up slopes.Also, the navigation system learns the drivingconditions and stores information in the mem-ory; thus, as you drive more, the precision ofthe positioning becomes more accurate.The method of positioning changes as followsdepending on whether the speed pulse of yourvehicle is detected or not:

3D hybrid modeThis is active when the speed pulse is de-tected. Inclination of a street can be detected.

Simple hybrid modeWhen the speed pulse is not detected, posi-tioning is performed in this mode. Only hori-zontal movement is detected, so it becomes

less accurate. Also, when the positioning byGPS is not available, such as when your vehi-cle enters a long tunnel, the discrepancy be-tween your actual and calculated position maybecome bigger.p The speed pulse data comes from the

speed sensing circuit. The location of thisspeed sensing circuit depends on your ve-hicle model. In some cases, it is impossibleto make a connection to it, and in such acase we recommend that ND-PG1 speedpulse generator (sold separately) be used.

How do GPS and deadreckoning work together?For maximum accuracy, your navigation sys-tem continually compares GPS data with yourestimated position as calculated from the dataof 3D Hybrid Sensor. However, if only the datafrom the 3D Hybrid Sensor is available for along period, positioning errors are graduallycompounded until the estimated position be-comes unreliable. For this reason, wheneverGPS signals are available, they are matchedwith the data of the 3D Hybrid Sensor andused to correct it for improved accuracy.To ensure maximum accuracy, the dead reck-oning system learns with experience. By com-paring the position it estimates with youractual position as obtained using GPS, it cancorrect for various types of error, such as tirewear and the rolling motion of your vehicle. Asyou drive, the dead reckoning system gradu-ally gathers more data, learns more, and theaccuracy of its estimates gradually increases.So, after you have driven some distance, youcan expect your position as shown on the mapto show fewer errors.p If you use chains on your wheels for winter

driving or put on the spare wheel, errorsmay suddenly increase because of differ-ence in wheel diameter. The system detectsthe fact that the tire diameter has changed,and automatically replaces the value forcalculating distance.

Appendix

En192

Appendix

p If ND-PG1 is used or if your vehicle is oper-ating in Simple hybrid mode, the distancecalculation value cannot be replaced auto-matically.

Map matchingAs mentioned, the GPS and dead reckoningsystems used by this navigation system aresusceptible to certain errors. Their calcula-tions may, on occasion, place you in a locationon the map where no road exists. In this situa-tion, the processing system understands thatvehicles travel only on roads, and can correctyour position by adjusting it to a nearby road.This is called map matching.

With map matching

Without map matching

Handling Large ErrorsPositioning errors are kept to a minimum bycombining GPS, Dead Reckoning, and mapmatching. However, in some situations, thesefunctions may not work properly, and the errormay become bigger.

When the positioning by GPS isimpossible! If signals cannot be received from more

than two GPS satellites, GPS positioningdoes not take place.

! In some driving conditions, signals fromGPS satellites may not reach your vehicle.In this case, it is impossible for the systemto use GPS positioning.

In tunnels or enclosed parking garages

Under elevated roads or similar struc-tures

When driving among high buildings

When driving through a dense forest ortall trees

! If a car phone or cellular phone is usednear the GPS antenna, GPS reception maybe lost temporarily.

Appendix

En 193

AppendixAppendix

! Do not cover the GPS antenna with spraypaint or car wax, because this may blockthe reception of GPS signals. Snow buildupcan also degrade the signals, so keep theantenna clear.

p If, for any reason, GPS signals cannot be re-ceived, learning and error correction arenot possible. If GPS positioning has beenoperating for only a short time, your vehi-cle’s actual position and the current loca-tion mark on the map may divergeconsiderably. Once GPS reception is re-stored, accuracy will be recovered.

Vehicles that CannotObtain Speed Pulse Datap The speed pulse data comes from the

speed sensing circuit. The location of thisspeed sensing circuit depends on your ve-hicle model. In some cases, it is impossibleto make a connection to it, and in such acase we recommend that ND-PG1 speedpulse generator (sold separately) beused.

Conditions Likely to CauseNoticeable Positioning ErrorsFor various reasons such as the state of theroad you are traveling on and the state of re-ception of the GPS signal, the actual positionof your vehicle may differ from the positiondisplayed on the map screen.! If you make a shallow turn.

! If there is a parallel road.

! If there is another road very nearby, suchas in the case of an elevated freeway.

! If you take a recently opened road that isnot on the map.

Appendix

En194

Appendix

! If you drive in zig-zags.

! If the road has connected hairpin bends.

! If there is a loop or similar road configura-tion.

! If you take a ferry.

! If you are driving on a long, straight road ora gently curving road.

! If you are on a steep mountain road withmany height changes.

! If you enter or exit a multi-storey parking lotor similar using a spiral ramp.

Appendix

En 195

AppendixAppendix

! If your vehicle is turned on a turntable or si-milar structure.

! If your vehicle’s wheels spin, such as on agravel road or in snow.

! If you put on chains, or change your tiresfor ones with a different size.

! If trees or other obstacles block the GPSsignals for a considerable period.

! If you drive very slowly, or in a start-and-stop manner, as in a traffic congestion.

! If you join the road after driving around alarge parking lot.

! When you pass around a traffic circle.

! When starting driving immediately afterstarting the engine.

! If you turn your navigation system on whiledriving.

Some types of vehicles may not output aspeed signal while driving at just a few kilo-meters per hour. In such a case, the current lo-cation of your vehicle may not be displayedcorrectly while in a traffic congestion or in aparking lot.

Appendix

En196

Appendix

When the Hard Disk Drive isDisconnectedIf there is no hard disk drive because of repairor service, you can operate only the Radiosource without the hard disk drive.The following screen also may appear becausethe hard disk drive can not run due to low tem-perature. In such a case, park your vehicle in asafe place and turn the ignition switch off.After the temperature inside the vehicle re-turns to normal, turn the ignition switch on.

Only the following operations are available.Other functions cannot be operated.! Only the FM and AM sources can be oper-

ated. (Preset station select cannot be oper-ated.)

! If the selected source before ejecting thehard disk drive is [AV], the [AV INPUT]source is available on “Rear display”. (If theselected source is [DVD], nothing is outputto “Rear display”. If the selected source is[MIRROR], the same image as “Front dis-play” is output to “Rear display”.)

! Rear view camera is available only whenthe vehicle is backing up. ([Rear View] isnot available.)

Route Setting InformationRoute search specificationsYour navigation system sets a route to yourdestination by applying certain built-in rules tothe map data. This section provides some use-ful information about how a route is set.

CAUTIONWhen a route is calculated, the route and voiceguidance for the route is automatically set. Also,for day or time traffic regulations, only informa-tion about traffic regulations at the time when theroute was calculated is shown. One-way streetsand street closures may not be taken into consid-eration. For example, if a street is open during themorning only, but you arrive later, it would beagainst the traffic regulations so you cannot drivealong the set route. When driving, please followthe actual traffic signs. Also, the system may notknow some traffic regulations.

! The calculated route is one example of theroute to your destination decided by the na-vigation system whilst taking the type ofstreets or traffic regulations into account. Itis not necessarily an optimum route. (Insome cases, you may not be able to set thestreets you want to pass. If you need topass a certain street, set the waypoint onthat street.)

! The route set by your navigation systemmay not use the streets known to local dri-vers, such as small streets or special roads.

! Some route options may become the sameroute. If waypoints are set, only one route iscalculated.

! If the destination is too far, there may be in-stances where the route cannot be set. (Ifyou want to set a long-distance route goingacross several areas, set waypoints alongthe way.)

! During voice guidance, turns and intersec-tions from the freeway are announced.However, if you pass intersections, turns,and other guide points in rapid succession,some may not be announced.

! It is possible that guidance may direct youoff a freeway and then back on again.

Appendix

En 197

AppendixAppendix

! In some cases, the route may require youto travel in the opposite direction to yourcurrent heading. In such cases, you are in-structed to turn around, so please turnaround safely by following the actual trafficrules.

! In some cases, guidance may direct youpast your destination and then indicate aU-turn to get back to it.

! In some cases, a route may begin on theopposite side of a railway or river from youractual current location. If this happens,drive towards your destination for a while,and try route calculation again.

! When there is a traffic congestion or clo-sure ahead, if driving through the trafficcongestion or closure is better than takingthe detour, a detour route may not appear.

! There may be instances when the startingpoint and the destination point are not onthe highlighted route.

! The number of traffic circle exits displayedon the screen may differ from the actualnumber of roads.

Auto Reroute! Auto Reroute is used when you deviate

more than 0.02mile (Approx. 30m) fromthe route.

! The Auto Reroute function does not work inthe following cases:— when your vehicle is not on a street— when you are too close to your destina-

tion— when your vehicle is on a ferry— when driving on a road inside a facility— when driving on a traffic circle— when driving on the routes are de-

scribed in “Route highlighting”! The system assumes the driver deviated

either intentionally or inadvertently fromthe route and searches for another route(intelligent rerouting). Depending on the si-tuation, the system may search a new routethat does not return to the original one.

Route highlighting! Once set, the route is highlighted in bright

green or light blue on the map.! The immediate vicinity of your starting

point and destination may not be high-lighted, and neither will areas with particu-larly complex road layouts. Consequently,the route may appear to be cut off on thedisplay, but voice guidance will continue.

Roads not used in calculationsEven though displayed on screen, the follow-ing roads are not included in route calcula-tions.! Walkways! Public vehicle only! Non access road= For details, refer to Viewing the Map Color Le-gend on page 49

Tracking! Your navigation system marks your course

on the map in certain increments. This iscalled tracking. It is handy when you wantto check a route traveled without guidanceor if returning along a complex route.

! A maximum of about 155 miles (250 km) ismarked and, as you travel beyond this limit,tracking marks are erased in order from themost distant. Tracking display shows about100 miles (160 km) tracking of your vehiclewith white dots.

= For details, refer to Setting the Item on theMap Screen on page 46

Displaying POIPoints of Interest (POI) that can be displayedon the enlarged map of the intersection or[Driver’s View] (left screen) are only the spe-cial Points of Interest (POI) that contain theposition information. Not all of Points of Inter-ests (POI) are displayed.

Appendix

En198

Appendix

Detail Information forPlayable MediaDVD discs and other DVD mediatypes! It may not be possible to use certain func-

tions with some DVD-Video discs.! It may not be possible to play back some

DVD video discs.! When DVD-R/DVD-RW discs are used,

playback is possible only for discs thathave been finalized.

! When DVD-R/DVD-RW discs are used,playback is possible only for discs thathave been recorded in Video format (videomode). It is not possible to play back DVD-R/-RW discs which have been recorded inVideo Recording format (VR mode).

! It may not be possible to play back DVD-R/DVD-RW discs that have been recorded inVideo format (video mode) because of disccharacteristics, scratches or dirt on thedisc, or dirt, scratches or condensation onthe lens of this product.

! It is not possible to play back general DVD-ROM discs or DVD-RAM discs. Only DVD-ROM discs authorized by Pioneer can beread.

! Playback of discs recorded on a personalcomputer may not be possible dependingon the environment and the application set-tings. Please record with the correct for-mat. (For details, contact the manufacturerof the application.)

About playing DualDisc! DualDiscs are two-sided discs that have a

recordable CD for audio on one side and arecordable DVD for video on the other.

! Playback of the DVD side is possible withthis unit. However, since the CD side ofDualDiscs is not physically compatible withthe general CD standard, it may not be pos-sible to play the CD side with this naviga-tion system.

! Frequent loading and ejecting of a Dual-Disc may result in scratches on the disc.

! Serious scratches can lead to playback pro-blems on this navigation system. In somecases, a DualDisc may become stuck inthe disc loading slot and will not eject. Toprevent this, we recommend you refrainfrom using DualDisc with this navigationsystem.

! Please refer to the manufacturer for moredetailed information about DualDiscs.

About AVCHD recorded discs! This unit is not compatible with discs re-

corded in AVCHD (Advanced Video CodecHigh Definition) format. Do not insertAVCHD discs. If inserted, the disc may notbe ejected.

CD-R/CD-RW discs! When CD-R/CD-RW discs are used, play-

back is possible only for discs that havebeen finalized.

! It may not be possible to play back CD-R/CD-RW discs recorded on a music CD re-corder or a personal computer because ofdisc characteristics, scratches or dirt onthe disc, or dirt, scratches or condensationon the lens of this product.

! Playback of discs recorded on a personalcomputer may not be possible, dependingon the environment and the application set-tings. Please record with the correct for-mat. (For details, contact the manufacturerof the application.)

! Playback of CD-R/CD-RW discs may be-come impossible with direct exposure tosunlight, high temperatures, or dependingon the storage conditions in the vehicle.

! Titles and other text information recordedon a CD-R/CD-RW disc may not be dis-played by this product (in the case of audiodata (CD-DA)).

Appendix

En 199

AppendixAppendix

! If you insert a CD-RW disc into this pro-duct, it will take more time to play backthan when you insert a conventional CD orCD-R disc.

! Read the precautions with CD-R/CD-RWdiscs before using them.

MP3 files! When naming an MP3 file, add the corre-

sponding filename extension (.mp3).! This navigation system plays back files with

the filename extension (.mp3) as MP3 files.To prevent noise and malfunctions, do notuse this extension for files other than MP3files.

! MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3 andrefers to an audio compression technologystandard.

! This product allows playback of MP3 fileson CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW discs. Re-corded discs can be played back if they arecompatible with level 1 and level 2 ofISO9660 and with the Romeo and Joliet filesystem.

! It is possible to play back multi-sessioncompatible recorded discs.

! MP3 files are not compatible with packetwrite data transfer.

! The maximum number of characters forthe file and folder name is 32 characters,including extension (.mp3). However thenavigation system uses proportional font.Therefore, the number of the charactersthat you can display varies according to thewidth of each character.

! When playing discs with both MP3 filesand audio data (CD-DA), such as CD-EXTRA and MIXED-MODE CDs, both typescan be played only by switching the modebetween MP3 and CD-DA.

! The folder selection sequence for playbackand other operations is the writing se-quence used by the writing software. Forthis reason, the expected sequence at thetime of playback may not coincide with theactual playback sequence. However, there

also are some writing software that permitthe setting of the playback order.

! Some audio CDs contain tracks that mergeinto one another without a pause. Whenthese discs are converted to MP3 files andburned to a CD-R/CD-RW/CD-ROM, thefiles will be played back on this player witha short pause between each one, regard-less of the length of the pause betweentracks on the original audio CD.

! Files are compatible with the ID3 Tag Ver.1.0 and Ver. 1.1 formats for displayingalbum (disc title), track (track title) and ar-tist (track artist).

! The emphasis function is valid only whenMP3 files of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz fre-quencies are played back. (16 kHz,22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHzsampling frequencies can be played back.)

! There is no m3u playlist compatibility.! There is no compatibility with the MP3i

(MP3 interactive) or MP3 PRO formats.! The sound quality of MP3 files generally im-

proves with an increased bit rate. This pro-duct can play recordings with bit ratesfrom 8 kbps to 320 kbps, but in order to beable to enjoy sound of a certain quality, werecommend only using discs recorded witha bit rate of at least 128 kbps.

! Playing MP3 file on the DVD-R (-RW) is notsupported.

About folders and MP3 filesAn outline of a CD-ROM with MP3 files on it isshown below. Subfolders are shown as foldersin the folder currently selected.p The following figure is an example of the

tier structure in the CD. The numbers in thefigure indicate the order in which foldernumbers are assigned and the order to beplayed back.Indicates the order in which folder num-

bers are assigned.

Appendix

En200

Appendix

Indicates each file. The number is assignedin the order of the track to be played back.

31 2

1 First tier2 Second tier3 Third tier

Notes

! This product assigns folder numbers. The usercan not assign folder numbers.

! If you are using a folder that does not containan MP3 file, the folder itself will display butyou will not be able to see any files in thefolder.

! MP3 files in up to 8 tiers of folders can beplayed back. However, there is a delay whenstarting playback on discs with numeroustiers. For this reason we recommend creatingdiscs with no more than 2 tiers.

! It is possible to play back up to 253 folders onone disc.

Appendix

En 201

AppendixAppendix

Display InformationNavigation menu[Destination] menu

Page

Address Search 28

Return Home 55, 58

Go to 55, 58

POI Search 51

Route Overview 34

Address Book 56, 58

Destination History 56, 64

Telephone Search 55

Vicinity Search 53

Cancel Route 33

[Information] menu

Page

Traffic On Route 66

Traffic Events 65

Traffic Flow 67

Traffic Settings 69

Phone Menu

Dial 81

Phone Book 82, 84

Dial Favorites 82, 84

Read Bus. Card 83

Dialed Numbers 81, 86

Received Calls 81, 86

Phone Settings 78

Stock Info 70

Set My Favorites 70

My Favorites 71

Emergency Info 73

XM Status 72

[Map] menu

Page

Displayed Info

Close Up View 46

City Map 46

Tracking Display 46

Show Mute Button 46

Show Traffic Incident 46

Second Maneuver Arrow 46

Bluetooth Connected 46

Address Book Icon 46

3D Landmark 46

Short-Cut Selection 48

Overlay POI 49

Map Legend 49

View Mode 49

Day/Night Display 50

Appendix

En202

Appendix

AV Guide Mode 50

Road Color 50

[Settings] menu

Page

Volume 88

Regional Settings

Language 88

Time 89

Keyboard 89

km / mile 89

Average Speed 90

Hardware

Connection Status 90

3D Calibration Status 91

Installation Angle Setup 92

Service Info Screen 92

Hard Disk Info 92

Defined Locations 58

Background Picture Setting 93

Demo Mode 95

Modify Current Location 95

Restore Factory Settings 96

Shortcut menup The shortcuts displayed on screen can be

customized.p Items marked with an asterisk (*) cannot

be removed from Shortcut menu.= For details, refer to Selecting the Shortcut onpage 48

Shortcut menu

Page

: Destination* 45

: Route Options*

Route Condition 34

Avoid Toll Road 34

Avoid Ferry 34

Avoid Freeway 34

Time restrictions 34

Learning Route 34

: Registration 59

: Vicinity Search 54

: Overlay POI 49

: Volume 88

: Phone Book 82, 84

: Dial Favorite 1 to Dial Favorite 5 82, 84

: Whole Route Overview 36

: Stock Info 70

: Set My Favorites 70

: My Favorites 71

: Traffic On Route 66

: Traffic Events 65

: Day/Night Display 50

: Address Book Icon Display 46

Appendix

En 203

AppendixAppendix

Menu in the Audio Screen[Audio Settings] menu

Page

Equalizer 142

Staging 142

FAD/BAL 142

Sub Woofer 145

Loudness 145

HPF 146

Source Level 146

[System Settings] menu

Page

DVD-V Setup 147

Wide Mode 149

Camera Input 149

AV Input 150

AUX Input 150

Mute Set 150

Mute Level 151

Guide/Tel SP 151

Auto ANT 151

Clock DISP 151

REC Mode 152

Rear SP 152

5.1Ch Setup 152

Appendix

En204

Appendix

Glossary3D Hybrid sensorThe built-in sensor which enables the systemto estimate your vehicle’s position. A learningfunction increases its accuracy and its learn-ing data can be stored in memory.

Address BookA list of locations registered manually.

Aspect ratioThis is the width-to-height ratio of a TV screen.A regular display has an aspect ratio of 4:3.Wide screen displays have an aspect ratio of16:9, providing a bigger picture for exceptionalpresence and atmosphere.

Bit rateThis expresses data volume per second, or bpsunits (bits per second). The higher the rate,the more information is available to reproducethe sound. Using the same encoding method(such as MP3), the higher the rate, the betterthe sound.

ChapterDVD titles are in turn divided into chapterswhich are numbered in the same way as thechapters of a book. With DVD-Video discs fea-turing chapters, you can quickly find a desiredscene with chapter search.

Current locationThe present location of your vehicle; your cur-rent location is shown on the map by a red tri-angle mark.

Default settingA factory setting which applies when you firstswitch on the system; you can customize de-fault settings to suit your own needs in themenu.

DestinationA location you choose as the end point of yourjourney.

Dolby DigitalDolby Digital provides multi-channel audiofrom up to 5.1 independent channels. This isthe same as the Dolby Digital surround soundsystem used in theaters.

Manufactured under license from DolbyLaboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbolare trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

DTSThis stands for Digital Theater Systems. DTS isa surround system delivering multi-channelaudio from up to 6 independent channels.

“DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are registered tra-demarks of DTS, Inc.

Favorite locationA frequently visited location (such as yourworkplace or a relative’s home) that you canregister to allow easy routing.

GPSGlobal Positioning System. A network of satel-lites that provides navigation signals for a vari-ety of purposes.

Appendix

En 205

AppendixAppendix

Gracenote® Music recognition serviceMusic recognition technology and relateddata are provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote isthe industry standard in music recognitiontechnology and related content delivery. Formore information visit www.gracenote.com.

Guidance modeThe mode in which guidance is given as youdrive to your destination; the system automati-cally switches to this mode as soon as a routehas been set.

Guidance pointThese are important landmarks along yourroute, generally intersections. The next gui-dance point along your route is indicated onthe map by the yellow flag icon.

Home locationYour registered home location.

ID3 tagThis is a method of embedding track-relatedinformation in a MP3 file. This embedded in-formation can include the track title, the ar-tist’s name, the album title, the music genre,the year of production, comments and otherdata. The contents can be freely edited usingsoftware with ID3 Tag editing functions.Although the tags are restricted to the numberof characters, the information can be viewedwhen the track is played back.

ISO9660 formatThis is the international standard for the for-mat logic of DVD/CD-ROM folders and files.For the ISO9660 format, there are regulationsfor the following two levels:Level 1:The file name is in 8.3 format (the name con-sists of up to 8 characters, half-byte English

capital letters, half-byte numerals and the “_”sign, with a file-extension of three characters).Level 2:The file name can have up to 31 characters (in-cluding the separation mark “.” and a file ex-tension). Each folder contains less than 8hierarchies.Extended formatsJoliet:File names can have up to 64 characters.Romeo:File names can have up to 128 characters.

Linear PCM (LPCM)/Pulse codemodulationThis stands for linear pulse code modulation,which is the signal recording system used formusic CDs and DVDs. Generally, DVDs are re-corded with higher sampling frequency andbit rate than CDs. Therefore, DVDs can providehigher sound quality.

m3uPlaylists created using the “WINAMP” soft-ware have a playlist file extension (.m3u).

MenuA list of options shown on the display; choicesare selected touching the display.

MP3MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3. It is anaudio compression standard set by a workinggroup (MPEG) of the ISO (International Stan-dards Organization). MP3 is able to compressaudio data to about 1/10th the size of a con-ventional disc.

MPEGThis stands for Moving Pictures ExpertsGroup, and is an international video imagecompression standard. Some DVDs feature di-gital audio compressed and recorded usingthis system.

Appendix

En206

Appendix

Multi-angleWith regular TV programs, although multiplecameras are used to simultaneously shootscenes, only images from one camera at atime are transmitted to your TV. Some DVDsfeature scenes shot from multiple angles, let-ting you choose your viewing angle as desired.

Multi-audio (Multilingual dialog)Some DVDs feature dialog recorded in multi-ple languages. Dialog in up to 8 languagescan be recorded on a single disc, letting youchoose as desired.

Multi-sessionMulti-session is a recording method that al-lows additional data to be recorded later.When recording data on a CD-ROM, CD-R orCD-RW, etc., all data from beginning to end istreated as a single unit or session. Multi-ses-sion is a method of recording more than 2 ses-sions in one disc.

Multi-subtitleSubtitles in up to 32 languages can be re-corded on a single DVD, letting you choose asdesired.

Optical digital outputBy transmitting audio signals in a digital sig-nal format, the chance of sonic quality dete-riorating in the course of transmission isminimized. An optical digital output is de-signed to transmit digital signals optically.

Packet writeThis is a general term for a method of writingon CD-R, etc. at the time required for a file,just as is done with files on floppy or harddiscs.

Parental lockSome DVD-Video discs with violent or adult-or-iented scenes feature parental lock which pre-vents children from viewing such scenes. Withthis kind of disc, if you set the unit’s parentallock level, playback of scenes inappropriate for

children will be disabled, or these scenes willbe skipped.

Point of Interest (POI)Point Of Interest; any of a range of locationsstored in the data, such as railway stations,shops, restaurants, and amusement parks.

Region numberDVD players and DVD discs feature regionnumbers indicating the area in which theywere purchased. Playback of a DVD is not pos-sible unless it features the same region num-ber as the DVD player. The navigation system’sregion number is displayed on the bottom ofthe navigation unit.

Route settingThe process of determining the ideal route to aspecific location; route setting is done auto-matically by the system when you specify adestination.

Set routeThe route marked out by the system to yourdestination. It is highlighted in bright green onthe map.

TitleDVD-Video discs have a high data capacity, en-abling recording of multiple movies on a sin-gle disc. If, for example, one disc containsthree separate movies, they are divided intotitle 1, title 2 and title 3. This lets you enjoy theconvenience of title search and other func-tions.

TrackingMarks on the map indicating the route youhave traveled.

TV system (NTSC, PAL, SECAM)Different areas of the world use different TVsystems. North America uses NTSC, Europeuses PAL and SECAM, and South Americauses PAL-M, PAL-N, PAL and NTSC.

Appendix

En 207

AppendixAppendix

Almost all are incompatible with each other.To display the video image, such as TV or DVD-video correctly, you may need to coordinateyour system at the same TV system or use amulti-system equipment.

VBRVBR is short for variable bit rate. Generallyspeaking CBR (constant bit rate) is morewidely used. But by flexibly adjusting the bitrate according to the needs of audio compres-sion, it is possible to achieve compressionpriority sound quality.

Voice guidanceThe giving of directions by a recorded voicewhile in guidance mode.

Voice recognitionThe technology that allows the system to un-derstand the driver’s voice commands.

WaypointA location that you choose to visit before yourdestination; a journey can be built up frommultiple way points and the destination.

Appendix

En208

Appendix

0-9

3D hybrid mode ............................................1923D Hybrid Sensor ..........................................1923D Landmark ...................................................473D POI ..............................................................39

AActive touch panel key ...................................28Address Book ............................................60,.82Address Search ...............................................28Album group .................................................113Artist group ....................................................113Audio operation ..............................................97Auto antenna .................................................151Auto fill-in function .........................................30Auto reroute .....................................................23Auto Reroute .................................................198AUX input ......................................................141AV Guide Mode ...............................................50AV Input .........................................................139AV Settings menu ...........................................99Average Speed ................................................90

BBackground Picture ........................................93Backlight ........................................................154Bluetooth unit .................................................77BSM ................................................................109BSSM ..............................................................138Business card ..................................................83

C

Cancel Route ...................................................33CD-R (-RW) ..........................................85,.93,.94CD-TEXT ..................................................100,.110Contacts ...........................................................83Current location ..............................................33

D

Dead reckoning .............................................192Default or Factory Settings ..........................187Demo Mode .....................................................95Destination History .........................................64Dialed number history ...................................81Direct scale key ...............................................43Distance study .................................................92Dolby Digital ..................................................205DTS .................................................................205

E

Enlarged map of the intersection .................40Equalizer .........................................................142Estimated time of arrival ................................42External Unit ..................................................139

FFavorite location ..............................................58Frame-by-frame playback .............................105Front display ..................................................197Front Display ....................................................10

G

Genre group ...................................................113GPS .................................................................191Gracenote® Data-base ................................100,.110,.111,.113,.122Guidance point ................................................41

H

Hands-free phoning ........................................86Hands-free Phoning .......................................77Hard Disk Drive .......................................24,.197Hard disk recording ......................................100Heading up ......................................................41High pass filter ..............................................146Home location .................................................58

I

ID3 tag ....................................................103,.206Inactive touch panel key ................................28Incoming call ...................................................80Installation angle ............................................92IPod .................................................................134ISO9660 format .............................................206

JJoliet ...............................................................206JPEG .................................................................95

K

Keyboard ....................................................30,.89

L

Language .................................................88,.147Learning Route ................................................35Learning Status ...............................................91Linear PCM ....................................................206

Index

En 209

Location confirmation screen .......................31

M

M3u .................................................................206Map Legend .....................................................49Map matching ...............................................193Map Mode ........................................................38Mode1 ...............................................................95MPEG ..............................................................206Multi Angle ....................................................147Multiple routes ................................................32Multi-session .................................................207Music Library .........................................110,.112MUTE lead .............................................150,.151Muting/attenuation ...............................150,.151My Favorite group .........................................113My Mix ............................................................116

N

North up ...........................................................42Notification icon ..............................................68

P

Packet write ...................................................207Parental lock ..........................................148,.207Parking brake interlock ..................................22Phone book ......................................................83Phone Menu ....................................................77Picture adjustment .......................................153Playlist ....................................................113,.159POI ........................................23,.51,.53,.158,.198Profile for the Bluetooth unit ........................77

QQ ......................................................................143

RRear display ...................................................153Rear Display ....................................................10Rear view camera ...................................22,.149Received call history ......................................81Region number .............................................207Roads without turn-by-turn instructions ......43Romeo ............................................................206Route calculation condition ..........................32Route Calculation Conditions .......................34Route confirmation screen ............................32

S

Scroll mode .....................................................43Second Maneuver Arrow ...............................47Simple hybrid mode .............................179,.192Simulated sound stage ................................144Single-session ..................................................95Slow-motion playback ..................................105Source ..............................................................97Speed Pulse .......................................90,.91,.194Speed pulse generator .........................192,.194Splash Screen ...........................................93,.95Steering Remote Control .................78,.98,.156Street list screen .............................................31Street name or city name input screen .......29Stylus ..............................................................191Subwoofer ..............................................145,.152

T

Text box .............................................................30Time difference ................................................89Time restrictions .............................................35Touch Panel Calibration ...............................190Tracking ..........................................................198Tracking Display ..............................................46Travel time ........................................................42TV system .......................................................207

UUnit of distance and speed ...........................89

VVBR .........................................................104,.208Vehicle Dynamics Display .............................76Video image .....................................................10View mode .......................................................38Voice Commands ..........................................159Voice Help menu ..........................................157Voice Operation .............................................156Volume ..............................................................88

W

Waypoint ..........................................................41Waypoints ........................................................36Wide screen mode ........................................149

Index

En210

PIONEER CORPORATION4-1, MEGURO 1-CHOME, MEGURO-KUTOKYO 153-8654, JAPAN

PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.P.O. Box 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A.TEL: (800) 421-1404

PIONEER EUROPE NVHaven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, BelgiumTEL: (0) 3/570.05.11

PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936TEL: 65-6472-7555

PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, AustraliaTEL: (03) 9586-6300

PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, CanadaTEL: 1-877-283-5901TEL: 905-479-4411

PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO, S.A. de C.V.Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 pisoCol.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico, D.F. 11000TEL:55-9178-4270

先鋒股份有限公司總公司 : 台北市中山北路二段44號13樓電話 : (02) 2521-3588

先鋒電子（香港）有限公司香港九龍尖沙咀海港城世界商業中心9樓901-6室電話 : (0852) 2848-6488

Published by Pioneer Corporation.Copyright © 2008 by Pioneer Corporation.All rights reserved.

Printed in China

<CRB2619-B/U> UC<KSKZX> <08F00000>

Documents

HDD MULTIMEDIA AV NAVIGATION SERVER AVIC-Z3 · HDD MULTIMEDIA AV NAVIGATION SERVER AVIC-Z3 Notice to all users: This software requires that the navigation system is ... Voice To Ensure